Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 915

M 2700, M 2701, IM 2702

Machine Code: D0B2/D0B3/D0B4


Field Service Manual
Ver 1.0

Latest Release: -
Initial Release: April, 2019
Copyright (c) 2019 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.
Important Safety Notices

Warnings, Cautions, Notes

In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.

• A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning could result in
death or serious injury.

• A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution could result in
minor or moderate injury or damage to the machine or other property.

• Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals, loss of
valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine.

• This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.

General Safety Instructions

For your safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product. Keep this manual handy
for future reference.
Safety Information
Always obey the following safety precautions when using this product.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.

[A]: ON
[B]: OFF
[C]: Push ON/Push OFF
[D]: Standby

Switches and Symbols


Where symbols are used on or near switches on machines for Europe and other areas, the meaning of
each symbol conforms with IEC60417.
Safety

Prevention of Physical Injury


1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the machine and peripherals, make sure that the
machine and peripheral power cords are unplugged.
2. The plug should be near the machine and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the machine and the paper tray unit are supplied with electrical
voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. Always unplug the power cord from the power source before you move the product. Before you
move the machine, arrange the power cord so it will not fall under the machine.
5. Disconnect all peripheral units (finisher, LCT, etc.) from the mainframe before you move the
machine.
6. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the main
switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components.
7. The machine drives some of its components when it completes the warm-up period. Be careful to
keep hands away from the mechanical and electrical components as the machine starts operation.
8. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the machine is
operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.
9. To prevent a fire or explosion, keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and
aerosols.
10. Do not use flammable sprays or solvent in the vicinity of the machine. Also, avoid placing these
items in the vicinity of the machine. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
11. To avoid fire or explosion, never use an organic cleaner near any part that generates heat.
12. Clean the floor completely after accidental spillage of silicone oil or other materials to prevent
slippery surfaces that could cause accidents leading to hand or leg injuries.
13. Never remove any safety device unless it requires replacement. Always replace safety devices
immediately.
14. Never do any procedure that defeats the function of any safety device.
15. Modification or removal of a safety device (fuse, switch, etc.) could lead to a fire and personal
injury. Always test the operation of the machine to ensure that it is operating normally and safely
after removal and replacement of any safety device.
16. For replacements use only the correct fuses or circuit breakers rated for use with the machine.
Using replacement devices not designed for use with the machine could lead to a fire and personal
injuries.
17. For machines installed with the ADF/ARDF:
When a thick book or three-dimensional original is placed on the exposure glass and the ARDF
cover is lowered, the back side of the ARDF rises up to accommodate the original. Therefore, when
closing the ARDF, please be sure to keep your hands away from the hinges at the back of the
ARDF.
18. When using a vacuum cleaner around the machine, keep others away from the cleaner, especially
small children.
19. For machines installed with the anti-tip components:
The anti-tip components are necessary for meeting the requirements of IEC60950-1, the
international standard for safety. The aim of these components is to prevent the products, which
are heavy in weight, from toppling as a result of people running into or leaning onto the products,
which can lead to serious accidents such as persons becoming trapped under the product. (U.S.:
UL60950-1, Europe: EN60950-1) Therefore, removal of such components must always be with the
consent of the customer. Do not remove them at your own judgment.
20. NEVER touch the AC circuits on the PSU board to prevent electric shock caused by residual
charge. Residual charge of about 100V-400V remains in the AC circuits on the PSU board for
several months even when the board has been removed from the machine after turning off the
machine power and unplugging the power cord.
Health Safety Conditions
1. For the machines installed with the ozone filters:
• Never operate the machine without the ozone filters installed.
• Always replace the ozone filters with the specified types at the proper intervals.
2. The machine, which use high voltage power source, can generate ozone gas. High ozone density
is harmful to human health. Therefore, locate the machine in a large well ventilated room that has
an air turnover rate of more than 50m3/hr/person.
3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it may
cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water as first aid. If
unsuccessful, get medical attention.
Observance of Electrical Safety Standards
1. The machine and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service
representative who has completed the training course on those models with exceptions on some
machines where the installation can be handled by the user.
Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal
• Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to an
open flame.
• Dispose of used toner, developer, organic photoconductors, and AIO unit in accordance with local
regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
• Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
• When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than 100
batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to chemical
reactions and heat build-up.

The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the
same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Handling Toner
• Work carefully when removing paper jams or replacing toner bottles or cartridges to avoid spilling
toner on clothing or the hands.
• If toner is inhaled, immediately gargle with large amounts of cold water and move to a well-
ventilated location. If there are signs of irritation or other problems, seek medical attention.
• If toner gets on the skin, wash immediately with soap and cold running water.
• If toner gets into the eyes, flush the eyes with cold running water or eye wash. If there are signs of
irritation or other problems, seek medical attention.
• If toner is swallowed, drink a large amount of cold water to dilute the ingested toner. If there are
signs of any problem, seek medical attention.
• If toner spills on clothing, wash the affected area immediately with soap and cold water. Never use
hot water! Hot water can cause toner to set and permanently stain fabric.
• Always store toner and developer supplies such as toner and developer packages, cartridges,
bottles (including used toner and empty bottles and cartridges), and AIO unit out of the reach of
children.
• Always store fresh toner supplies or empty bottles or cartridges in a cool, dry location that is not
exposed to direct sunlight.
• Do not use a vacuum cleaner to remove spilled toner (including used toner). Vacuumed toner may
cause a fire or explosion due to sparks or electrical contact inside the cleaner. However, it is
possible to use a cleaner designed to be dust explosion-proof. If toner is spilled over the floor,
sweep up spilled toner slowly and clean up any remaining toner with a wet cloth.
Handling the development unit cooling system
For the machines installed the development cooling system:
1. The development unit cooling system circulates propylene glycol from a sealed tank through hoses
that pass behind cooling plates on the sides of each development unit.
2. The coolant tank is located at the bottom of the cooling box on the back of the main machine.
3. Always obey local laws and regulations if you need to dispose of a tank or the propylene glycol
coolant.
4. The tank must never be emptied directly into a local drainage system, river, pond, or lake.
5. Contact a professional industrial waste disposal organization and ask them to dispose of the tank.
Lithium Batteries for Taiwan
Laser Safety

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical units
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and
laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.

• Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this
manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
WARNING FOR LASER UNIT
WARNING:
Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser
beams can seriously damage your eyes.

Safety Instructions for the Color Controller

Fuse
The color controller uses a double pole fuse. If this fuse blows, be sure to replace it with an identical
fuse.
Batteries

Always replace a battery with the same type of battery prescribed for use with the color controller unit.
Replacing a battery with any type other than the one prescribed for use could cause an explosion.
• Never discard used batteries by mixing them with other batteries or other refuse.
• Always remove used batteries from the work site and dispose of them in accordance with local
laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such items.
Symbols and Abbreviations
This manual uses the following symbols and abbreviations:

Symbols:

Screw
Black screw
Connector
Flexible flat cable (FFC)
Hook
Clamp
Clip ring
E-ring
C-ring
Timing belt
Spring
Location of a screw(s) to be tightened or loosened.

Location of a connector(s), clamp(s) or spring(s) to be removed


Direction (Rotating or moving)

Abbreviations:

Abbreviations such as (M1), (S1), or (TH1) after the names of some electrical components indicate that
those components are shown on a Point-to-Point diagram.
Abbreviation Meaning
SEF Short edge feed
LEF Long edge feed

[A] Short edge feed (SEF)


[B] Long edge feed (LEF)
Destination:

Abbreviation Destination
EU (-27) Europe
AP (-29) Asia-Pacific
TWN (-19) Taiwan
CHN (-21, -25) China
Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, PageMaker, PostScript, and Genuine Adobe® PostScript® 3TM are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Firefox and Thunderbird are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
Dropbox is a registered trademark or trademark of Dropbox, Inc.
Google, Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome, Google Play, and Android are registered trademarks for
Google Inc.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
JAWS® is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific, Inc., St. Petersburg, Florida and/or other
countries.
Kerberos is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT).
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
Macintosh, OS X, Bonjour, Safari, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge, and Outlook are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States and/or other countries.
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other
countries.
"Red Hat" is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.
The SD and SD logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
UPnP is a trademark of UPnP Implementers Corporation.

This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software of EMC Corporation. RSA and BSAFE are
registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and other countries.
The proper names of Internet Explorer 9, 10, and 11 are as follows:
• Windows® Internet Explorer® 9
• Internet Explorer® 10
• Internet Explorer® 11
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product names of Windows Vista are as follows: Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium Microsoft®
Windows Vista® Home Basic Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate Microsoft® Windows® 7
Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Microsoft®
Windows® 8.1 Pro Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 10 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows® 10 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro Microsoft® Windows® 10 Enterprise Microsoft® Windows® 10
Education
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008
Standard Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008
R2 Standard Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012
Foundation Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012
Standard
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 R2 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012
R2 Foundation Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials Microsoft® Windows Server®
2012 R2 Standard
• The product names of Windows Server 2016 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016
Standard Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 Essentials Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016
Datacenter Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 MultiPoint Premium Server
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
Table of Contents
1. Product Information .......................................................................................................................... 13
Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration ................................................................................... 13
System Configuration and Options ................................................................................................... 13
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with The Predecessor Product ............................................... 16
Comparison with Previous Models ................................................................................................... 16
Specifications........................................................................................................................................ 19
2. Installation ......................................................................................................................................... 20
Installation Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 20
Environment ...................................................................................................................................... 20
Machine Level ................................................................................................................................... 21
Minimum Space Requirements ........................................................................................................ 21
Machine Dimensions ........................................................................................................................ 21
Power Requirements ........................................................................................................................ 22
Copier Installation (D0B2,D0B3) .......................................................................................................... 23
Accessory Check .............................................................................................................................. 23
Installation Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 23
Checking the copy image with the test chart .................................................................................... 30
Moving the Machine.......................................................................................................................... 30
Transporting the Machine ................................................................................................................. 30
Copier Installation (D0B4) .................................................................................................................... 32
Accessory Check .............................................................................................................................. 32
Installation Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 32
Checking the copy image with the test chart .................................................................................... 37
Moving the Machine.......................................................................................................................... 37
Transporting the Machine ................................................................................................................. 37
Paper Feed Unit PB2030/2040 ............................................................................................................ 38
Accessory Check .............................................................................................................................. 38
Installation Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 38
Anti-condensation Heater for Main Paper Feed Tray .......................................................................... 53
Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 53
Accessory Check .............................................................................................................................. 53
Installation Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 54
Anti-condensation Heater for Option Paper Feed Tray (Single Paper Feed Unit) .............................. 61
Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 61
Accessory Check .............................................................................................................................. 61
Installation Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 62
Anti-condensation Heater for Option Paper Feed Tray (Double Paper Feed Unit) ............................. 68

1
Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 68
Accessory Check .............................................................................................................................. 68
Installation Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 69
Bypass Tray Cover Type M16 .............................................................................................................. 79
Accessory Check .............................................................................................................................. 79
Installation Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 79
IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type P16 (D0B2,D0B3)............................................................................ 83
Accessory Check .............................................................................................................................. 83
Installation Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 83
NPB (PaaS) (D0B2,D0B3) ................................................................................................................... 85
PaaS Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 85
Unregistering PaaS........................................................................................................................... 88
Changing Registered Device/ Main Board ....................................................................................... 88
NPB (PaaS) (D0B4).............................................................................................................................. 93
PaaS Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 93
Unregistering PaaS........................................................................................................................... 94
Changing Registered Device/ Main Board ....................................................................................... 95
Inner 1bin Tray BN2020 (D0B4) ......................................................................................................... 101
Accessory Check ............................................................................................................................ 101
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 101
Fax Option Type M38 (D0B4) ............................................................................................................ 107
Accessory Check ............................................................................................................................ 107
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 107
Adding Fax Application Icons to the Home Screen ........................................................................ 109
Registering the Function key .......................................................................................................... 109
Function Priority Setting ................................................................................................................. 112
Notes for Connecting the Telephone Line ...................................................................................... 113
NFC Card Reader Type M38 (D0B4) ................................................................................................. 114
Component Check .......................................................................................................................... 114
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 114
Machine Data Encryption (D0B4) ....................................................................................................... 120
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 120
Setting Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 120
Data That is Encrypted ................................................................................................................... 121
Enabling the Encryption Settings ................................................................................................... 124
Backing Up the Encryption Key ...................................................................................................... 125
Recovery Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 126
Restoring the Encryption Key ......................................................................................................... 126
Forced Start Up with No Encryption Key ........................................................................................ 127
2
Operation Guidance for Users............................................................................................................ 129
Daily Machine Maintenance ........................................................................................................... 129
3. Preventive Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 132
Preventive Maintenance Tables ......................................................................................................... 132
PM Parts Settings ............................................................................................................................... 133
PM Parts Replacement Procedure ................................................................................................. 133
After Installing the New PM parts ................................................................................................... 133
Operation Check ............................................................................................................................. 133
4. Replacement and Adjustment ........................................................................................................ 134
Beforehand ......................................................................................................................................... 134
Special Tools and Lubricants ............................................................................................................. 135
Location to Apply G-1077 Grease .................................................................................................. 135
Location to Apply KS660B Grease ................................................................................................. 144
Location to Apply MDF-2400E Grease........................................................................................... 145
Location to Apply EM-50L Grease ................................................................................................. 179
Location to Apply RA44-3502 Grease ............................................................................................ 192
Location to Apply 50G .................................................................................................................... 193
Location to Apply G-501 Grease .................................................................................................... 194
Location to Apply SILICONE OIL TYPE-SS................................................................................... 196
Exterior Covers ................................................................................................................................... 198
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 198
Front Door ....................................................................................................................................... 202
Paper Tray 1 ................................................................................................................................... 202
Front Right Cover (D0B2,D0B3) ..................................................................................................... 203
Front Upper Cover (D0B4) ............................................................................................................. 203
Inner Cover ..................................................................................................................................... 204
Left Cover ....................................................................................................................................... 208
Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3) ............................................................................................................... 208
Rear Cover (D0B4) ......................................................................................................................... 209
Right Rear Cover ............................................................................................................................ 209
Right Upper Cover .......................................................................................................................... 210
Paper Exit Tray ............................................................................................................................... 210
Right Door ....................................................................................................................................... 211
ADF Unit (D0B3) ................................................................................................................................. 215
ADF Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 215
Platen Cover Sensor....................................................................................................................... 215
ADF Front Cover............................................................................................................................. 216
ADF Rear Cover ............................................................................................................................. 217
Document Table ............................................................................................................................. 218

3
Original Width Sensor (S17) ........................................................................................................... 218
Pick-up Roller ................................................................................................................................. 219
Separation Pad ............................................................................................................................... 220
ADF Cover Sensor (S19), Original Set Sensor (S18) .................................................................... 221
ADF/Platen Cover Sensor (S21) .................................................................................................... 222
ADF Pick-up Solenoid (SOL3) ........................................................................................................ 223
ADF Inverter Solenoid (SOL2)........................................................................................................ 223
ADF Feed Roller ............................................................................................................................. 224
ADF Main Motor (M6) ..................................................................................................................... 229
ADF Registration Sensor (S20) ...................................................................................................... 230
ADF Unit (D0B4) ................................................................................................................................. 232
ADF Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 232
Original Feed Unit ........................................................................................................................... 233
Rear Cover...................................................................................................................................... 234
Front Cover and Original Tray ........................................................................................................ 234
Hinge............................................................................................................................................... 235
Original Length Sensors (SN12) (SN13) (SN14) and Original Sensor (SN11).............................. 242
Original Set Sensor (SN8) .............................................................................................................. 243
Original Width Sensors (SN1) (SN2) (SN3) (SN4) (SN5) and Skew Correction Sensor (SN10) .. 245
Original Exit Sensor (SN7) ............................................................................................................. 246
Registration Sensor (SN6).............................................................................................................. 247
ADF Position Sensor (SN9) ............................................................................................................ 247
Cover Switch (SWC1) ..................................................................................................................... 248
Feed Motor (MT1) ........................................................................................................................... 248
Transport Motor (MT2).................................................................................................................... 250
Stamp Solenoid (SL3)..................................................................................................................... 250
Pick-up Solenoid (SL2) ................................................................................................................... 252
Inverter Solenoid (SL1) ................................................................................................................... 253
Paper Feed Clutch (CLT1) ............................................................................................................. 253
Feed Belt......................................................................................................................................... 253
Pick-Up Roller ................................................................................................................................. 254
Separation Roller ............................................................................................................................ 255
DF Main Board (BD1) ..................................................................................................................... 256
Operation Panel .................................................................................................................................. 257
4-Line LCD (D0B2,D0B3) ............................................................................................................... 257
Smart Operation Panel (D0B4)....................................................................................................... 258
Scanner (D0B2,D0B3) ........................................................................................................................ 263
Top Rear Cover .............................................................................................................................. 263
Scanner........................................................................................................................................... 264
4
Exposure Glass Unit ....................................................................................................................... 266
CIS Unit........................................................................................................................................... 267
Scanner Drive Belt .......................................................................................................................... 267
Scanner HP Sensor (S1) ................................................................................................................ 268
Original Size Sensors (S3) ............................................................................................................. 269
Scanner Motor (M1) ........................................................................................................................ 269
Adjusting the Scanner Parameters................................................................................................. 270
Scanner (D0B4) .................................................................................................................................. 271
Scanner Exterior ............................................................................................................................. 271
Exposure Glass .............................................................................................................................. 278
Scanner Carriage............................................................................................................................ 280
Scanner Motor (M1) ........................................................................................................................ 287
APS Sensors (S22)......................................................................................................................... 288
Scanner Home Position Sensor (S1) ............................................................................................. 289
ADF/Platen Cover Sensor (S21) .................................................................................................... 290
Scanner FFC................................................................................................................................... 290
Laser Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 294
Warning Decal Location ................................................................................................................. 294
Toner Shield Glass ......................................................................................................................... 294
Laser Unit........................................................................................................................................ 294
PCDU Section..................................................................................................................................... 296
Before Replacing a PCU or Development Unit .............................................................................. 296
PCDU .............................................................................................................................................. 296
Pick-off Pawls ................................................................................................................................. 299
OPC Drum ...................................................................................................................................... 299
Charge Roller and Cleaning Brush ................................................................................................. 301
Cleaning Blade ............................................................................................................................... 302
Developer........................................................................................................................................ 303
Mixing Auger Bearings.................................................................................................................... 307
Quenching Lamp (L1) ..................................................................................................................... 309
After Replacement or Adjustment .................................................................................................. 310
Toner Supply Motor (M5) ................................................................................................................... 311
Fusing ................................................................................................................................................. 312
Fusing Unit ...................................................................................................................................... 312
Fusing Entrance Guide Plate.......................................................................................................... 314
Fusing Exit Guide Plate .................................................................................................................. 315
Thermistor (H1) (H2)....................................................................................................................... 315
Fusing Lamp ................................................................................................................................... 316
Hot Roller Stripper Pawls ............................................................................................................... 317

5
Hot Roller and Hot Roller Bearings ................................................................................................ 318
Thermostat (S4) .............................................................................................................................. 318
Pressure Roller and Bushings ........................................................................................................ 319
NIP Band Width Adjustment ........................................................................................................... 320
Contact/Release Solenoid (SOL1) ................................................................................................. 321
Paper Exit Section .............................................................................................................................. 323
Paper Exit Sensor (S5) ................................................................................................................... 323
Paper Feed Section ............................................................................................................................ 325
Friction Roller .................................................................................................................................. 325
Paper Feed Roller / Pickup roller.................................................................................................... 325
Tray Lift Unit.................................................................................................................................... 326
Tray Lift Motor (M4) ........................................................................................................................ 328
Paper Size Switch (SW4) ............................................................................................................... 329
Registration Roller .......................................................................................................................... 331
Registration Sensor (S16) .............................................................................................................. 333
Paper End Sensor (S12), Upper Limit Sensor (S13) ..................................................................... 334
Bypass Tray .................................................................................................................................... 335
Bypass Paper Feed Roller.............................................................................................................. 336
Bypass Tray Friction Pad ............................................................................................................... 338
Bypass Paper End Sensor (S9)...................................................................................................... 339
Bypass Width Sensor (S10), Bypass Length Sensor (S11) ........................................................... 340
Duplex Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 342
Transfer Roller ................................................................................................................................ 342
Duplex Guide Plate ......................................................................................................................... 342
Transfer Guide Unit ........................................................................................................................ 343
ID Sensor (S6) ................................................................................................................................ 344
Relay Roller (driven) ....................................................................................................................... 348
Electrical Components........................................................................................................................ 350
MPU (PCB7) (D0B2,D0B3) ............................................................................................................ 350
MPU (PCB7) (D0B4)....................................................................................................................... 351
EEPROM (D0B2,D0B3) .................................................................................................................. 354
NVRAM,EEPROM (D0B4).............................................................................................................. 357
PSU (Power Supply Unit) (PCB1) .................................................................................................. 381
HVPS (High-Voltage Power Supply Board) (PCB3)....................................................................... 382
Main Motor (M3) ............................................................................................................................. 383
Main Fan (FAN2) ............................................................................................................................ 384
Exhaust Fan (FAN1) ....................................................................................................................... 384
Room Temperature Sensor (S14) .................................................................................................. 385
Paper Exit Clutch (CL1) , Reverse Clutch (CL7) ............................................................................ 386
6
Paper Feed Clutch (CL4)................................................................................................................ 388
Bypass Paper Feed Clutch (CL5) ................................................................................................... 390
Duplex Clutch (CL2) ....................................................................................................................... 390
Registration Clutch (CL3) ............................................................................................................... 392
Relay Clutch (CL6) ......................................................................................................................... 393
Right Door Switch (SW1)................................................................................................................ 395
Interlock Switch (SW2) ................................................................................................................... 396
Front Door Switch (SW5) (D0B4) ................................................................................................... 396
Adjustment after Replacement (D0B2,D0B3) .................................................................................... 397
Printing ............................................................................................................................................ 397
Scanning ......................................................................................................................................... 398
ADF Image Adjustment .................................................................................................................. 399
Adjustment after Replacement (D0B4) .............................................................................................. 400
Image Adjustment After Replacing Parts ....................................................................................... 400
Image Position Adjustment ............................................................................................................. 400
Scanning Adjustment ...................................................................................................................... 403
ADF Image Adjustment .................................................................................................................. 404
5. System Maintenance (D0B2,D0B3) ............................................................................................... 406
Service Menu ...................................................................................................................................... 406
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 406
Maintenance Mode Menu ............................................................................................................... 406
Special Maintenance Menu ............................................................................................................ 407
SP Tables ........................................................................................................................................... 408
Test Pattern Printing ........................................................................................................................... 409
SMC Page Printing ............................................................................................................................. 411
Firmware Update ................................................................................................................................ 412
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 412
Before Beginning ............................................................................................................................ 412
Updating Firmware ......................................................................................................................... 412
Handling Firmware Update Errors .................................................................................................. 415
6. System Maintenance (D0B4).......................................................................................................... 416
Service Program Mode ....................................................................................................................... 416
SP Tables ....................................................................................................................................... 416
Enabling and Disabling Service Program Mode............................................................................. 416
Types of SP Modes ........................................................................................................................ 417
Service Mode Lock/Unlock ............................................................................................................. 418
Firmware Update (SD Card) ............................................................................................................... 420
Updating Firmware ......................................................................................................................... 420
Firmware Update (Remote Firmware Update) ................................................................................... 428

7
RFU Performable Condition ........................................................................................................... 428
Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) ...................................................................................... 429
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 429
Immediate Update .......................................................................................................................... 430
Update at the Next Visit (Reserve) ................................................................................................. 432
Update via SD Card ........................................................................................................................ 437
Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) .......................................................................... 440
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 440
Downloading and Updating Process .............................................................................................. 441
Checking the ARFU Result ............................................................................................................. 445
Checking the Result Using the Log Data ....................................................................................... 445
Related SPs .................................................................................................................................... 445
Address Book Upload/Download........................................................................................................ 449
Information List ............................................................................................................................... 449
Download ........................................................................................................................................ 449
Upload............................................................................................................................................. 449
Uploading/Downloading NVRAM Data............................................................................................... 451
Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD Card................................................................................ 451
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM ............................................................................................. 451
Capturing the Device Logs ................................................................................................................. 453
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 453
Storing the Device Logs on an SD Card ........................................................................................ 455
Retrieving the Device Logs via Operation Panel............................................................................ 455
Retrieving the Device Logs via Web Image Monitor ...................................................................... 458
SMC List Card Save Function ............................................................................................................ 461
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 461
Procedure ....................................................................................................................................... 461
File Names of the Saved SMC Lists ............................................................................................... 462
Error Messages .............................................................................................................................. 463
SP Data Import/Export........................................................................................................................ 464
Data That Can Be Imported and Exported ..................................................................................... 464
Exporting Device Information ......................................................................................................... 464
Importing Device Information.......................................................................................................... 465
Possible Solutions for Import/Export Problems .............................................................................. 466
Card Save Function ............................................................................................................................ 468
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 468
Procedure ....................................................................................................................................... 468
Error Messages .............................................................................................................................. 470
7. Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 471
8
Self-Diagnostic Mode (D0B4) ............................................................................................................. 471
SC Automatic Reboot (D0B4)......................................................................................................... 471
Service Call Conditions ...................................................................................................................... 473
Summary......................................................................................................................................... 473
List of Automatic Reboot Target SC (D0B4) .................................................................................. 474
SC Code Descriptions ........................................................................................................................ 481
SC1xx ............................................................................................................................................. 481
SC2xx ............................................................................................................................................. 489
SC3xx ............................................................................................................................................. 493
SC4xx ............................................................................................................................................. 497
SC5xx ............................................................................................................................................. 497
SC6xx ............................................................................................................................................. 518
SC7xx ............................................................................................................................................. 529
SC8xx ............................................................................................................................................. 532
SC9xx ............................................................................................................................................. 535
Jam Detection ..................................................................................................................................... 537
Jam Description and Position Code ............................................................................................... 537
Sensor Locations ............................................................................................................................ 538
Vertical Streaks on Copies due to Scanning Problems (D0B4) ......................................................... 539
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 539
Other Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................ 543
Noise from Transfer Roller Bearings .............................................................................................. 543
8. Detailed Descriptions ...................................................................................................................... 546
Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 546
Component Layout ......................................................................................................................... 546
Paper Path ...................................................................................................................................... 559
Drive Layout .................................................................................................................................... 561
ADF (D0B3) ........................................................................................................................................ 563
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 563
Original Transport Drive ................................................................................................................. 564
Original Transport Mechanism 1 .................................................................................................... 564
Original Transport Mechanism 2 .................................................................................................... 565
Single-sided Scanning .................................................................................................................... 565
Duplex Scanning............................................................................................................................. 566
ADF (D0B4) ........................................................................................................................................ 567
Original Detection ........................................................................................................................... 567
Original Size Detection / Original Set Detection Mechanism ......................................................... 567
Paper Feed / Separation Mechanism ............................................................................................. 568
Skew Correction Mechanism, Registration Mechanism ................................................................. 569

9
SP6-901-002 (Setting to give priority to stackability) ..................................................................... 571
Related SPs .................................................................................................................................... 571
Scanning (D0B2,D0B3) ...................................................................................................................... 572
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 572
Scanner Drive ................................................................................................................................. 573
Original Size Sensor (S3) Layout ................................................................................................... 573
Related SPs .................................................................................................................................... 574
Scanning (D0B4) ................................................................................................................................ 575
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 575
Mechanism...................................................................................................................................... 576
Related SPs .................................................................................................................................... 583
Laser Exposure .................................................................................................................................. 585
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 585
Auto Power Control (APC).............................................................................................................. 586
LD Safety Switch ............................................................................................................................ 587
PCDU .................................................................................................................................................. 588
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 588
Drive ................................................................................................................................................ 589
Related SPs .................................................................................................................................... 589
Drum Charge/Quenching ................................................................................................................... 590
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 590
ID Sensor Pattern Production Timing ............................................................................................. 590
Drum Charge Roller Cleaning ........................................................................................................ 590
Quenching....................................................................................................................................... 591
Related SPs .................................................................................................................................... 592
Development....................................................................................................................................... 593
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 593
Drive ................................................................................................................................................ 594
Developer Mixing ............................................................................................................................ 594
Development Bias........................................................................................................................... 595
Toner Supply................................................................................................................................... 596
Toner Supply Mechanism ............................................................................................................... 597
Toner Density Control ..................................................................................................................... 597
Toner Near End/End Detection and Recovery ............................................................................... 600
Related SPs .................................................................................................................................... 600
Drum Cleaning and Toner Recycling ................................................................................................. 602
Drum Cleaning ................................................................................................................................ 602
Toner Recycling .............................................................................................................................. 603
Image Transfer and Paper Separation ............................................................................................... 604
10
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 604
Image Transfer Current Timing ...................................................................................................... 605
Transfer Roller Cleaning ................................................................................................................. 605
Paper Separation Mechanism ........................................................................................................ 606
Related SPs .................................................................................................................................... 606
Image Fusing and Paper Exit ............................................................................................................. 610
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 610
Fusing Unit Drive and Release Mechanism ................................................................................... 611
Fusing Entrance Guide Shift........................................................................................................... 612
Pressure Roller ............................................................................................................................... 613
Pressure Roller Release Mechanism ............................................................................................. 613
Fusing Temperature Control........................................................................................................... 614
Overheat Protection ........................................................................................................................ 616
CPM Control ................................................................................................................................... 617
Paper Transport in Low-Voltage Mode........................................................................................... 618
Related SPs .................................................................................................................................... 619
Paper Feed ......................................................................................................................................... 624
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 624
Paper Feed Drive Mechanism ........................................................................................................ 624
Paper Feed Mechanism ................................................................................................................. 625
Tray Base Plate Lift Mechanism ..................................................................................................... 627
Paper End Detection....................................................................................................................... 628
Paper Size Detection ...................................................................................................................... 628
Side Fences .................................................................................................................................... 630
Paper Registration .......................................................................................................................... 630
Related SPs .................................................................................................................................... 631
Bypass Feed ....................................................................................................................................... 632
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 632
Duplex Unit/Exit Unit........................................................................................................................... 633
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 633
Drive Mechanism ............................................................................................................................ 634
Basic Operation .............................................................................................................................. 634
Feed In and Exit Mechanism .......................................................................................................... 637
Paper Exit Detection ....................................................................................................................... 638
Related SPs .................................................................................................................................... 638
Board Structure .................................................................................................................................. 639
Block Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 639
9. Smart Operation Panel G2.5 .......................................................................................................... 641
Replacement and Adjustment ............................................................................................................ 641

11
Exterior Covers ............................................................................................................................... 641
Wi-Fi Module ................................................................................................................................... 643
Micro Computer Board.................................................................................................................... 644
LCD ................................................................................................................................................. 646
Mechanism ......................................................................................................................................... 647
System Components ...................................................................................................................... 647
Panel Components/Screen Layout ................................................................................................. 656
Electrical Components .................................................................................................................... 659
Controlling the Power Supply ......................................................................................................... 660
System Maintenance .......................................................................................................................... 664
Maintenance Modes ....................................................................................................................... 664
Login to/Logout from Control Panel Service Mode ........................................................................ 664
Service Mode Menu ........................................................................................................................ 666
Panel Self Check ............................................................................................................................ 673
Recovery Mode ............................................................................................................................... 680
Special Key Combinations .............................................................................................................. 681
Backup/Restore for Smart Operation Panel Application/Settings Function ................................... 681
Software Update ............................................................................................................................. 683
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................. 688
Problems and Errors Related to Hardware .................................................................................... 688
Errors Related to Applications ........................................................................................................ 689
Factory Reset and Restoration ....................................................................................................... 690
Software Update Errors .................................................................................................................. 691
Other Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 694

12
1.Product Information

1. Product Information

Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration

System Configuration and Options

Model Name Product Name Machine Code


Bc-MF2d M 2700 D0B2
Bc-MF2e M 2701 D0B3
Bc-MF2H IM 2702 D0B4

Bc-MF2d

No. Item Machine Code Remarks


1 Single Paper Feed Unit PB2030 D3F1 Option
2 Double Paper Feed Unit PB2040 D3F1 Option
3 Bypass Tray Cover Type M16 D3B7 Option
4 Anti-condensation Heater for Main Paper Feed Tray - Option
5 Anti-condensation Heater for Option Paper Feed Tray - Option
6 IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type P16 - Option

13
1.Product Information

Bc-MF2e

No. Item Machine Code Remarks


1 Single Paper Feed Unit PB2030 D3F1 Option
2 Double Paper Feed Unit PB2040 D3F1 Option
3 Bypass Tray Cover Type M16 D3B7 Option
4 ADF - Standard
5 Anti-condensation Heater for Main Paper Feed Tray - Option
6 Anti-condensation Heater for Option Paper Feed Tray - Option
7 IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type P16 - Option

14
1.Product Information

Bc-MF2H

No. Item Machine Code Remarks


1 Single Paper Feed Unit PB2030 D3F1 Option
2 Double Paper Feed Unit PB2040 D3F1 Option
3 Bypass Tray Cover Type M16 D3B7 Option
4 ADF - Standard
5 Anti-condensation Heater for Main Paper Feed Tray - Option
6 Anti-condensation Heater for Option Paper Feed Tray - Option
7 NFC Card Reader Type M38 D3FJ Option
8 Fax Option Type M38 D3FH Option
9 1 Bin Tray BN2020 D3F2 Option

15
1.Product Information

Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with The Predecessor


Product

Comparison with Previous Models

Component Changed Item RICOH MP 2014 / RICOH M 2700 / M RICOH IM


MP 2014D / MP 2701 2702
2014AD
(Previous)
PCDU General - Easier to remove Same as
developer unit cover RICOH M
2700 / M
2701
Developer CE must fill with the Prefilled in the Same as
Preparation developer during factory, disassembly RICOH M
machine installation of PCDU not required 2700 / M
2701
Replacement Only CE can do User and CE can do Same as
RICOH M
2700 / M
2701
Paper Tray General - Capacity increased to Same as
500 sheets RICOH M
2700 / M
2701
Paper Size N/A Supported: Paper Same as
Detection size switch detects RICOH M
paper size 2700 / M
2701
Bottom Plate Moves mechanically Tray Lift Motor moves Same as
it RICOH M
2700 / M
2701
Paper Separation Separation pad and RF method Same as
the roller is used RICOH M
2700 / M
2701
Transfer Unit Cleaning Changed the shape Same as
of the transfer roller RICOH M

16
1.Product Information

bearing to prevent 2700 / M


abnormal sounds due 2701
to the penetration of
the toner
Laser Unit General - Fully sealed so that Same as
no dust can get inside RICOH M
2700 / M
2701
Cleaning Only CE can do User and CE can do Same as
using the toner shield RICOH M
glass cleaning tool 2700 / M
2701
Fusing Not supported Supported Same as
temperature RICOH M
control (Print 2700 / M
duty control) 2701
Anti- Not supported Supported as service Same as
condensation options RICOH M
heater options 2700 / M
2701
Operation General - Some function keys 7-inch smart
Panel added operation
panel
Language Arabic Not supported Supported Same as
RICOH M
2700 / M
2701
Network General - Supported as a Same as
interface standard feature; no RICOH M
need to replace the 2700 / M
MPU to upgrade 2701
IEEE802.11a/b/g/n Not supported Supported (Option): Supported
USB port on the front (Standard)
of the machine
Scan to USB Not supported Supported as a Same as
standard feature RICOH M
2700 / M
2701
PaaS Supported as an Supported as a Same as
17
1.Product Information

option standard feature RICOH M


2700 / M
2701

18
1.Product Information

Specifications
See “Appendices” for the following information:
• General Specifications
• Supported Paper Sizes

19
2.Installation

2. Installation

Installation Requirements

Environment

–Temperature and Humidity Chart–

• Standard temperature range: 10 - 32°C (50 - 89.6°F)


• Standard humidity range: 15% to 80% RH
• Extended temperature range: 10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4°F)
• Extended humidity range: 10% to 90% RH
• Ambient illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight)
• Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more
• Ambient dust: Less than 0.075 mg/m3 (2.0 x 10-6 oz/yd3)
• Avoid areas exposed to sudden temperature changes:
1) Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner.
2) Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater.
• Do not place the machine in areas where it can get exposed to corrosive gases and chemicals.
• Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea level.
• Place the machine on a sturdy and level base. (Inclination on any side should be no more than 5
mm.)

20
2.Installation

• Do not place the machine where it is subjected to strong vibrations.

Machine Level

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level


Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level

Minimum Space Requirements

Place the machine near a power source, providing clearance as shown:


A (front): 750 mm (30")
B (left): 150 mm (6")
C (rear): 300 mm (12")
D (right): 450 mm (18")

The recommended 750 mm (30") front space is sufficient to allow the paper tray to be pulled out.
Additional front space is required to allow operators to stand at the front of the machine.

Machine Dimensions

• Platen Model (D0B2)


Width: 587 mm
Depth: 581 mm
Height: 560 mm
• DF Model (D0B3)
Width: 587 mm
Depth: 581 mm
Height: 639 mm
• DF Model (D0B4)
Width: 587 mm
Depth: 581 mm
Height: 677 mm

21
2.Installation

Power Requirements

• Make sure that the wall outlet is near the machine and easily accessible. After completing the
installation, make sure the plug is firmly inserted into the outlet.
• Avoid using extension cables.
Input voltage:

D0B2,D0B3

EU, AP, CHN 220V - 240V, 50/60Hz, 8A

D0B4

EU, AP, CHN 220V - 240V, 50/60Hz, 8A


TWN 110V, 60Hz, 15A

22
2.Installation

Copier Installation (D0B2,D0B3)

Accessory Check

Check that the accessories in this list are included.


No. Description EU AP CHN Q'ty
1 Safety Information Y Y - 1
2 Brand plate Y Y - 1
3 EULA sheet Y Y Y 1
4 READ THIS FIRST Y - Y 1
5 QUICK GUIDE Y Y Y 1
6 Notes for Using This Machine Safety sheet Y Y Y 1
SEC NOT GW sheet (China)
7 Driver CD Y Y Y 1
8 Paper size decal Y Y Y 1
9 Setup Guide Y Y Y 1
10 Power cord Y Y Y 1
11 Toner bottle Y Y Y 1
12 Warranty sheet (China) - - Y 1
13 Notes for Movie Y Y Y 1

Installation Procedure

• Two persons are required to lift the machine.


1. Remove filament tape and other packing materials.

23
2.Installation

DF Model (D0B3)

Platen Model (D0B2)

24
2.Installation

2. Open the ADF [A] or platen cover [B], and then remove the sheet and filament tapes.

3. Hold the places shown below, and then lift the machine.

4. Place the machine on a table or optional paper feed unit.


5. Open the front door.

25
2.Installation

6. Remove the heat seal [A], and the mylar [B].

7. Pull the toner bottle holder lever [A] upward.

26
2.Installation

8. Release the lock lever [A], and then pull the toner bottle holder [B].

9. Shake the toner bottle [A] several times, and then remove the bottle cap [B]. (Do not remove the
bottle cap [B] before shaking the bottle.)

27
2.Installation

10. Install the toner bottle [A] on the holder [B], and then set the holder in the machine.

11. Close the front door.


12. Pull out the paper tray, and then adjust the positions of the end and side guides.
13. Plug in the main power cord and turn on the main power switch.

After switching on the machine the initialization process will start automatically.
Wait until "Ready" appears on the display panel (about 1 minute).

Do not turn off the main power switch until initialization is complete.
If the front door is opened during initialization, close it.
If the tapes are not removed from the PCDU, an error occurs (SC) and the machine cancels
initialization.

The machine makes a noise during initialization. This noise does not indicate a malfunction.

28
2.Installation

Setting for the language displayed on the display

1. Press the User Tools button.

2. Select "Admin. Tools" and press "OK".

29
2.Installation

3. Select "Language" and press "OK".

4. Select a language and press "OK".

The selected language is used for the operation panel.


5. Load paper into the paper tray and make a full-size copy, and make sure the side-to-side and
leading edge registrations are correct.
6. If using a PaaS, refer to the PaaS settings.(NPB (PaaS) (D0B2,D0B3))

Checking the copy image with the test chart

Check the copy image with the test chart.

Moving the Machine

This section describes how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor. See the
section "Transporting the Machine" to pack the machine and move it a longer distance.
• Turn the main power OFF and pull out the plug.
• Close all the covers and trays.
• Remove peripherals attached to the main machine such as paper feed unit and bypass tray cover.
• Keep the machine horizontal and move it slowly. Tipping and excessive vibrations may damage the
machine.

Transporting the Machine

1. Remove the PCDU. This prevents toner from leaking due to vibration during transport.
30
2.Installation

2. Make sure there is no paper remaining in the paper trays. Then fix down the bottom plates with a
sheet of paper and tape.
3. Do one of the following steps:
• Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors.
• Shrink-wrap the machine tightly.

31
2.Installation

Copier Installation (D0B4)

Accessory Check

Check that the accessories in this list are included.


No. Description EU AP TWN CHN Q'ty
1 Safety Information Y - - - 1
2 Brand plate Y Y - - 1
3 EULA sheet Y Y Y Y 1
4 READ THIS FIRST (Safety Information) - Y Y Y 1
5 Setup Guide Y Y Y Y 1
6 Notes for Using This Machine Safety sheet Y Y Y Y 1
SEC NOT GW sheet (China)
7 Driver CD Y Y Y Y 1
8 Paper size decal Y Y Y Y 1
9 ADF Caution Decal - Y Y - 1
10 Original Set Decal - Y Y - 1
11 Notes for Movie Y Y Y Y 1
12 Power cord Y Y Y Y 1
13 Toner bottle Y - - Y 1
14 Warranty sheet (China) - - - Y 1
15 For Users of This Product Y Y Y Y 1
16 Notes for User (Air Print) Y Y Y Y 1
17 Notes for User (EU Countries) Y - - - 1
18 OI CD - Y - - 1
19 How to Check - - - Y 1

Installation Procedure

• Two persons are required to lift the machine.


1. Remove filament tape and other packing materials.

32
2.Installation

2. Open the ADF [A] and then remove the sheet and filament tapes.

3. Remove the two scanner shipping locks [A] by rotating them 90 degrees counterclockwise.
SC120 is displayed when the machine is turned ON with the shipping lock attached.

33
2.Installation

・Keep the scanner shipping locks after installing the machine. The scanner shipping locks must
be installed before moving the machine using methods in which the machine will not always be
level, such as by truck over rough ground, or by ship.
・Before moving the machine, make sure to move the scanner carriage to the correct position with
SP4-806-001 and reattach the shipping locks. (Moving the Machine)
4. Attach the two caps [A] provided with the machine.

5. Hold the places shown below, and then lift the machine.

6. Place the machine on a table or optional paper feed unit.


7. Open the front door.

34
2.Installation

8. Remove the heat seal [A], and the mylar [B].

9. Pull the toner bottle holder lever [A] upward.

35
2.Installation

10. Release the lock lever [A], and then pull the toner bottle holder [B].

11. Shake the toner bottle [A] several times, and then remove the bottle cap [B]. (Do not remove the
bottle cap [B] before shaking the bottle.)

12. Install the toner bottle [A] on the holder [B], and then set the holder in the machine.

13. Close the front door.


36
2.Installation

14. Pull out the paper tray, and then adjust the positions of the end and side guides.
15. Plug in the main power cord and turn on the main power switch.
・Toner Initialization starts and "Self checking..." appears. It will take around 1 minute to fill the
toner up.
16. Select the language.
17. Set the Administrator password (This step can be skipped).
18. Load paper into the paper tray and make a full-size copy, and make sure the side-to-side and
leading edge registrations are correct.
19. If using @Remote, set SP5-812-101 to 1.
20. If using a PaaS, refer to the PaaS settings.(NPB (PaaS) (D0B4))

Checking the copy image with the test chart

Check the copy image with the test chart.

Moving the Machine

This section describes how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor. See the
section "Transporting the Machine" to pack the machine and move it a longer distance.
• Turn the main power OFF and pull out the plug.
• Close all the covers and trays.
• Remove peripherals attached to the main machine such as paper feed unit and bypass tray cover.
• Keep the machine horizontal and move it slowly. Tipping and excessive vibrations may damage the
machine.

Transporting the Machine

1. Remove the PCDU. This prevents toner from leaking due to vibration during transport.
2. Make sure there is no paper remaining in the paper trays. Then fix down the bottom plates with a
sheet of paper and tape.
3. Do one of the following steps:
• Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors.
• Shrink-wrap the machine tightly.

37
2.Installation

Paper Feed Unit PB2030/2040

Accessory Check

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No Descriptio EU AP TWN CHN Q’t
. n (D0B2,D0B3,D0B4 (D0B2,D0B3,D0B4 (D0B4 (D0B2,D0B3,D0B4 y
) ) ) )
1 Relay Y Y Y Y 1
harness
2 Screws Y Y Y Y 4
- EMC Sheet Y Y Y - 1

Installation Procedure

• Turn off the main power switch of the main machine and unplug the power cord before starting
the installation procedure.
• Two or more people are required to lift the main machine. The main machine is highly unstable
when lifted by one person, possibly resulting in injury or property damage.
• Do not lift the main machine with the paper feed unit installed. The grips may be damaged.

38
2.Installation

Installing the Single Paper Feed Unit

1. Remove all tapes and accessories on the paper feed unit.

2. Pull the tray, and then remove the filament tapes and padding.

3. Lift the main machine and place it on the paper feed unit.
4. Remove the rear cover of the main machine [A].

39
2.Installation

D0B2,D0B3

D0B4

5. Remove the rear cover [A] of the paper feed unit.

40
2.Installation

6. Remove the brackets [A] on the bottom of the main machine.

41
2.Installation

7. Insert the relay harness into the opening [A] of the main machine.

8. Do the following steps:

D0B2,D0B3

1. Connect the relay harness provided with the paper feed unit to the bottom connector [A] and

42
2.Installation

CN246 [B] on the MPU (PCB7) board.

D0B4

1. Connect the relay harness provided with the paper feed unit to the bottom connector [A] and
CN111 [B] on the MPU board.

9. Pull out the paper trays [A] and [B].

43
2.Installation

10. Secure the main machine to the paper feed unit.

Screws (M4 x 6) are provided with the paper feed unit.


Use a stubby driver or the bracket wrench [A] attached to the rear bottom of the paper feed unit.
Reattach the bracket wrench after tightening the screws.

44
2.Installation

11. Reinstall all trays and covers.


12. Load paper into the paper feed unit.
13. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
14. Adjust the registration of the upper paper feed unit. (Adjustment after Replacement
(D0B2,D0B3)Adjustment after Replacement (D0B2,D0B3), Adjustment after Replacement (D0B4))
• Use SP1-002-004 for the tray bank 1.

45
2.Installation

Installing the Double Paper Feed Unit

1. Remove all tapes and accessories on the paper feed unit.

2. Pull the tray, and then remove the filament tapes and paddings.

3. Lift the main machine and place it on the paper feed unit.
4. Remove the rear cover of the main machine [A].

46
2.Installation

D0B2,D0B3

D0B4

47
2.Installation

5. Remove the rear cover [A] of the paper feed unit.

6. Remove the brackets [A] on the bottom of the main machine.

48
2.Installation

7. Insert the relay harness into the opening [A] of the main machine.

8. Do the following steps:

D0B2,D0B3

1. Connect the relay harness provided with the paper feed unit to the bottom connector [A] and

49
2.Installation

CN246 [B] on the MPU (PCB7) board.

D0B4

1. Connect the relay harness provided with the paper feed unit to the bottom connector [A] and
CN111 [B] on the MPU board.

9. Pull out the paper trays [A] and [B].

50
2.Installation

10. Secure the main machine to the paper feed unit.

Screws (M4 x 6) are provided with the paper feed unit.


Use a stubby driver or the bracket wrench [A] attached to the rear side of the paper feed unit.
Reattach the bracket wrench after tightening the screws.

51
2.Installation

11. Reinstall all trays and covers.


12. Load paper into the paper feed unit.
13. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
14. Adjust the registration of the upper paper feed unit. (Adjustment after Replacement (D0B2,D0B3),
Adjustment after Replacement (D0B4))
1. Use SP1-002-005 for the tray bank 2.

52
2.Installation

Anti-condensation Heater for Main Paper Feed Tray

Overview

The following diagram shows the heater configuration.

Accessory Check

No. Description Q’ty Shown in the Overview Remarks


as
1 PSU Harness 1 #1 D0B25368
2 MPU Harness 1 #2 D0B25364
3 Relay Harness 1 #3 D0B25365
4 Relay Harness 1 #4 D0B25367
5 DHB 1 #5 D0B25185
6 Anti-condensation Heater for Main Paper 1 #6 D0B29010
Feed Tray
7 Clamps 3 -
8 Brackets 3 -
9 Screws (M3x6, M4x8) 3 -
(M3x6)
1
(M4x8)
10 Decal 1 -

53
2.Installation

Installation Procedure

• Turn off the main power switch of the main machine and unplug the power cord before starting
the installation procedure.
1. Remove the left cover. (Left Cover)
2. Remove paper tray 1. (Paper Tray 1)
3. Remove the high-voltage power supply board [A]. (HVPS (High-Voltage Power Supply Board)
(PCB3))

54
2.Installation

4. Remove the cable cover [B].

5. Remove the screws [A].

55
2.Installation

6. Attach the anti-condensation heater [A].

7. Attach the brackets [A], [B] and [C].

56
2.Installation

8. Attach the DHB [A].

9. Attach the clamps.

10. Connect the relay harness [A] to CN921 on the DHB.


11. Connect the relay harness [B] to the connector of the anti-condensation heater.

57
2.Installation

12. Connect the relay harness [A] to [B] and clamp the harness.

13. Connect the PSU harness [A] to CN920 on the DHB and CN253 on the PSU and clamp the
harness.

14. Do the following steps:

• D0B2,B0B3

1. Connect the MPU harness [A] to CN204 on the MPU and CN930 on the DHB and clamp the

58
2.Installation

harness.

• D0B4

1. Connect the MPU harness [A] to CN115 on the MPU and CN930 on the DHB and clamp the
harness.

59
2.Installation

15. Attach the warning decal [A] on the paper tray-1.

16. Reinstall the high-voltage power supply board and all covers.

60
2.Installation

Anti-condensation Heater for Option Paper Feed Tray (Single


Paper Feed Unit)

Overview

The following diagram shows the heater configuration.

Accessory Check

No. Description Q’ty Remarks


1 Anti-condensation Heater for Option Paper Feed Tray 1 D3F11162 (AP, CHN)
D3F11163 (EU)
2 Harness Cover 1 D3F11094
3 Relay Harness 1 D3F15370
4 Clamp (small) 14 -
5 Clamp (large) 3 -
6 Heater Cover 1 -

61
2.Installation

Installation Procedure

• Turn off the main power switch and unplug the power cord before starting the procedure.

• Follow this procedure after mounting the anti-condensation heater for the main paper feed tray
on the main paper feed tray. (Anti-condensation Heater for Main Paper Feed Tray)

62
2.Installation

1. Pull out the option paper tray [A].

2. Remove the rear cover [A].

63
2.Installation

3. Remove the heater mounting screws.

64
2.Installation

4. Attach the anti-condensation heater [A].

5. Attach the clamps.

65
2.Installation

6. Mount the relay harness [A] and clamp the harness.

7. Mount the heat cover [A] and the harness cover [B].

66
2.Installation

8. Mount the double paper feed unit on the main body. (Installing the Single Paper Feed Unit)
9. Insert the relay harness into the opening [A] of the main body.

10. Connect the relay harness [A] from the DHB and the relay harness [B] from the option paper feed
tray.

11. Reinstall all trays and covers.

67
2.Installation

Anti-condensation Heater for Option Paper Feed Tray (Double


Paper Feed Unit)

Overview

The following diagram shows the heater configuration.

Accessory Check

Two sets of the following should be prepared for the double paper feed unit.
No. Description Q’ty Remarks
1 Anti-condensation Heater for Option Paper Feed Tray 1 D3F11162 (AP,CHN)
D3F11163 (EU)
2 Harness Cover 1 D3F11094
3 Relay Harness 1 D3F15370
4 Clamp (small) 14 -
5 Clamp (large) 3 -
6 Heater Cover 1 -

68
2.Installation

Installation Procedure

• Turn off the main power switch of the main machine and unplug the power cord before starting
the procedure.

• Follow this procedure after mounting the anti-condensation heater for the main paper feed tray
on the main paper feed tray. (Anti-condensation Heater for Main Paper Feed Tray)

69
2.Installation

1. Pull out the paper tray [A].

2. Remove the rear cover [A].

70
2.Installation

3. Disconnect the ground cable [A] and cable [B].

4. Separate paper feed tray 2 [A] from paper feed tray 3 [B].

If the screws do not readily come off, use a stubby driver or the bracket wrench [C] attached to the
rear side of the paper feed unit. Reattach the bracket wrench after tightening the screws.

71
2.Installation

5. Remove the heater mounting screws.

This description is for paper feed tray 2. Do the same with paper feed tray 3.

6. Attach the anti-condensation heater [A].

This description is for paper feed tray 2. Do the same with paper feed tray 3.

72
2.Installation

7. Attach the clamps.

This description is for paper feed tray 2. Do the same with paper feed tray 3.

73
2.Installation

8. Mount the relay harness [A] and clamp the harness.

This description is for paper feed tray 2. Do the same with paper feed tray 3.

9. Mount the heat cover [A] and the harness cover [B].

This description is for paper feed tray 2. Do the same with paper feed tray 3.

74
2.Installation

10. Mount paper feed tray 2 [B] on the paper feed tray 3 [A].

Use a stubby driver or the bracket wrench [C] which is attached at the rear side of the paper feed
unit. Reattach the bracket wrench after tightening the screws.

75
2.Installation

11. Insert the relay harness from the paper feed tray 3 into the opening [A] of paper feed tray 2.

12. Connect the relay harness [A] from the paper feed tray 2 and the relay harness [B] from the paper

76
2.Installation

feed tray 3.

13. Mount the double paper feed unit on the main body. (Installing the Double Paper Feed Unit)
14. Insert the relay harness from the paper feed tray 2 into the opening [A] of the main body.

77
2.Installation

15. Connect the relay harness [A] from the DHB and the relay harness [B] from the paper feed tray 2.

16. Reinstall all trays and covers.

78
2.Installation

Bypass Tray Cover Type M16

Accessory Check

No. Description Q’ty


1 Bypass tray cover 1
2 Rear stud bracket 1
3 Front stud bracket 1
4 Rear stud cover 1
5 Front stud cover 1
- Screws: M3 x 6 2
- Screws: M3 x 8 2

Installation Procedure

• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the inner cover. (Inner Cover)
2. Remove the right rear cover. (Right Rear Cover)

79
2.Installation

3. Remove the right front cover [A].

4. Cut off a part [A] of the right front cover.

Be careful not to get hurt when cutting off the part [A].

5. Cut off a part [A] of the right rear cover.

Be careful not to get hurt when cutting off the part [A].

80
2.Installation

6. Attach the front stud bracket ( x 1: M3 x 6).

7. Attach the rear stud bracket ( x 1: M3 x 6).

8. Attach the front stud cover [A] ( x 1: M3 x 8).

81
2.Installation

9. Attach the rear stud cover [A] ( x 1: M3 x 8).

10. Reinstall all the covers removed.


11. Place the bypass tray cover [A] on the bypass tray.
• Make sure that the hooks [B] at the front and rear side of the bypass tray cover hold the front
and rear studs [C] on the machine.

12. Close the right door.

82
2.Installation

IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type P16 (D0B2,D0B3)

Accessory Check

No. Description Q’ty


1 IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type P16 1

Installation Procedure

• Before using the wireless LAN option, settings must be configured from the operation panel. For
details, see the Setup Guide.
• Before beginning work, ground yourself by touching something metal to discharge any static
electricity. Static electricity can damage the interface units.
• Do not subject the wireless LAN option to physical shocks.
• Be sure to turn off the machine before installing the wireless LAN option.
• Insert the wireless LAN option into the USB port on the back of the machine. Do not insert it into the
USB flash disk port of the front of the machine.
• We recommend installing the printer driver on the computer after the wireless LAN option is
configured.
1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.
2. Fully insert the wireless LAN option.

Check that the wireless LAN option is firmly connected to the USB port.
3. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine.

83
2.Installation

4. Configure settings from the operation panel. For details, see the Setup Guide.

Check that the wireless LAN option was correctly installed by printing the configuration page.
If it is correctly installed, "Wireless (Wi-Fi) Status" will appear for "Network Settings" on the
configuration page.
For details about printing the configuration page, see page 191 "Printing Lists/Reports".

84
2.Installation

NPB (PaaS) (D0B2,D0B3)

NPB is the abbreviation of "New Printer Business".

PaaS Setting

PaaS Setup Procedure

The customer Contract ID and the customer authentication key are required for authentication.

Switch to PaaS Mode

1. Enter the "Maintenance mode (SP menu)".


2. Select "NPB".
SP menu > [CTL Maintenance] > [Product type] > [NPB]

PaaS Registration

Do not turn off the machine or disconnect from the internet during the registration procedure.
1. Launch the web browser.
2. In the address bar, enter http://(machine’s IP address)/ to access the machine.
3. On the Web Image Monitor menu, select PaaS (Printer as a Service) Settings.

85
2.Installation

4. Check that [Operation] is set to "Contract Registration".

Operation Settings:
Item Description
Contract Registration Select this to enter the ID and Authentication Key after registration.
Contract Status Checking Select this if the machine stops operating.
The machine asks the server about the registration status.
Contract Cancel Select this to cancel the registration.
Device Replacement Select this to replace the machine being used.
5. Check and enter [Contract ID], [Authentication Key], and [PaaS URL].

Registration Configurations Settings:


Item Description
Contract ID Enter the customer Contract ID.
Authentication Key Enter the customer Authentication Key.
PaaS URL China: rpaasdev.online.tj.cn
If no PaaS URL is specified, enter the PaaS URL above.

86
2.Installation

6. If using a proxy server, enter the proxy information.

Proxy Function Settings:


Item Description
Enable Proxy Check this box to enable the proxy server.
Function
Proxy URL Set the proxy server address.
The characters that can be input are 0-9, A-Z, a-z.
Proxy Port Number Enter the proxy server port number.
The range is 1-65535.
Authorization The authorization method for linking to the proxy server.
The options are:
-None
-Basic
-Digest
The default value is “None”.
When “Basic” or “Digest” is selected, the User Name and Password can be
edited and should not be left blank.
When “None” is selected, the User Name and Password are read-only.
User Name The account connecting to the proxy server.
Please use ASCII characters only.
The max. length is 32.
Password The password for the username connecting to the proxy server.
Please use ASCII characters only.
The max. length is 32.
7. After entering the information, click [OK].
8. If “Operation Successful” appears, PaaS registration is complete. For other messages, check the
following table.
PaaS Error Message List:
Message Description
Registration Configuration is The entered Contract ID or Authentication Key is either wrong or
not correct already being used. Check that the entered Contract ID or
87
2.Installation

Message Description
Authentication Key is correct.
Operation failed, please Please contact the service center.
contact service center (Code:
xxx)

Unregistering PaaS

To unregister, it is necessary to perform the cancellation procedure on the PaaS server side in advance.
1. Launch the web browser.
2. In the web browser’s address bar, enter http://(machine’s IP address)/ to access the machine.
3. On the Web Image Monitor menu, select PaaS (Printer as a Service) Settings.

4. Check that Operation is set to "Contract Cancellation".

5. Click [OK].
6. If "Operation Successful" appears, PaaS unregistration is complete.
7. Switch back to Normal mode.
8. Enter the "Maintenance mode (SP menu)".
9. Select "Normal".
SP menu > [CTL Maintenance] > [Product type] > [Normal]

Changing Registered Device/ Main Board

To change the PaaS registered device or if the main board has been replaced, perform the procedure in

88
2.Installation

this section on the new device. The following flowchart summarizes the procedure.

The existing customer Contract ID and customer authentication key are required for authentication.
Note: It is not necessary to obtain a new contract ID and authentication key to change a registered
device or main board.

Check the Network Environment

1. Specify the network settings (IP address, Subnet mask, Gateway, and DNS):
Open User Tools > Network Settings > IPv4 Configuration, specify the IP address, Subnet,
Gateway, DHCP, and DNS settings according to the customer’s network environment.

Switch to PaaS Mode

1. Enter the "Maintenance mode (SP menu)"


2. Select "NPB".
SP menu > [CTL Maintenance] > [Product type] > [NPB]

Overwrite Registration on Server

Make sure the machine’s main power is always turned on and connected to the internet during
registration.
1. Launch the web browser.
2. In the web browser’s address bar, enter http://(machine’s IP address)/ to access the machine.

89
2.Installation

3. On the Web Image Monitor menu, select PaaS (Printer as a Service) Settings.

4. Check that [Operation] is set to "Device Replacement".

5. Check and enter [Contract ID], [Authentication Key], and [PaaS URL].

Registration Configurations Settings:


Item Description
Contract ID Enter the customer Contract ID.
Authentication Key Enter the customer Authentication Key.
PaaS URL China: rpaasdev.online.tj.cn
If no PaaS URL is specified, enter the PaaS URL above.

90
2.Installation

6. If using a proxy server, enter the proxy information.

Proxy Function Settings:


Item Description
Enable Proxy Check this box to enable the proxy server.
Function
Proxy URL Set the proxy server address.
The characters that can be input are 0-9, A-Z, a-z.
Proxy Port Number Enter the proxy server port number.
The range is 1-65535.
Authorization The authorization method for linking to the proxy server.
The options are:
-None
-Basic
-Digest
The default value is “None”.
When “Basic” or “Digest” is selected, the User Name and Password can be
edited and should not be left blank.
When “None” is selected, the User Name and Password are read-only.
User Name The account connecting to the proxy server.
Please use ASCII characters only.
The max. length is 32.
Password The password for the username connecting to the proxy server.
Use ASCII characters only.
The max. length is 32.
7. After entering the information, click [OK].
8. If the message “Operation Successful” appears, PaaS registration is complete. For other
messages, check the following list.
PaaS Error Message List:
Message Description
Registration Configuration is The entered Contract ID or Authentication Key is either wrong or
not correct already being used. Check that the entered Contract ID or
91
2.Installation

Message Description
Authentication Key is correct.
Operation failed, please Please contact the service center.
contact service center (Code:
xxx)

92
2.Installation

NPB (PaaS) (D0B4)

NPB is the abbreviation of "New Printer Business".

PaaS Setting

PaaS Setup Procedure

The customer Contract ID and the customer authentication key are required for authentication.
Check that the SP5-816-201 value is “0” to make sure that @Remote is NOT enabled.

Switch to PaaS Mode

1. Enter SP Mode.
2. Set SP2-903-004 to 1.
3. Press [Execute] in SP5-760-002 (Entering PaaS mode).

If the machine is already in PaaS mode or @Remote is running, an "Execution Failed" message is
displayed on the operating panel.
4. Close the dialog and reboot the device.

5. After rebooting, check the SP5-760-001(PaaS Mode) value is “1” to confirm PaaS mode.

93
2.Installation

PaaS Registration

After PaaS Registration, you cannot switch back to normal mode.


1. Enter SP Mode.
2. Specify the following SP proxy server settings:
• SP5-760-015 (Use Proxy) 1: Use / 0: Don’t use
• SP5-760-016 (Proxy Server)
• SP5-760-017 (Proxy Port Number)
• SP5-760-018 (Proxy User Name)
• SP5-760-019 (Proxy User Password)
3. Input the Contract ID, Authentication Key, Server Name, and Server Port Number in SP5-760-003
to SP5-760-007.
Registration configuration:
SP No. Item Description
SP5-760-003 Contract ID Enter the customer Contract ID.
SP5-760-004 Authentication Key Enter the customer Authentication Key.
SP5-760-005 Server Name ‘rpaasdev.online.tj.cn’
Don't change the value above.
SP5-760-006 Server URL Path ‘/npb-base-web/API/npb/v1.0/deviceNotification’
Don't change the value above.
SP5-760-007 Server Port Number 443
Don't change the value above.
4. Press [Execute] in SP5-760-009 (Registration).
5. Please wait a moment for communication with the server.
6. Check the SP5-760-012(Execution Return Code) value is “0” to confirm the success of PaaS
setup.
If the value is not “0”, please check the result with the SP5-760-013 values in PaaS Error Code
List.
7. Make sure the SP5-760-008(Registration Status) value is “1” to confirm that PaaS registration is
complete.

Unregistering PaaS

In order to unregister, it is necessary to follow the cancellation procedure on the PaaS server side in
advance
1. Enter SP Mode.
2. Press [Execute] in SP5-760-010 (Unregistration).

94
2.Installation

3. Close the dialog and reboot the device.

4. Please wait a moment for communication with the server.


5. After auto-rebooting, make sure the SP5-760-012 (Execution Return Code) value is “0” to confirm
the success of the PaaS unregistration.
If the value is not “0”, please check the result with the SP5-760-013 values in the PaaS Error Code
List.
6. Make sure the SP5-760-008 (Registration Status) value is “0” to confirm that the PaaS
unregistration is complete.

Changing Registered Device/ Main Board

To change the PaaS registered device or if the main board is replaced, please follow the procedure
below on the new device.

• The customer Contract ID and the customer authentication key are required for authentication.
• Check that the SP5-816-201 value is “0” to make sure, @Remote is NOT enabled.

Switch to PaaS Mode

1. Enter SP Mode.
2. Press [Execute] in SP5-760-002 (Entering PaaS mode).

When the machine is already in PaaS mode or @Remote is running, an "Execution Failed"
message is displayed on the operating panel.
95
2.Installation

3. Close the dialog and reboot the device.

4. After rebooting, check the SP5-760-001(PaaS Mode) value is “1” to confirm PaaS mode.

Overwrite Registration on Server

After PaaS Registration, you cannot switch back to normal mode.


1. Enter SP Mode.
2. Specify the following SP proxy server settings:
• SP5-760-015 (Use Proxy) 1: Use / 0: Don’t use
• SP5-760-016 (Proxy Server)
• SP5-760-017 (Proxy Port Number)
• SP5-760-018 (Proxy User Name)
• SP5-760-019 (Proxy User Password)
3. Input the details, such as Contract ID, Authentication Key, Server Name, and Server Port Number
in SP5-760-003 to SP5-760-007.
Registration Configurations Settings:
SP No. Item Description
SP5-760-003 Contract ID Enter the customer Contract ID.
SP5-760-004 Authentication Key Enter the customer Authentication Key.
SP5-760-005 Server Name ‘rpaasdev.online.tj.cn’
Don't change the value above.
SP5-760-006 Server URL Path ‘/npb-base-web/API/npb/v1.0/deviceNotification’
Don't change the value above.
SP5-760-007 Server Port Number 443
Don't change the value above.
4. Press [Execute] in SP5-760-011 (Overwrite Registration on Server).
5. Please wait a moment for communication with the server.
6. Check the SP5-760-012 (Execution Return Code) value is “0” to confirm the success of PaaS
setup.
If the value is not “0”, please check the result with the SP5-760-013 values in PaaS Error Code
List. (PaaS Error Code List)
7. Make sure the SP5-760-008 (Registration Status) value is “1” to confirm that PaaS registration is

96
2.Installation

complete.

Switching Back to Normal Mode

1. Enter SP Mode.
2. Press [Execute] in SP5-760-024 (Entering Normal Mode).
3. Close the reboot dialog and reboot the device.

4. After rebooting, check the SP5-760-001 (PaaS Mode) value is “0” to confirm that switching to
Normal mode is complete.

This function targets the device before registering with PaaS and after unregistering with PaaS.
After registering the PaaS device, it cannot be unregistered in SP5-760-024 (Enter Normal Mode).
It is necessary to unregister through SP5-760-010 (Unregistration).

SP Number

SP No. Name
SP5-760-001 PaaS Mode
SP5-760-002 Enter PaaS Mode
SP5-760-003 Contract ID
SP5-760-004 Authentication Key
SP5-760-005 Server Name
SP5-760-006 Server URL Path
SP5-760-007 Server Port Number
SP5-760-008 Registration Status
SP5-760-009 Registration
SP5-760-010 Unregistration
SP5-760-011 Overwrite Registration on Server
SP5-760-012 Execution Return Code
SP5-760-013 Error Code
SP5-760-015 Use Proxy

97
2.Installation

SP No. Name
0: Don’t use
1: Use
SP5-760-016 Proxy Server
SP5-760-017 Proxy Port Number
SP5-760-018 Proxy User Name
SP5-760-019 Proxy User Password
SP5-760-020 Retry Interval
SP5-760-021 Retry Count
SP5-760-023 Next Update Time
SP5-760-024 Enter Normal Mode

PaaS Execution Return Code

SP No. Value Description Solution / Workaround


SP5-760- 0 Initial / Succeeded -
012 1 Invalid Refer to Switch to PaaS mode. (Switch to PaaS Mode)
2 Already registered -
3 Already -
unregistered
4 Communication For details, refer to SP5-760-013 in PaaS Error Code List.
error (PaaS Error Code List)
9 Running Please wait a moment and check the status again.

PaaS Error Code List

SP No. Value Description Solution / Workaround


SP5- 0 No error -
760- 1 Network information has not been set, Confirm information such as the Contract
013 or an invalid contract ID and ID, Authentication Key, PaaS Server
authentication key were entered. Name, PaaS Server Port Number, etc…
2 DNS server does not resolve the Confirm the PaaS Server Name and Proxy
hostname. Server.
Check the firmware version and the
network environment.
If this does not work, contact the network
administrator.
3 PaaS Server is not connected. Confirm the PaaS Server Name/Port
Number and Proxy Server/Port Number.
If this does not work, contact the network
administrator.
98
2.Installation

SP No. Value Description Solution / Workaround


4 Proxy is not authenticated Confirm the Proxy User Name and
Password.
If this does not work, contact the network
administrator.
5 PaaS Server registration error Confirm the cause with the PaaS Server
Escalate to the PaaS Server Supplier
6 PaaS Server internal error Retry the procedure.
If this does not work, confirm the cause
with PaaS Server
7 PaaS Server internal error Confirm the cause with the PaaS Server
8 PaaS Server parameter error Confirm the cause with the PaaS Server
9 PaaS Server under maintenance Retry the procedure after maintenance
has finished.
10 HTTP communication error (404) Review the PaaS Server URL Path.
Check the PaaS Configuration.
11 HTTP communication error (500) Check the firmware version, the network
environment, and the PaaS Configuration.
If this does not work, escalate to the PaaS
Server Supplier.
51 Connection timeout Confirm the network settings such as the
IP address.
Check the firmware version and the
network environment
101 Unit number error Escalate to the Device Supplier
102 Device data collection error Escalate to the Device Supplier
103 PaaS Server response data Escalate to the Device Supplier
conversion error
104 PaaS Server response error Escalate to the Device Supplier
110 Invalid HTTP header Escalate to the Device Supplier
111 Incorrect JSON structure Escalate to the Device Supplier
112 HTTP communication error (405) Escalate to the Device Supplier
113 HTTP communication error (411) Escalate to the Device Supplier
114 HTTP communication error (413) Escalate to the Device Supplier
115 HTTP communication error (414) Escalate to the Device Supplier
116 HTTP communication error (other) Escalate to the Device Supplier
255 System error Escalate to the Device Supplier

99
2.Installation

Technical Tips

• If communication fails, the PaaS update process will retry three more times at five-second
intervals.
• If the PaaS update process fails on three consecutive days, the device will display the banner
message.
• If a PaaS communication update error occurs, the device will try to connect to the server to update
after being rebooted.
• If the device is rebooted, the banner message will not be displayed. The banner message not
being displayed doesn’t necessarily mean the communication update was successful.

100
2.Installation

Inner 1bin Tray BN2020 (D0B4)

Accessory Check

No. Description Q’ty Remarks


1 1 Bin Tray Unit 1
2 Bracket 1
3 Bracket 1
4 Harness 1
5 Screws M3 x 6 3
6 Tapping screw M3 x 6 1
7 Mylar 2
- EMC Sheet 1

Installation Procedure

When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If
installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur.

101
2.Installation

1. Attach the Mylar films [A].

2. Remove the packing tape and retainers, and then remove the accessories (screws, etc.).
3. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover (D0B4))
4. Remove the front upper cover. (Front Upper Cover (D0B4))
5. Cut off a part [A] of the front upper cover.

Be careful not to get hurt when cutting off the part [A].

102
2.Installation

6. Remove the bracket [A], [B].

7. Attach the bracket [A].

Use the screw obtained from step 6-[A].

8. Hook the hole on the upper side of the bracket [A] onto hinge [B], and then affix the lower side with

103
2.Installation

the screw.

9. With guide plate [A] open, insert the 1-bin tray unit.

104
2.Installation

10. Attach the 1-bin tray unit [A].

11. Connect the harness [A] attached to the 1-bin tray unit to CN110 [B] on the MPU.

105
2.Installation

12. Connect the harness from the MPU to connector [A] on the 1-bin tray.

13. Reattach covers.


14. Turn ON the main power.
15. Check that output to this tray can be selected on the operation panel, and check operation.

106
2.Installation

Fax Option Type M38 (D0B4)

Accessory Check

No. Description Q'ty Remarks


1 FCU 1
2 Serial Number Decal 1
3 Screws: M3 x 6 3
- EMC Sheet 1

Installation Procedure

• Before installing this fax unit, print out all data in the printer buffer. Turn the main power
to OFF and disconnect the power cord and the network cable.
1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover (D0B4))

107
2.Installation

2. Remove the TEL and LINE cover [A] on the interface slot cover [B] using a screwdriver.

3. Attach the FCU [A].

4. Make one loop with the telephone cord, and then attach the ferrite core [A].

5. Connect the telephone cord to the "LINE" jack.


6. Turn ON the main power.

"SRAM formatted" is displayed on the operation panel after the main power is turned ON. Turn the
main power OFF and then ON again for normal use.
7. Enter the correct country code with SP1-101-016 ((SYS OF): Country/area code for functional
setting).
8. Execute SP3-102 in the fax SP mode and enter the serial number for the fax unit.

108
2.Installation

Adding Fax Application Icons to the Home Screen

The fax application icon is normally added automatically. However, if it is missing from the Home
screen, add it as follows:
The display (user interface, etc.) looks different from that of the actual machine.
1. Press the [Application List] key [A].

2. Press and hold the Fax application from the app list.
3. Drag and position the application on the home screen.

Registering the Function key

By registering a fax application to a function key on the Home screen, you can open the application
from any page. Specify the setting as required.

109
2.Installation

Function Keys 1, 2, and 3 are from the left, as shown:


The display (user interface, etc.) looks different from that of the actual machine.

Allocate an application to a function key as follows:


1. Login as the machine administrator
2. Press “Settings” icon > “Screen Features Settings”.
3. Press [Screen Device Settings].

110
2.Installation

4. Press [Function Key Settings].

5. Select the key to register.


To disable a function key, deselect the corresponding function key checkbox.

6. Press [Allocated Function], and then select the fax application.


In [Display Name], you can change the name of the icon on the Home screen (using up to 64
characters).

111
2.Installation

Function Priority Setting

You can specify whether the fax application appears on the operation panel just after turning the power
on or just after the system is reset automatically.
1. Login as the machine administrator
2. Press “Settings” icon > “Screen Features Settings”.
3. Press [Screen Device Settings].

4. Press [Function Priority].

112
2.Installation

5. Select the fax application.

Notes for Connecting the Telephone Line

Checking the following before connecting the telephone line:


If a phone line dedicated to business phones is connected to the MFP, the fax board may be damaged.
Make sure that the connecting phone line is for fax.

Why the Fax Board may be damaged?

Business phones have various functions. To operate those functions, a high current is supplied to a
business phone line. This may damage components on the Fax board.

113
2.Installation

NFC Card Reader Type M38 (D0B4)

Component Check

No. Description Q'ty Remarks


1 Reader 1
2 Interface Cable (with the ferrite core) 1
3 Decal 1
4 Decal 1
5 Screws: M3 x 6 2
6 Clamps 3
7 For Users of This Product 1
8 Note to Users in the United States of America 1
- EMC Sheet 1

Installation Procedure

• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall
socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may
occur.
1. Remove the operation panel unit from the main machine. (Operation Panel Unit)

114
2.Installation

2. Remove the cover [A].

3. Remove the cover [A].

4. Connect the card reader [A] to the interface cable [B], and then attach them to the scanner front

115
2.Installation

cover.

5. Connect the interface cable [A].

116
2.Installation

6. Attach the cover [A].

7. Clamp the harness.

The harnesses should be run in order:


USB harness [B] from the back of wiring guide [A], from the NFC card reader harness [C] and then
harness [D] from the microcomputer board.
harness [D] from the microcomputer board from the back of the wiring guide [E], from the NFC card
reader harness [C] and then USB harness [B].
Position cable tie band [F] for the USB harness as shown in the figure.

117
2.Installation

8. Reassemble the operation panel.

When securing harness [A] from the operation panel, make sure that cable tie bands [C] and [D]
reach both sides of the clamp [B].

118
2.Installation

9. Clamp the harness.

10. Reattach the scanner front cover.


11. Attach the decal [A].

12. Reassemble the machine.

119
2.Installation

Machine Data Encryption (D0B4)

Overview

This function is used for encrypting data when storing it in the machine.
Even if the NVRAM or the micro SD card is stolen, data leakage can be prevented by encrypting the
data on them.

• This encryption setting must be specified by the customer.


• When the customer logs into the machine with the machine administrator’s privilege and
specifies the encryption setting, the encryption key is backed up.
• The back-up method can be selected from “Save to SD Card” and “Print on Ppr”.
Note: Only “Print on Ppr” is available for printer models.
• The customer keeps the encryption key.
• After replacing the part (MPU), get the SD card that contains the encryption key information
ready and perform the NVRAM and microSD data recovery.
(If the encryption key is already stored in the SD card, the SD card can be used as it is.)
• If the paper on which the Encryption Key is printed has been lost, the SD card that contains
the encryption key is damaged, or the serial number data in the SD card is corrupt, NVRAM
and SD card data recovery cannot be performed.
• The notes relating to the microSD card do not apply to models not equipped with a microSD
card.
• The data in the microSD card is deleted when the encryption is configured/canceled.

Setting Procedure

120
2.Installation

(1): Setup (at the factory)


(2): Delivery
(3): Encryption (performed by the customer)
(4): Backing up the encryption key (printing or storing on the SD card)
Note: Only MF models support storing on the SD card.
(5): Storing the encryption key on the SD card brought by the service technician.
(6): Data restoration with the encryption key

A: The customer keeps the encryption key.


B: MPU failure

Data That is Encrypted

This function encrypts data that is stored in the machine's NVRAM, or micro SD card.
• Address book information
• User code/authentication information
• Temporarily stored documents
• Logs (Job log/access log/Eco-friendly log)
• Network I/F setting information
• System settings information
• SAF/Fax communication history

Notes for Encrypting Data on the Machine

What Happens if the Encryption Function is Active

NO. When replacing Encryption status


1 Micro SD card The data in the microSD card is deleted.
After the replacement, a message prompting you to format the microSD
card appears.
If you press the [Initialization] button, data encryption starts over.
2 NVRAM Encryption is performed automatically.
After replacement, the format micro SD card window is displayed. Press
the [Format] button.
When formatting is completed, reboot the system.

If the [Check Status] indicator is lit in red, press the [Check Status] button
and check the status of the equipment.
Note that if the [Check Status] button does not respond, applications (copy,

121
2.Installation

NO. When replacing Encryption status


scan, printer, fax, etc.) can be started from the control panel.
If an SC such as SC890-01 etc. is displayed, refer to troubleshooting.
3 MPU After the replacement, a message prompting you to restore the data
appears.

If the [Check Status] indicator is lit in red after the power is turned on, press
the [Check Status] button and check the status of the equipment.
Note that if the [Check Status] button does not respond, applications (copy,
scan, printer, fax, etc.) can be started from the control panel.
If an SC such as SC890-01 etc. is displayed, refer to troubleshooting.

The encryption key is available.

You can continue using the NVRAM/microSD card data.

The encryption key is unavailable.

After executing the forced start-up, it is necessary to format the


NVRAM/microSD card.
After canceling data encryption, a message prompting you to format the
microSD card appears.
If you press the [Initialization] button, data encryption starts over.
4 MPU and The encryption key is entirely deleted along with the data in the microSD
NVRAM card.
After the replacement, a message prompting you to format the microSD
card appears.
If you press the [Initialization] button, data encryption is canceled.
5 MPU and Micro After the replacement, a message prompting you to restore the data
SD card appears.

If the [Check Status] indicator is lit in red after the power is turned on, press
the [Check Status] button and check the status of the equipment.
Note that if the [Check Status] button does not respond, applications (copy,
scan, printer, fax, etc.) can be started from the control panel.
If an SC such as SC890-01 etc. is displayed, refer to troubleshooting.

The encryption key is available.

You can continue using the NVRAM.


After the restoration, a message prompting you to format the microSD card
appears.
If you press the [Initialization] button, data encryption starts over.
122
2.Installation

NO. When replacing Encryption status

The encryption key is unavailable.

After executing the forced start-up, it is necessary to format the


NVRAM/microSD card.
After the recovery by the forced start-up, a message prompting you to
format the microSD card appears.
If you press the [Initialization] button, data encryption is canceled.
6 NVRAM and After the replacement, a message prompting you to restore the data
Micro SD card appears.

If the [Check Status] indicator is lit in red after the power is turned on, press
the [Check Status] button and check the status of the equipment.
Note that if the [Check Status] button does not respond, applications (copy,
scan, printer, fax, etc.) can be started from the control panel.
If an SC such as SC890-01 etc. is displayed, refer to troubleshooting.
After the replacement, a message prompting you to format the
NVRAM/microSD card appears.
After recovery by the forced start-up, reconfigure data encryption. (Cancel
data encryption and then execute data encryption again.)

In some cases, a message prompting you to format the microSD card


appears.
If it does, there is no need to reset data encryption.
If you press the [Initialization] button, data encryption starts over.
7 MPU, Micro SD All the encryption key information is deleted. The data in the
card, and NVRAM/microSD card is also deleted when replacing the NVRAM/microSD
NVRAM card. (After the replacement, the data encryption key is canceled.)

The notes relating to the microSD card do not apply to models not equipped with a microSD card.

123
2.Installation

Enabling the Encryption Settings

This setting must be done by the customer. Advise the customer to enable this setting as necessary.

Enabling the Encryption Settings

The procedure relating to the microSD card do not apply to models not equipped with a microSD card.
1. Log in as the machine administrator from the operation panel.
2. Press the [User Tools] icon.
3. Press [Machine Features].
4. Press [System Settings].
5. Press the [Administrator Tools] tab.
6. Press [Next] 5 times
7. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].
8. Press [Encrypt].

The machine cannot be operated while data is being encrypted.


Once the encryption process starts, it cannot be stopped.
If the power switch is turned OFF, the micro SD card, and/or NVRAM will be damaged and all data
in it will be unusable.
9. Specify how to back up the encryption key.
124
2.Installation

• If you select [Save to SD Card], insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the
operation panel and press [OK] to back up the machine's data encryption key.
• If you select [Print on Ppr], press [Start] and print out the machine's data encryption key.

The encryption key is required for data recovery if the machine malfunctions. Be sure to instruct the
customer to keep it in a safe place.
10. Press [Restart] to reboot the machine.

When you reboot the machine, the machine will start to convert the data in the memory. Wait until
the message “Memory conversion complete. Turn the main power switch off.” appears, and then
turn the main power switch OFF again.

Backing Up the Encryption Key

Backing Up the Encryption Key

To restore the encrypted data, you need the Encryption key that was generated when enabling the
encryption setting.
The encryption key can be backed up. Select whether to save it to an SD card or to print it.
1. Log in as the machine administrator from the operation panel.
2. Press the [User Tools] icon.
3. Press [Machine Features].
4. Press [System Settings].
5. Press the [Administrator Tools] tab.
6. Press [Next] 5 times.
7. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].
8. Press [Back Up Encryption Key].
9. Specify how to back up the encryption key.
• If you select [Save to SD Card], insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the
operation panel and press [OK] to back up the machine's data encryption key.
• If you select [Print on Ppr], press [Start] and print out the machine's data encryption key.
10. Press [Exit].
11. Log out

125
2.Installation

Recovery Procedure

In the machine in which the data is encrypted, the following message appears after the MPU is
replaced.

Using the encryption key kept by the customer, get an SD card ready for restoration, and then execute
the restoration. (If the encryption key is already stored on an SD card, use that SD card.)
If the customer has lost the encryption key, get ready an SD card for canceling data encryption, and
then execute forced start-up without an encryption key. (In this case, the existing data in the NVRAM
and microSD card is deleted.)

The notes relating to the microSD card do not apply to the models not equipped with a microSD card.

Restoring the Encryption Key

Restoring the Encryption Key

If the encryption key is printed on paper, first get an SD card ready to enter the encryption key. If you
have already stored the encryption key on an SD card, start this procedure from step 6.
1. Prepare an SD card that has been initialized in FAT16 format.
2. Using a PC, create a folder in the SD card and name it "restore_key".
3. Create a folder in the “restore_key” folder and name it the same as the machine’s serial number,
“xxxxxxxxxxx” (11 digits).
4. Create a text file called "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" and write the encryption key.

Write this string at the head of the file.


Use all lower-case letters.
Do not use quotation marks, line breaks, or blank spaces.
5. Save the text file in the "xxxxxxxxxxx“ folder created in Step 3.
/restore_key/xxxxxxxxxxx/key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt
6. Turn the power switch ON.
7. Confirm that a message is displayed on the LCD telling to insert the SD card that contains the
encryption key.
8. Turn the power switch OFF.
9. Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into the machine's rear SD card slot.
10. With a model equipped with a microSD card, after replacing the MPU, remove the NVRAM and
microSD card from the old MPU and install them on the new MPU.
126
2.Installation

11. Turn the power switch ON.

The machine will automatically restore the encryption key to the MPU.
12. Turn the power switch OFF after the restoration is completed.
13. Remove the SD card.
14. Turn the power switch ON.
15. After a message is displayed on the LCD telling you to initialize the micro SD card, turn the power
switch OFF (Do not press “Initialization” button)

Check whether the microSD card has been replaced in step 10.
If the microSD card has not been replaced, turn the power off without pressing the “Initialization”
button, install the microSD card on the new MPU, turn the power back on, and then press the
“Initialization button. If you press the “Initialization” button without replacing the microSD card, the
data in the microSD card cannot be recovered.

Forced Start Up with No Encryption Key

Forced Start Up with No Encryption Key

If the encryption key back-up has been lost, or the encryption key restoration has failed, follow the
procedure below to do a forced start-up.

When the restoration is carried out in the following procedure, data on the micro SD and NV-RAM are
initialized (encrypted data will be deleted, and the user settings will be cleared).
SC870-09 may occur. In such a case, the address book is formatted, so be sure to back up the address
book.

1. Prepare an SD card.
2. Create a directory named “restore_key” inside the root directory of the SD card.
3. Save the “nvram_key.txt” file using the following name:
/restore_key/nvram_key.txt
4. Create a text file and write "nvclear".

Write this string at the head of the file.


Use all lower-case letters.
Do not use quotation marks, line break, or blank spaces.

127
2.Installation

5. Turn the power switch OFF.


6. Insert the SD card that contains nvram_key.txt" into the machine's rear SD card slot.
7. Turn the power switch ON.
8. Check that a message “Are you sure you want to clear the NVRAM?” is displayed on the LCD, then
press the execute button.
9. Check that a message “Initialize the NVRAM after the machine is started.” appears, and then turn
the power switch OFF.
10. Remove the SD card.
11. Turn the power switch ON.

If SC870-09 occurs, turn the power off and then back on. The address book is formatted during
initialization.
12. Check that a message is displayed on the LCD telling you to initialize the micro SD card, then
press “Initialization”.

If the message reporting the formatting does not appear in step 12, reconfigure data encryption
(cancel data encryption and then execute data encryption again), and then proceed to step 15. (For
details about canceling and then executing data encryption, see “Enabling the Encryption
Settings”.)
13. After Initialization is completed, turn the power switch OFF.
14. Turn the power switch ON.
15. Do SP5-801-001 (Memory Clear/All Clear)
16. Set necessary user settings with the User Tools menu.

128
2.Installation

Operation Guidance for Users


Machine Function User Instruction
Basic machine Basic user instruction:
functions • How to load and replace consumables (paper and toner)
(all models) • Basic machine operations (power ON/OFF, other)
• How to make copies (basic operations)
• How to remove jammed paper and clear the jam condition
• How to clear SC errors, contact the service provider in case of occurrence
• Supported paper types/sizes/weights and paper storage
• Daily machine maintenance (Daily Machine Maintenance)
• Machine limitations and other important notes regarding machine
usage/operation
Printer, scanner Settings, print jobs:
• Printer/Scanner settings (USB, network, other)
• Printer/Scanner driver and utilities recommended installation, settings
(printer ports, TWAIN drivers)
• Print test (printing out the driver test page)
• Scan test using a Windows standard scanning application
Basic user instruction:
• How to print out a file
• How to install drivers, perform settings (recommended installation)
• Introduction to the settings and menus available from the operation panel
• Machine limitations and other important notes regarding machine
usage/operation

Daily Machine Maintenance

Cleaning the Toner Shield Glass

The toner shield glass may require cleaning if white lines appear on the print side of the document.

Do not forcibly insert the brush, as the machine may be damaged.

129
2.Installation

Turn off the main power switch, and then unplug the power cord.
Open the front door and remove the cleaning brush.
Lift the cleaning brush toward the machine to release the catches, and then hold its grip and remove it
from the machine.

There is a hole for cleaning the toner shield glass.

Insert the cleaning brush so that its arrow mark faces the arrow mark beside the hole in the machine.
Slide the cleaning brush in and out slowly two to three times.

Tilt and insert the cleaning brush, avoiding hooking it on the rear catches.
Return the cleaning brush to its original position, avoid hooking it onto the front catch. When the
cleaning brush is placed correctly, it makes a clicking sound.

Insert the cleaning brush so that its arrow mark faces the arrow mark beside the hole in the machine.

130
2.Installation

Cleaning the Exposure Glass

Lift the ADF or the platen cover (exposure glass cover).

Be careful not to hold the input tray when lifting the ADF, as the tray might be damaged.
Clean the parts indicated with arrows using a soft damp cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth to remove
any remaining moisture.

When cleaning the exposure glass, clean the scanning glass too.

131
3.Preventive Maintenance

3. Preventive Maintenance

Preventive Maintenance Tables


See “Appendices” for the following information:
• Preventive Maintenance

132
3.Preventive Maintenance

PM Parts Settings

PM Parts Replacement Procedure

1. Enter the SP mode.


2. Print the SMC logging data. (SMC Page Printing)
3. Execute the following SPs to "1".
Item SP No. SP Name
OPC Drum SP7-622-021 PM Counter Reset OPC
Developer SP7-622-024 PM Counter Reset Developer
Mixing Auger Bearings SP7-622-028 PM Counter Reset Bearing:Dev Screw
Transfer roller SP7-622-108 PM Counter Reset Paper Trans Unit
Fusing unit SP7-622-115 PM Counter Reset Fusing Unit
Hot Roller Bearings SP7-622-119 PM Counter Reset Fusing Roll Bear
4. Exit the SP mode.
5. Turn off the main power.
6. Replace the PM parts and turn the power on.
The machine will reset the PM counters.

After Installing the New PM parts

1. Turn on the main power.


2. Output the SMC logging data (SMC Page Printing) and check the counter values.
3. Make sure that the PM counters for the replaced units are "0" with SP7-621 and SP7-944.

Operation Check

Check if an example image is copied normally.

133
4.Replacement and Adjustment

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Beforehand

• Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
• After replacing, make sure that all removed harnesses are connected up again and secured in
their clamps.

134
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Special Tools and Lubricants


No. Parts No. Description Q’ty Unique or Notes
Common
1 B6455010 SD card 1 C (General)
2 B6455020 SD card (1GB) 1 C (General)
3 A2929500 Test chart – S5S (10 pcs/set) 1 C (General)
4 VSSG9006 MOLYKOTE(R) G-1077 1 C (General) ADF Unit (D0B2,D0B3)
GREASE 50g Fusing Drive
Development Drive
Main Motor
Drum Drive
Paper Feed Unit
PB2030/2040
5 D0149800 Grease: KS660B 1 C (General) Development Drive
Drum Drive
6 VSSG0006 DRYSURF:MDF-2400E 25G 1 C (General) ADF Unit (D0B2,D0B3)
Paper Feed Tray
Bypass Tray
Duplex Unit
Paper Feed Unit
PB2030/2040
7 VSSG9007 MOLYKOTE EM-50L 1 C (General) ADF Unit (D0B4)
(JP/ENG) Paper Feed Tray
Paper Feed Unit
PB2030/2040
Inner 1bin Tray BN2020
(D0B4)
8 VSSG9003 MOLY HIGH TEMP GREASE: 1 C (General) ADF Unit (D0B4)
50G
9 52039502 Silicon Grease G-501 1 C (General) ADF Unit (D0B2,D0B3)
10 A2579100 SILICONE OIL TYPE-SS 1 C (General) ADF Unit (D0B4)

Location to Apply G-1077 Grease

ADF Unit (D0B2,D0B3)

ADF Drive Gears

Apply G-1077 grease at the locations shown below.

135
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Location Parts name


[A] ADF drive gear GEAR:SLOW DOWN:MOTOR
[B] ADF drive gear GEAR:ROLLER:EXIT
[C] ADF drive gear GEAR:ROLLER:PULL OUT
[D] ADF drive gear GEAR:IDLER:SEPARATION SUB-UNIT
[E] ADF drive gear GEAR:IDLER:NO.4
[F] ADF drive clutch TORQUE LIMITER:REVERSE ROLLER

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] [A]:8 places
[B] [B]:2 places
[C] [C]:1 place
[D] [D]:1 place
[E] [E]:1 place
[F] [F]:1 place

ADF side plate shaft

Apply G-1077 grease at the locations shown below


Location Parts name
[A] ADF side plate shaft SIDE PLATE:REAR

136
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] 9 places

Original Turn Guide Plate

Apply G-1077 grease at the locations shown below


Location Parts name
[A] Original turn guide plate GATE PAWL:REVERSE
[B]
[C]

137
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] 2 places
[B]

[C] 1 place

Fusing Drive

Apply G-1077 grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Fusing drive gear GEAR:FUSING/PAPER EXIT UNIT:IDLER
[B] Fusing drive gear GEAR:FUSING/PAPER EXIT UNIT:No.1
[C] Fusing drive gear GEAR:PULLY:FUSING:TRANSPORT

138
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] 9 places
[B]
[C]

Development Drive

Apply G-1077 grease at the locations shown below


Location Parts name
[A] Development drive gear GEAR:DEVELOPMENT:DRIVE:IDLER
[B]
[C] Development drive shaft FRAME:DRIVE:MAIN

139
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] [A]:3 places
[B] [B]:3 places

140
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[C] 1 place

Main Motor

After replacing the main motor (M3), apply G-1077 grease to the motor shaft.
Location Parts name
Main motor shaft DC BRUSHLESS MOTOR:50M:18.96W

Maximum Minimum Note


• [A]: Direction of
spreading the grease
• Apply 20 mm to shaft
tip.

141
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Drum Drive

Apply G-1077 grease at the locations shown below


Location Parts name
[A] Drum drive gear GEAR:DRUM:DRIVE

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] 3 places

Paper Feed Unit PB2030/2040

Apply G-1077 grease at the locations shown below


Location Parts name
[A] Paper feed clutch ELECTROMAGNETIC CLUTCH:MIC3.5T:PAPER FEED
[B] Paper feed gear GEAR:VERTICAL TRANSPORT:Z32
[C] Paper feed gear GEAR:PAPER FEED:Z65
142
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Location Parts name


[D] Paper feed gear GEAR:PAPER FEED:Z65/Z32
[E] Transport motor gear DC MOTOR:ENCODER:NO:10W:GEAR:BRUSHLESS

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] [A] :2 places
[B] [B] :2 places
[C] [C] :3 places
[D] [D] :5 places
[E] [E] :1 place

143
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Location to Apply KS660B Grease

Development Drive

Apply KS660B grease at the locations shown below


Location Parts name
[A] Development drive shaft SHAFT:DEVELOPMENT:DRIVE

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] 1 place

Drum Drive

Apply KS660B grease at the locations shown below


Location Parts name
[A] Drum drive shaft SHAFT:DRUM:DRIVE:ASS'Y

144
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] 1 place

Location to Apply MDF-2400E Grease

ADF Unit (D0B2,D0B3)

ADF Original Feed Roller Shaft

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] ADF original feed roller shaft SHAFT:PAPER FEED:COUPLING
[B] ADF harness guide BRACKET:FEED:HARNESS

145
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.01 g ± 0.005 g 2 places
[B] 0.01 g ± 0.005 g 3 places

ADF Guide Plate

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] ADF guide plate GUIDE PLATE
[B]
[C]
[D]

146
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.06 g ± 0.015 g 1 place
[B] 0.01 g ± 0.005 g 1 place
[C] 0.01 g ± 0.005 g 1 place
[D] 0.01 g ± 0.005 g 1 place

ADF Original Sensor Feeler

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] ADF original sensor feeler FEELER:ORIGINAL SENSOR
[B]

147
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.02 g ± 0.004 g 1 place
[B] 0.02 g ± 0.004 g 1 place

ADF Document Table Roller

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] ADF document table roller ROLLER:REVERSE:DRIVEN:2

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.005 g ± 0.0013 g 4 places

148
4.Replacement and Adjustment

ADF Document Table

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] ADF document table ORIGINAL TABLE
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]

149
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.05 g ± 0.01 g 2 places
[B] 0.05 g ± 0.01 g 6 places
[C] 0.05 g ± 0.01 g 2 places
[D] 0.05 g ± 0.01 g 6 places
[E] 0.03 g ± 0.01 g 1 place
[F] 0.03 g ± 0.01 g 1 place

Paper Feed Tray

Paper Feed Tray

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Paper Feed Tray PAPER FEED TRAY
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]

150
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.03 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[B] 0.03 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[C] 0.01 g ±0.005 g 1 place
[D] 0.01 g ±0.005 g 1 place
[E] 0.01 g ±0.005 g 2 places
[F] 0.01 g ±0.005 g 2 places
[G] 0.01 g ±0.005 g 2 places
[H] 0.01 g ±0.005 g 2 places

Tray Lift Drive

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Tray Lift Motor (M4) coupling JOINT:LIFT MOTOR
[B] Tray Lift Motor (M4) gear GEAR:RISING TRAY:OUTPUT

151
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Maximum Minimum Note


Amount
[A] 0.0800g ±0.0050g • 1 place
[B] • 1 place
• Evenly apply [B] to the side
surface of the gear.
• Apply [B] while pushing
down the joint (D3312667).

Tray Release Lever

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Tray release lever GRIP:PAPER TRAY
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]

152
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[B] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[C] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[D] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[E] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[F] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[G] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[H] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place

Tray Release Lever

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Tray release lever LEVER - RELEASE INNER
[B]

153
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Location Parts name


[C]
[D] Tray release lever LEVER:RELEASE:PAPER TRAY:OUTER
[E]
[F] Tray release lever LEVER:PRESSURE:RELEASE:PAPER TRAY

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.06 g ±0.005 g 1 place
[B] 0.06 g ±0.005 g 1 place
[C] 0.06 g ±0.005 g 1 place
[D] 0.06 g ±0.005 g 1 place
[E] 0.06 g ±0.005 g 1 place
[F] 0.06 g ±0.005 g 1 place

Pressure Release Lever

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Pressure release lever LEVER:PRESSURE RELEASE

154
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] 1 place

Pressure Arm

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Pressure arm ARM:PRESSURE:SEPARATE
[B]

155
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.005 g ±0.002 g • 1 place
[B] 0.005 g ±0.002 g • 1 place
• Spread grease evenly over the inner surface of the housing.

Base End Fence

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Base End Fence BASE:END FENCE
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.5 g ±0.07 g 1 place
[B] 0.5 g ±0.07 g 1 place
[C] 0.5 g ±0.07 g 1 place
[D] 0.5 g ±0.07 g 1 place

156
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Note


[E] 0.5 g ±0.07 g 1 place
[F] 0.5 g ±0.07 g 1 place

Rear Side Fence

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Rear side fence SIDE FENCE:REAR
[B]

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.005 g ±0.002 g 1 place
[B] 0.005 g ±0.002 g 1 place

Front Side Fence

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Front side fence SIDE FENCE:FRONT
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]

157
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.01 g ±0.005 g 1 place
[B] 0.01 g ±0.005 g 1 place
[C] 0.01 g ±0.005 g 1 place
[D] 0.02 g ±0.01 g 1 place
[E] 0.02 g ±0.01 g 1 place
[F] 0.02 g ±0.01 g 1 place
[G] 0.02 g ±0.01 g 1 place

158
4.Replacement and Adjustment

If grease gets on [A], [B], or [C] in the figure below, wipe it off with alcohol.

Bypass Tray

Bypass tray friction pad

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Bypass tray friction pad shaft SHAFT:HOLDER

159
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] 2 places

Bypass tray

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Bypass tray BASE:MANUAL FEED TABLE
[B]

160
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.03 g ±0.01 g 3 place
[B] 0.03 g ±0.01 g 3 place

Duplex Unit

Lock Button

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Duplex unit lock button BUTTON:DOOR:RIGHT
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]

161
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] [A]:1 place
[B] [B]:1 place

162
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[C] 1 place

[D] 1 place

[E] 1 place

Duplex Unit Cover

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Duplex unit cover COVER:DUPLEX
[B]
[C]

163
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] 1 place

[B] 1 place

164
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[C] 4 places

Duplex Unit Frame

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Duplex unit frame FRAME:TRANSFER
[B]
[C]
[D]

165
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.0125 g ± 0.005 g 1 place
[B] 0.0125 g ± 0.005 g 1 place
[C] 0.0133 g ± 0.0033 g 1 place
[D] 0.0133 g ± 0.0033 g 1 place

Relay Roller (driven) Bushing

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Duplex unit relay roller(driven) bushing BUSHING - VERTICAL TRANSPORT
[B]

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] [A]:1 place
[B] [B]:1 place

Paper Feed Unit PB2030/2040

Tray Lift Drive

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Tray Lift Motor (M1, M2) coupling JOINT:LIFT MOTOR
166
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Location Parts name


[B] Tray Lift Motor (M1, M2) gear GEAR:RISING TRAY:OUTPUT

Coating Maximum Minimum Note


Amount
[A] 0.08 g ±0.002 g • 1 place
[B] • 1 place
• Evenly apply [B] to the side
surface of the gear.
• Apply [B] while pushing
down the joint (D3312667).

Paper Feed Tray

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Paper feed tray PAPER FEED TRAY
[B]
[C]
[D]

167
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Location Parts name


[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[I]

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 2 places
[B] 0.13 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[C] 0.06 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[D] 0.06 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[E] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[F] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[G] 0.03 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[H] 0.03 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[I] 0.04 g ±0.02 g* 4 places
*Total coating amount for 4 places

Paper Feed Tray (Base)

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


168
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Location Parts name


[A] Paper feed tray (Base) PAPER FEED TRAY (BASE)
[B]
[C]

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.13 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[B] 0.06 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[C] 0.06 g ±0.02 g 1 place

Paper Feed Unit (Right Frame)

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Paper feed unit (Right frame) FRAME:RIGHT

169
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.1 g ±0.02 g 1 place

Pressure Arm

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Pressure Arm ARM:PRESSURE:SEPARATE
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]

170
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.01 g ±0.02 g • 1 place
• Spread grease evenly over the inner surface of the housing.
[B] 0.01 g ±0.02 g • 1 place
• Spread grease evenly over the inner surface of the housing.
[C] 0.01 g ±0.02 g • 1 place
[D] 0.01 g ±0.02 g • 1 place
[E] 0.01 g ±0.02 g • 1 place
[F] 0.01 g ±0.02 g • 1 place

Tray Release Lever

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Tray release lever LEVER:RELEASE PAPER TRAY
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E] Tray release lever SHAFT:LEVER:GRIP
[F]
[G] Tray release lever LEVER:RELEASE:PAPER TRAY:INNER
[H]
[I] Tray release lever LEVER:RELEASE:PAPER TRAY:OUTER
[J]

171
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Location Parts name


[K] Tray release lever GRIP:PAPER TRAY
[L]
[M]
[N]
[O]
[P]
[Q]
[R]

172
4.Replacement and Adjustment

173
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.02 g ±0.02 g 4 places
[B] 0.02 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[C] 0.02 g ±0.02 g 4 places
[D] 0.02 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[E] 0.015 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[F] 0.025 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[G] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[H] 0.05 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[I] 0.015 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[J] 0.015 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[K] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[L] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[M] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[N] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[O] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[P] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[Q] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[R] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place

Vertical Transfer Roller (Driven Side)

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Vertical transfer roller PULL OUT ROLLER - OPTION TRAY

174
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 2 places

Paper End Feeler

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Paper end feeler FEELER:PAPER END
[B]

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.015 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[B] 0.015 g ±0.02 g 1 place

Tray Lift Feeler

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Tray lift feeler FEELER:POSITIONING CONTROL
[B]

175
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[B] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place

Base End Fence

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Base End Fence BASE:END FENCE
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]

176
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[B] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[C] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[D] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[E] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[F] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place

Rear Side Fence

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Rear side fence SIDE FENCE:REAR
[B]
[C]

177
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.02 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[B] 0.02 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[C] 0.02 g ±0.02 g 1 place

Front Side Fence

Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Front side fence SIDE FENCE:FRONT
[B]
[C]

178
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.02 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[B] 0.02 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[C] 0.02 g ±0.02 g 1 place

Location to Apply EM-50L Grease

ADF Unit (D0B4)

ADF Guide Plate

Apply EM-50L grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] ADF guide roller torsion bar TORSION BAR SPRING:EXHAUST:UPPER:DRIVEN

179
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] 8 places

Take care not to get grease on [A], [B], and [C] in the figure below.
180
4.Replacement and Adjustment

ADF Pickup Lever

Apply EM-50L grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] ADF pickup lever SIDE PLATE:REAR
[B] ADF pickup lever BRACKET:FEED CLUTCH

181
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] [A]:1 place
[B] [B]:1 place

unction Gate

Apply EM-50L grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Junction gate SIDE PLATE:FRONT
[B] Junction gate SIDE PLATE:REAR

182
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] [A]:1 place
[B] [B]:1 place

Original Stopper

Apply EM-50L grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Original stopper SIDE PLATE:REAR
[B] Original stopper SIDE PLATE:FRONT

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] [A]:1 place
[B] [B]:1 place

183
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Original Table

Apply EM-50L grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Original table ORIGINAL TABLE
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]

184
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] 1 place

[B] 1 place

185
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[C] [C]:4 places
[D] [D]:4 places
[E] [E]:4 places
[F] [F]:4 places

Take care not to get grease on [A], [B], and [C] in the figure below.

Original Table Cover

Apply EM-50L grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Original table cover COVER:ORIGINAL TABLE

Take care not to get grease on [B], and [C] in the figure below.

186
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] 2 places

Original Feed Roller

Apply EM-50L grease at the locations shown below.


[A] Original feed roller DRIVE SHAFT - PAPER FEED BELT
[B]
Location Parts name

187
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] [A]:1 place
[B] [B]:1 place

Take care not to get grease on [A] in the figure below.

188
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Paper Feed Tray

Tray Bottom Plate

Apply EM-50L grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Paper feed tray bottom plate TRAY BOTTOM PLATE

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] 2 places

Paper Feed Unit PB2030/2040

Tray Bottom Plate

Apply EM-50L grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Paper feed tray bottom plate TRAY BOTTOM PLATE

189
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] 2 places

Inner 1bin Tray BN2020 (D0B4)

Apply EM-50L grease at the locations shown below.


Location Parts name
[A] Paper transfer gear shaft GEAR:PULLY
[B] Paper transfer gear GEAR:PULLY

190
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note


[A] 1place

[B] 1place

191
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Location to Apply RA44-3502 Grease

ADF Unit (D0B2,D0B3)

ADF Paper Feed Clutch

Apply RA44-3502 grease at the locations shown below


Location Parts name
[A] ADF paper feed clutch spring SPRING:MECHANICAL SPRING CLUTCH:PAPER FEED
[B] ADF paper feed clutch gear GEAR:MECHANICAL SPRING CLUTCH:PAPER FEED
[C]

Coating Maximum Minimum Note


Amount
[A] • 1 place
• Spread grease evenly over
the inside surface of the
spring.

192
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Maximum Minimum Note


Amount

[B] 1 place

[C] 1 place

Location to Apply 50G

ADF Unit (D0B4)

Hinge

Apply Moly High Temp Grease 50G at the locations shown below
Location Parts name
[A] Hinge SCREW:DIA6

193
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Coating Maximum Minimum Note


Amount
[A] • 2 places
• Spread at least 5 mm wide around
the entire circumference of [A].

Location to Apply G-501 Grease

ADF Unit (D0B2,D0B3)

ADF Original Feed Roller

Apply G-501 grease at the locations shown below


Location Parts name
[A] ADF original feed roller FEED ROLLER
[B]* ADF original feed roller spring SPRING:ROLLER CLUTCH
[C] ADF original feed roller gear GEAR:FEED

194
4.Replacement and Adjustment

*Apply grease around the entire circumference of locations [A] and [C]. Do not apply grease to location
[B].
Coating Maximum Minimum Note
Amount
- • Apply grease around the entire
circumference of locations [A] and
[C]. Do not apply grease to location
[B].
• Apply the amount of grease shown
in the figure on the left to locations
[A] and [C]. (The amount shown in
the figure on the left spreads inside
the ADF original feed roller spring.)

195
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Location to Apply SILICONE OIL TYPE-SS

ADF Unit (D0B4)

Original Feed Unit

Apply SILICONE OIL TYPE-SS at the locations shown below


Location Parts name
[A] Original feed unit drive shaft SHAFT:PAPER FEED:DRIVE
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]

Coating Amount Note


[A] 0.025 g ± 0.005 g 1 place
[B] 0.025 g ± 0.005 g 1 place
[C] 0.025 g ± 0.005 g 1 place
[D] 0.025 g ± 0.005 g 1 place
[E] 0.025 g ± 0.005 g 1 place

Feed Motor

Apply SILICONE OIL TYPE-SS at the locations shown below

196
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Location Parts name


[A] Timing pully shaft TIMING PULLY:TRANSPORT:SLOW DOWN

Coating Note
Amount
[A] 3 dollops • 1 place
• Spread grease in the area from the shaft base up to 50 mm from the shaft
base.

197
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Exterior Covers

• Unplug the power cord before starting the following procedure.

Overview

Front and Rear Side Covers (D0B2,D0B3)

No. Cover name


1 Operation panel
2 Front right cover
3 Front door
4 Main power switch cover
5 ADF rear cover
6 Rear cover

Front and Rear Side Covers (D0B4)

198
4.Replacement and Adjustment

No. Cover name


1 Smart operation panel
2 Front upper cover
3 Front door
4 Main power switch cover
5 Rear cover (ADF)
6 Rear cover

Left and Right Side Covers

No. Cover name


1 Left cover
2 Fusing exhaust cover
3 Right upper cover
4 Right rear cover
5 Right front cover

199
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Fusing Exhaust Covers/Inner Covers

No. Cover name


1 Fusing exhaust cover
2 Inner cover

ADF (D0B3)

No. Cover name


1 ADF front cover
200
4.Replacement and Adjustment

No. Cover name


2 ADF upper cover
3 ADF rear cover

ADF (D0B4)

No. Cover name


1 Front cover
2 Left cover
3 Rear cover

201
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Front Door

1. Remove the front door [A].

Paper Tray 1

1. Remove the paper tray 1 [A].

202
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Front Right Cover (D0B2,D0B3)

1. Open the front door.

If the front door will get in the way while performing this work, remove it. (Front Door)
2. Open the bypass tray [A], and then press the button [B] to open the right door [C].

3. Remove the front right cover [A].

Front Upper Cover (D0B4)

1. Open the front door.

If the front door will get in the way while performing this work, remove it. (Front Door)

203
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Open the bypass tray [A], and then press the button [B] to open the right door [C].

3. Remove the front upper cover [A].

Inner Cover

1. Do the following steps:

D0B2,D0B3

1. Remove the front right cover. (Front Right Cover (D0B2,D0B3))

D0B4

1. Remove the front upper cover. (Front Upper Cover (D0B4))


2. Remove paper tray 1. (Paper Tray 1)

204
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Pull the toner bottle holder lever [A] upward.

4. Release the lock lever [A], and then pull out the toner bottle holder [B].

205
4.Replacement and Adjustment

5. Remove the toner bottle [A], and then remove the toner bottle holder [B].

6. Release the lock lever [A].


7. Remove the PCDU [B].

206
4.Replacement and Adjustment

8. Remove the lock lever [A].

9. Remove the inner cover [A].

207
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Left Cover

1. Remove the left cover [A].

Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3)

1. Remove the rear cover [A].

208
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Rear Cover (D0B4)

1. Remove the rear cover [A].

Right Rear Cover

1. Remove the rear cover.(Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3), Rear Cover (D0B4))


2. Remove the right rear cover [A].

209
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Right Upper Cover

1. Do the following steps:

D0B2,D0B3

1. Remove the front right cover. (Front Right Cover (D0B2,D0B3))

D0B4

1. Remove the front upper cover. (Front Upper Cover (D0B4))


2. Remove the right rear cover. (Right Rear Cover)
3. Remove the right upper cover [A].

This cover hook employs a snap-fit mechanism.


The hook is on the back of the mark shown in the enlarged view.

Paper Exit Tray

If an inner 1 bin tray is attached to the D0B4, remove it.


1. Remove the inner cover. (Inner Cover)
2. Remove the left cover. (Left Cover)

210
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the paper exit tray [A].

Right Door

1. Remove the right rear cover. (Right Rear Cover)


2. Open the bypass tray [A], and then press the button [B] to open the right door [C].

211
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the ID sensor connector. [A]

4. Close the right door.


5. Remove the right door hinge brackets [A].

212
4.Replacement and Adjustment

6. Press the button [B] to remove the right door [C].

7. Remove the duplex unit bracket [A].


8. Slide the right door hinge shaft [B].
9. Remove the transfer guide unit [C].

213
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Reinstalling the Right Door

1. Reinstall the transfer guide unit on the right door.


2. Hook the right door hinge brackets [A] to the rear frame [B].
3. Close the right door [C].
4. Tighten the right door hinge brackets [A].

5. Reconnect the ID sensor connector.


6. Reinstall the right rear cover.

• Be sure to close the right door first then secure the right door hinge brackets in place with
screws.
Otherwise, the right door may shift and may not close properly.

214
4.Replacement and Adjustment

ADF Unit (D0B3)

ADF Unit

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3))


2. Disconnect the ADF cable [A] and remove the ground plate [B].

3. Open and remove the ADF unit [A].

Platen Cover Sensor

1. Remove the top rear cover (Top Rear Cover)

215
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the platen cover sensor (S2) [A].

ADF Front Cover

1. Open the ADF upper cover [A].


2. Remove the ADF front cover [B].

216
4.Replacement and Adjustment

ADF Rear Cover

1. Open the ADF upper cover [A].


2. Open the document table [B].

3. Remove the ADF rear cover [A].

217
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Document Table

1. Remove the ADF front cover. (ADF Front Cover)


2. Remove the ADF rear cover (ADF Rear Cover)
3. Remove the document table [A].

Original Width Sensor (S17)

1. Remove the document table. (Document Table)

218
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the document table rear cover [A].

3. Remove the original width sensor (S17) [A].

Pick-up Roller

1. Open the ADF upper cover [A].

219
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the original feed unit [B].

3. Remove the pick-up roller [A].

Separation Pad

1. Open the ADF upper cover [A].

220
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the original feed unit [B].

3. Push the lever [A] to pop up the separation pad [B].

ADF Cover Sensor (S19), Original Set Sensor (S18)

1. Remove the ADF rear cover. (ADF Rear Cover)


2. Remove the ADF cover sensor (S19) [A].

221
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the original set sensor (S18) [B].

ADF/Platen Cover Sensor (S21)

1. Remove the ADF rear cover. (ADF Rear Cover)


2. Remove the ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21) [A].

222
4.Replacement and Adjustment

ADF Pick-up Solenoid (SOL3)

1. Remove the ADF rear cover. (ADF Rear Cover)


2. Remove the ADF pick-up solenoid (SOL3) [A].

ADF Inverter Solenoid (SOL2)

1. Remove the document table. (Document Table)

223
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the bracket [A].

3. Remove the ADF inverter solenoid (SOL2) [A].

ADF Feed Roller

1. Remove the document table. (Document Table)


2. Remove the original feed unit. (Pick-up Roller)

224
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the original feed-in guide plate [A].

4. Remove the original turn guide plate [A].

225
4.Replacement and Adjustment

5. Remove the bracket [A].

6. Remove the harness guide [A].

226
4.Replacement and Adjustment

7. Remove the ADF feed clutch [A].

8. Remove the left hinge [A].

227
4.Replacement and Adjustment

9. Remove the right hinge [A].

10. Remove the bracket [A].

228
4.Replacement and Adjustment

11. Remove the bracket [A].

12. Remove the ADF feed roller [A].

ADF Main Motor (M6)

1. Remove the ADF feed roller. (ADF Feed Roller)


229
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the ADF main motor (M6) [A].

ADF Registration Sensor (S20)

1. Open the ADF unit.


2. Remove the white plate guide [A].

230
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the ADF registration sensor (S20) [A].

231
4.Replacement and Adjustment

ADF Unit (D0B4)

ADF Unit

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover (D0B4))


2. Remove the cable bracket [A],[B] and connector.

3. Remove the screws on the ADF base.

4. Slowly and carefully (the ADF is heavy) lift the ADF [A].
Set the ADF on its edge on the floor, and then lean it against a wall [B].

232
4.Replacement and Adjustment

• To prevent damage to the fragile feelers [A] of the ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21), never lay
the ADF on a flat surface as shown below.

Original Feed Unit

1. Open the left cover.

233
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the Original feed unit [A].

• Pull the original feed unit forward to release the back side of the shaft.

Rear Cover

1. Open the left cover [A].


2. Open the original tray [B].
3. Remove the Rear cover [C]. ( ×1, hook ×5)

Front Cover and Original Tray

1. Open the left cover.


2. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)

234
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the front cover [A].

• Keep the original tray open when removing the front cover.
4. Remove the original tray [A] ( ×1, ×1, ×1).

Hinge

1. Remove the ARDF from the main machine.


2. Place the ARDF on a flat surface, and place it so that the hinge does not hit against that surface.

• Be careful not to scratch the scanning area [A] (guide plate and mylar).
• Be careful not to hook the actuator [B]. (It is a movable actuator; it is stored in the ARDF
235
4.Replacement and Adjustment

when you push it and it comes back because of a spring.)

3. Remove the rear cover of the ARDF.

4. Remove the following parts.


• Clamp
• Harness
• Connectors [A] ( ×3)
• Screw [B] ( ×1)

5. Remove the screws [A] and spring [B] of the feed motor bracket, and remove the feed motor unit.

236
4.Replacement and Adjustment

( ×2, spring ×1)

6. Remove the resin ring [A] and flanges, and remove the timing belt. Then, remove the reverse
torque limiter [B] from the shaft.

7. Disconnect the link [A] of the junction gate, and remove the E-ring [B] of the fixing shaft. ( ×1)

237
4.Replacement and Adjustment

8. Loosen the screw [A] of the belt tension unit and remove the spring [B]. ( ×1, spring ×1)

9. Remove the screws [A] of the motor bracket, and remove the transport motor unit. ( ×2)

10. Remove the belt tension unit and screw [A], and pull out the hinge fixing shaft [B] (do not remove
the E-ring on the fixing shaft side).

11. Remove the step screws and springs [A] of the hinge, and remove the hinge [B]. ( ×2, spring ×2)
Note: Grease is applied to the step screws.

238
4.Replacement and Adjustment

12. Insert the left hinge with a damper [A] and insert the hinge fixing shaft [B].

13. Fix the hinge fixing shaft with an E-ring, and insert the link [B] of the junction gate. ( ×1)
After inserting the link, pull it slightly to check that it does not fall out.

14. Attach the step screws and springs of the hinge. After attaching them, push the screw top to check
that the screws are pushed down.
When the screws do not move, the step screws may be fixed with the plate stay. Loosen and fix the
screws again.

239
4.Replacement and Adjustment

15. Attach the reverse torque limiter [A].


Put the torque limiter on the shaft, hook the timing belt, attach the flange, and fix it with the resin
ring.

16. Attach the transport motor unit. ( ×2)


Attach the bracket to the plate, hook the timing belt onto the motor pulley, and hook the spring.
Do not fix the screws [A] completely, so that the motor unit can move left and right.

17. Rotate the white gear [A] by hand to warm up the timing belt. ( ×2)
Fix the screws [B] of the feed motor bracket completely, which were attached in step 16.
(The picture has been taken after attaching the harness guide.)

240
4.Replacement and Adjustment

18. Attach the belt tension unit. Do not fix the screw [A] completely. Move the cutout of the belt tension
unit to fit the hole [B] in the rear plate. ( ×1)

19. Hook the belt [A] onto the pulley of the transport motor unit, and insert the shaft into the hole in the
rear plate, shown in step 18.

20. Fix the two screws [A] of the transport motor unit, and hook the spring [B] of the belt tension unit.

241
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Do not fix the screw [C] of the belt tension completely. ( ×3, spring×1)

21. Attach the harness guide and fix it with the screw [A]. ( ×1)
The harness [B] of the clutch should be passed as shown below.

22. Insert the connector of the motor and the connector of the cooling fan, and fix the harness with the
clamp. ( ×2, ×1)

Original Length Sensors (SN12) (SN13) (SN14) and Original Sensor (SN11)

1. Remove the Original Tray. (Front Cover and Original Tray)

242
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the Tray cover [A]. ( ×3)

3. Remove the following items:


• Original sensor (SN11) [A] ( ×1)
• Original length sensors (SN12) (SN13) (SN14) [B] ( ×1 each)

Original Set Sensor (SN8)

1. Remove the Original feed unit. (Original Feed Unit)


2. Remove the Original tray. (Front Cover and Original Tray)

243
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the Original feed-in guide plate [A]. ( ×3)

4. Remove the Feed guide [A].

5. Remove the Original turn guide plate [A]. (hook ×2)

244
4.Replacement and Adjustment

6. Remove the Original set sensor bracket [A]. (hook ×2)

7. Remove the Original set sensor (SN8) [A]. ( ×1)

Original Width Sensors (SN1) (SN2) (SN3) (SN4) (SN5) and Skew Correction Sensor
(SN10)

1. Remove the Original turn guide plate. (Original Set Sensor (SN8))
245
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the Original width sensors (SN1) (SN2) (SN3) (SN4) (SN5) [A] ( ×1 each) and skew
correction sensor (SN10) [B] with bracket. ( ×1, ×1)

Original Exit Sensor (SN7)

1. Remove the Original feed-in guide plate. (Original Set Sensor (SN8))

• The original exit sensor [A] is located in the ARDF mainframe.

246
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the Original exit sensor bracket [A]. ( ×1)

3. Remove the Original exit sensor (SN7) [A]. ( ×1)

Registration Sensor (SN6)

1. Remove the Original feed-in guide plate. (Original Set Sensor (SN8))
2. Remove the Registration sensor (SN6) [A]. ( ×1)

ADF Position Sensor (SN9)

1. Remove the DF Main Board (BD1). (DF Main Board (BD1))

247
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the ADF position sensor with bracket [A]. ( ×1)

3. Remove the ADF position sensor (SN9) [A]. ( ×1)

Cover Switch (SWC1)

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)


2. Remove the cover switch (SWC1) [A]. ( ×2, ×2)

Feed Motor (MT1)

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)

248
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the Feed motor harness [A]. ( ×1)

3. Remove the Harness guide [A]. ( ×5)

4. Remove the Feed motor with bracket [A]. ( ×2, spring [B]×1, ×1)

249
4.Replacement and Adjustment

5. Remove the Feed motor (MT1) [A]. ( ×2)

Transport Motor (MT2)

1. Remove the Rear cover. (Rear Cover)


2. Remove the Transport motor bracket [A]. (spring ×1, ×2, ×1)

3. Remove the Transport motor (MT2) [A]. ( ×2)

Stamp Solenoid (SL3)

1. Remove the Rear cover. (Rear Cover)

250
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the Stamp solenoid harness [A]. ( ×1, ×1)

3. Open the DF and remove the platen sheet [A].

4. Remove the Stamp solenoid cover [A]. ( ×1)

251
4.Replacement and Adjustment

5. Remove the Stamp solenoid (SL3) [A]. ( ×1)

6. Pull out the harness [A].

Pick-up Solenoid (SL2)

1. Remove the Rear cover. (Rear Cover)


2. Remove the Harness guide. (Feed Motor (MT1))
3. Remove the Pick-up solenoid (SL2) [B]. ( ×2, ×1)

252
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Inverter Solenoid (SL1)

1. Remove the Rear cover. (Rear Cover)


2. Remove the Harness guide. (Feed Motor (MT1))
3. Remove the Inverter solenoid (SL1) [A]. ( ×2, ×1, ×1, gear ×1, gear cover ×1, ×1)

Paper Feed Clutch (CLT1)

1. Remove the Rear cover. (Rear Cover)


2. Remove the Original feed unit. (Original Feed Unit)
3. Remove the Paper feed clutch (CLT1) [A]. ( ×2, bushing ×1, shaft ×1, ×1, ×1)

Feed Belt

1. Remove the Original feed unit. (Original Feed Unit)

253
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the Feed belt cover [A]. (spring×1)

• When reattaching the feed belt cover, make sure that the projection [B] of the feed belt
cover is on the guide plate rear [C].
3. Remove the Belt tension unit [D].

4. Remove the Feed belt [E].

Pick-Up Roller

1. Remove the Original feed unit. (Original Feed Unit)

254
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the Pick-up roller [A]. ( ×1)

Separation Roller

1. Remove the original Feed Unit. (Original Feed Unit)


2. Remove the separation roller cover [A].

255
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the separation roller [A]. ( ×1).

DF Main Board (BD1)

1. Remove the Rear cover. (Rear Cover)


2. Remove the DF Main board (BD1) [A]. ( ×2, ×7)

256
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Operation Panel

4-Line LCD (D0B2,D0B3)

OPU Board (PCB9)

1. Open the front door.

If the front door will get in the way while performing this work, remove it. (Front Door)Front Door
2. Remove the front right cover. (Front Right Cover (D0B2,D0B3))
3. Open the ADF unit or platen cover.
4. Remove the operation panel [A].

5. Remove the OPU board (PCB9) [A].

257
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Smart Operation Panel (D0B4)

• M2 screws are used for assembling the smart operation panel.


• The machine’s operation panel is a flat touchscreen. When you remove the panel and set it
aside temporarily, be sure to lay it down with the screen face up so as not to damage the
screen.
• When you dismantle the removed operation panel unit, be sure to do it on the service mat [A]
spread on the exposure glass.
• If you place the operation panel unit directly on the exposure glass or other flat surface and
apply strong pressure to the entire panel, air may leak from the gap in the panel, causing such
problems as a coordinate deviation and detection error.

Operation Panel Unit

1. Remove the scanner front cover[A]. (Scanner Front Cover)


2. Remove the operation panel unit [A] from the main machine.

Spread a cloth or service mat [A] on the exposure glass to protect the display.
Place the operation panel on the exposure glass so that the display faces down.
258
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the cover [A].

259
4.Replacement and Adjustment

4. Remove the cover [A].

5. Remove cable [A],[B].

260
4.Replacement and Adjustment

6. Remove the cover [A],[B] and left hinge [C].

By factory default, the following switches of the DIP switch [A] on the micro computer board are set to
ON: No.1, No.3.
When installing the operation panel unit, make sure that the DIP switch setting is correct for the MFP on
which you are installing the panel.

The harnesses should be run in order:


USB harness [B] from the back of wiring guide [A],from the NFC card reader (option) harness [C] and
then harness [D] from the micro computer board.
harness [D] from the micro computer board from the back of wiring guide [E],from the NFC card reader
(option) harness [C] and then USB harness [B].

261
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Position cable tie band [F] for the USB harness as shown in the figure.

When securing harness [A] from the operation panel, make sure that cable tie bands [C] and [D] reach
both sides of the clamp [B].

After replacing the operation panel unit, make sure that the latest version of the firmware is installed on
the Smart Operation Panel. Update it if necessary (Updating the Smart Operation Panel).

Internal Parts

For details about disassembling the Smart Operation Panel, see Replacement and Adjustment.

262
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Scanner (D0B2,D0B3)

• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedures.
• Do not touch the guide rod [A], because it has grease on it.

Top Rear Cover

1. Remove the platen cover or ADF unit. (ADF Unit)


2. Remove the top rear cover [A].

263
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Scanner

1. Remove the operation panel. (Operation Panel)


2. Remove the right upper cover. (Right Upper Cover)
3. Remove the left cover. (Left Cover)
4. Remove the top rear cover. (Top Rear Cover)
5. Do the following steps:
1. Remove the four brackets [A].
2. Remove the two ground parts [B].

264
4.Replacement and Adjustment

6. Remove the bracket [A].

265
4.Replacement and Adjustment

7. Remove the scanner [A].

Exposure Glass Unit

1. Remove the operation panel. (Operation Panel)


2. Remove the right upper cover. (Right Upper Cover)
3. Remove the left cover. (Left Cover)
4. Remove the top rear cover. (Top Rear Cover)
5. Remove the exposure glass unit [A].

• Exposure glass [B], DF exposure glass [C] and cover [D] are all in one unit.
• Do not disassemble this unit into the individual parts.

266
4.Replacement and Adjustment

CIS Unit

• When replacing the CIS unit (PCB4) or scanner drive belt, be careful not to touch the grease
that applied to the guide rod under the timing belt.
1. Remove the exposure glass unit. (Exposure Glass Unit)
2. Remove the CIS unit [A].

Scanner Drive Belt

1. Remove the exposure glass unit. (Exposure Glass Unit)


2. Do the following steps:

267
4.Replacement and Adjustment

1. Move the CIS unit (PCB4) [A] to expose the left bracket [B].

DO NOT pull it directly, instead, use the drive belt to move.


2. Push the left bracket [B] and remove the scanner drive belt [C].

Scanner HP Sensor (S1)

1. Remove the exposure glass unit. (Exposure Glass Unit)

268
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the scanner HP sensor (S1) [A].

Original Size Sensors (S3)

1. Remove the exposure glass unit. (Exposure Glass Unit)


2. Remove the original size sensors (S3) [A].

Scanner Motor (M1)

1. Remove the scanner drive belt. (Scanner Drive Belt)

269
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the scanner motor (M1) [A].

Adjusting the Scanner Parameters

• Adjust the following SP modes after replacing the scanner unit or a part of the scanner unit:
• SP4-008-001 (Sub Scan Mag. Adj): (Adjustment after Replacement (D0B2,D0B3))
• SP4-010-001 (L-Edge Regist Adj): (Adjustment after Replacement (D0B2,D0B3))
• SP4-011-001 (S-to-S Regist Adj): (Adjustment after Replacement (D0B2,D0B3))
• SP4-688-001 (ADF Adj Density): Use this to adjust the density level if the image density of outputs
made in the DF and platen mode is different.

270
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Scanner (D0B4)

Scanner Exterior

Scanner Front Cover

Removal procedure

1. Remove the front upper cover. (Front Upper Cover (D0B4))


2. Remove the screw [A],[B].

3. Remove the screw [A],[B].

271
4.Replacement and Adjustment

4. Do the following steps:


1. Remove hook [A] on the right side of the scanner front cover.

2. Remove hook [A] on the left side of the scanner front cover.

Insert a flathead screwdriver into the gap in the scanner front cover and remove it.

272
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Adjust the smart operation panel [A] so that it is vertical.

273
4.Replacement and Adjustment

4. Remove the scanner front cover [A].

Attachment procedure

1. Remove the smart operation panel. (Smart Operation Panel (D0B4))


2. Attach the screw [A],[B].

3. Attach the smart oparation panel [A].

274
4.Replacement and Adjustment

4. Attach the scanner front cover [A].

Using your finger, press hooks [A] and [B] that attach the smart operation panel and check that
they are attaching at the correct positions.

275
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Scanner Rear Cover

1. Remove the ADF unit. (ADF Unit)


2. Remove the scanner rear cover [A].

Scanner Right Cover

1. Remove the right upper cover. (Right Upper Cover)

276
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the scanner right cover [A].

Scanner Left Cover

1. Remove the left cover. (Left Cover)


2. Remove the scanner front cover. (Scanner Front Cover)
3. Remove the scanner left cover [A].

Scanner Upper Cover

1. Remove the scanner left cover. (Scanner Left Cover)


2. Remove the scanner rear cover. (Scanner Right Cover)

277
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the scanner upper cover [A].

Exposure Glass

1. Open the ADF.


2. Remove the scale cover [A].

278
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the rear scale [A].

4. Remove the sheet-through exposure glass [A].

5. Remove the left scale and exposure glass [A].

• The exposure glass and the left scale are attached with double-sided tape.

279
4.Replacement and Adjustment

• When installing, please follow the points below:


• Install the sheet-through exposure glass with the mark [A] at the rear left corner.
• Set so that the locating hole of the left scale fits over the locating boss of the front/rear
frame.

Scanner Carriage

1. Remove the exposure glass. (Exposure Glass)


2. Remove the scanner front cover. (Scanner Front Cover)

280
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the scanner carriage front cover [A].

4. Move the scanner carriage [A] to the indicated position as shown.

281
4.Replacement and Adjustment

5. Loosen the screw, remove the spring [A], and then remove the belt [B].

6. Turn the scanner carriage over and place it on the frame [A].

• When holding the scanner carriage, be careful not to touch the circuit board [A], lens [B],
and mirror [C].

282
4.Replacement and Adjustment

7. Remove the Belt [A].

8. Lower the lock lever [A] and disconnect the FFC [B].

9. Remove the ferrite core [A] and the sheet [B] (Hook x4).

283
4.Replacement and Adjustment

10. Remove the scanner carriage.

• When attaching the scanner carriage, hold the carriage with the screw [A] loosened and move
the carriage back and forth to the sides twice to have the belt stretch evenly. Then, fasten the
screw [A].

• After replacing the scanner carriage, enter the values supplied with the carriage in the
following SP
- SP4-871-002 (Distortion Correction Distortion Initialization)
- SP4-880-001 (Dot shift amount between R Line and G Line).
- SP4-880-002 (Dot shift amount between G Line and B Line).
To apply the specified settings, turn the power off and then back on.
The specified values are cleared when the NVRAM is initialized, so be sure to keep the
supplied sheet showing the values in the machine.

Cleaning the scanner carriage mirror

1. Remove the exposure glass. (Exposure Glass)

284
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the scanner carriage front cover [A].

3. Move the scanner carriage [A] to the indicated position as shown.

4. Remove the resin cover [A] (Hook x3).

285
4.Replacement and Adjustment

5. Open the metal cover [A].

6. Wipe clean the mirror with a dry cloth.

• When reattaching the metal cover [A], fasten the screws in the order of "1", "2", and "3".

286
4.Replacement and Adjustment

• When attaching the resin cover, insert its tip under the metal frame.

Scanner Motor (M1)

1. Remove the scanner upper cover. (Scanner Upper Cover)


2. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover (D0B4))
3. Remove the grounding plate [A].

287
4.Replacement and Adjustment

4. Remove the spring [A].

5. Remove the scanner motor (M1) with bracket [A].

6. Remove the bracket [A].

APS Sensors (S22)

1. Remove the exposure glass. (Exposure Glass)

288
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the APS sensor harness cover [A].

3. Remove the APS sensors (S22) [A] (Hook x2).

Scanner Home Position Sensor (S1)

1. Remove the exposure glass. (Exposure Glass)


2. Remove the slide the scanner carriage [A] in the direction of the arrow.

289
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the scanner home position sensor (S1) [A] (Hook x 3).

ADF/Platen Cover Sensor (S21)

1. Remove the scanner upper cover. (Scanner Upper Cover)


2. Remove the ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21) [A].

Scanner FFC

1. Remove the exposure glass. (Exposure Glass)


2. Remove the FFC from the scanner carriage. (Scanner Carriage)

290
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the APS sensor harness cover [A].

4. Remove the double-sided tape.

When reattaching the same part, apply a double-sided tape again.


5. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover (D0B4))
6. While pressing the lock release lever, pull out the FFC [A].

When changing the FFC

When changing the FFC, stick the sheet [A] to the new FFC.

291
4.Replacement and Adjustment

When attaching the sheet, follow the steps below.


1. Feed the FFC through the ferrite core [A].

2. Connect the FFC to the scanner carriage’s connector, and then lift the lever [A] to lock it.

3. Attach the sheet [A] to the FFC from above, and then insert the tabs at both ends of the sheet into

292
4.Replacement and Adjustment

the gaps in the FFC holder to secure it in position.

When applying the sheet, be sure not to stretch the FFC.


Applying the sheet while stretching the FFC causes the circuit board to be deformed.

293
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Laser Unit

• The laser beam can seriously damage eyes. Be absolutely sure that the main power
switch is off and that the machine is unplugged before accessing the laser unit.

• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.

Warning Decal Location

Toner Shield Glass

The toner shield glass cannot be replaced.


Cleaning only. Refer to the "Daily Machine Maintenance".

Laser Unit

If an inner 1 bin tray is attached to the D0B4, remove it.

1. Remove the inner cover. (Inner Cover)


2. Remove the left cover. (Left Cover)
3. Remove the paper exit tray. (Paper Exit Tray)

294
4.Replacement and Adjustment

4. Remove the fan duct [A].

5. Remove the laser unit [A].

295
4.Replacement and Adjustment

PCDU Section

• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedures.

Before Replacing a PCU or Development Unit

• To prevent toner spill out during the PCDU removal process, cover the toner openings on old
PCDU.
• To prevent damage from excessive light, wrap the OPC drum with protective paper and store
the OPC drum in a cool dark place.
• Do not touch the OPC drum, cleaning blade, or any seals or tapes.
• Do not use any alcohols or solvents to clean the OPC drum; Be sure to wipe with a dry cloth.
If excessive dirt exists, first wipe with a damp cloth, and next wipe off completely with a dry
cloth.
• Do not rotate the OPC drum clockwise after the PCDU has been installed.

PCDU

1. Open the bypass tray [A], and then press the button [B] to open the right door [C].

296
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Open the front door, and then pull the toner bottle holder lever [A] upward.

3. Release the lever lock [A], and then pull the toner bottle holder [B].

297
4.Replacement and Adjustment

4. Remove the toner bottle [A], and then remove the toner bottle holder [B].

5. Hold the lock [A], and then remove the PCDU [B].

Do not touch the OPC drum surface.


6. Execute SP2-801-001 (Deve Initializati Init TD Sen Execu) to reinitialize the TD sensor (S7).

Perform this work (SP2-801-001 execution) only when performing initialization, such as when
removing the PDCU to reset the counter for PCDU internal component maintenance. This work is
not required when the PCDU is replaced by the user or the PCDU is replaced with a new PCDU by
a serviceman.

298
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Pick-off Pawls

• Do not turn the PCU upside down. It will cause toner and developer to spill out.
1. Remove the PCDU. (PCDU)
2. Remove the pawl [A].

• Pull down the pawl and release the bottom end.

3. After reinstalling the pickoff pawls, adjust the image quality. (After Replacement or Adjustment)

OPC Drum

1. Remove the PCDU. (PCDU)


2. Do the following steps:
1. Remove the front side piece [A].

299
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the coupling [B] and rear side piece [C].

3. Separate the PCU [A] from the development unit [B].

4. Do the following steps:


1. Pry out the drum retaining clip [A].

300
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the OPC drum [B].

Install the clip in the same orientation (with the clip facing away from the drum shaft) at
reassembly.

5. When reassembling, adjust the image quality (After Replacement or Adjustment).


6. Execute SP2-801-001.

Perform this work (SP2-801-001 execution) only when performing initialization, such as when
removing the PDCU to reset the counter for PCDU internal component maintenance. This work is
not required when the PCDU is replaced by the user or the PCDU is replaced with a new PCDU by
a service man.

Charge Roller and Cleaning Brush

1. Remove the OPC drum. (OPC Drum)


2. Do the following steps:
1. Remove the holding pin [A].
2. Remove the stepped screw [B].
3. Remove the charge roller [C] and cleaning brush [D]. (with the holders and springs)

Turn the gear [E] (as necessary) so that the rear holder [F] comes out.

301
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. When reassembling, adjust the image quality (After Replacement or Adjustment).

Cleaning Blade

1. Remove the charge roller. (Charge Roller and Cleaning Brush)


2. Remove the cleaning blade [A]. ( x 2)

Reassembling
• To prevent damage to the new cleaning blade and OPC drum, remove some toner from
the old OPC drum with your finger, and apply it evenly along the edge [B] of the new
blade.

3. When reassembling, adjust the image quality (After Replacement or Adjustment).

302
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Developer

1. Remove the PCDU. (PCDU)


2. To let the toner fall to the development unit, gently tap about eight different spots on the top of the
PCDU with a screwdriver. Each spot must be approximately at an equal distance from the next
spot.
3. Reinstall the PCDU in the main machine.
4. Turn the main power switch on.
5. Open and close the front door and wait for the machine to rotate the development roller for about
10 seconds.
6. Repeat the previous step two more times.
7. Remove the PCDU. (PCDU)
8. Separate the development unit from the OPC drum section. (OPC Drum)
9. Place sheets of paper on a flat surface, and then put the development unit on it.
10. Remove the top part [A] of the development unit.

• If any of the gears [A] fall off, attach them as shown below.

303
4.Replacement and Adjustment

11. Remove the old developer.


1. Set the coupling [A] back on the shaft.

304
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Turn the upper part [A] over.

3. Turn the coupling [A] in the direction of the arrow to remove the old developer from the upper
part [B].

305
4.Replacement and Adjustment

4. Remove the coupling [A].

5. Turn the bottom part [A] over and remove the old developer.

12. Load the new developer.


1. Uniformly distribute a pack of developer to all openings [A].

Do not spill the developer on the gears [B]. If developer spills on the gears, remove it using a
magnet or magnetized screwdriver.
Be sure to pour in all the developer from the pack.

306
4.Replacement and Adjustment

13. Reassemble the PCDU.


14. Install the PCDU in the machine.
15. Reassemble the machine.
16. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine.
17. Execute SP2-801-001 (Deve Initializati Init TD Sen Execu) to reinitialize the TD sensor (S7).

• Make sure no toner or developer stays on the gear. Clean the gears as necessary with a
blower brush, etc.

Mixing Auger Bearings

1. Remove the top part of the development unit. (Developer)

307
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the four gears [A].

3. Remove the four mixing auger bearings [A] (two on each side).

4. Reassemble the PCDU.


5. Install the PCDU in the machine.
6. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine.
7. Execute SP7-622-028 (PM Counter Reset Bearing : Dev Screw).

308
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Quenching Lamp (L1)

If an inner 1 bin tray is attached to the D0B4, remove it.

1. Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit)


2. Remove the left cover. (Left Cover)
3. Remove the paper exit tray. (Paper Exit Tray)
4. Remove the duct [A].

5. Remove the quenching lamp (L1) [A].

309
4.Replacement and Adjustment

After Replacement or Adjustment

• Do the following procedure after replacing or adjusting any of the PCDU components. This
procedure is not necessary when the entire PCDU is replaced with a new one.
1. Take 5 sample copies.
2. If black dots (dropped toner) show on any of the copies, continue as follows. If all copies are clean,
the following steps do not need to be performed.
3. Remove the PCDU from the main machine.
4. Tap on top of the PCDU with a screwdriver at eight evenly spaced locations (two or three taps at
each spot), to knock the recycled toner down into the development section.
5. Put the PCDU back into the main machine.
6. Turn the main power on. Then open and close the door and wait for the machine to rotate the
development roller for 10 seconds. Then open and close the door two more times, so that total
rotation time is 30 seconds.
7. Make some sky-shot copies (or solid black prints).
• If using A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper, make 4 copies/prints.
• If using A3 or 11" x 17" paper, make 2 copies/prints.

• Step 7 is necessary only after replacing or adjusting any components. There is no need
to make sky-shot (or solid black) copies after replacing the developer.

310
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Toner Supply Motor (M5)

• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
• To prevent ignition, the output check of the toner supply motor stops 3 seconds after it has
been turned on.

If an inner 1 bin tray is attached to the D0B4, remove it.

1. Remove the inner cover. (Inner Cover)


2. Remove the left cover. (Left Cover)
3. Remove the paper exit tray. (Paper Exit Tray)
4. Remove the fan duct [A].

5. Remove the toner supply motor (M5) [A].

311
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Fusing

• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedures.

Fusing Unit

• The fusing unit becomes very hot during use. After turning off the machine, wait at least
30 minutes before handling it.
1. Turn off the main power switch, and unplug the machine.
2. Do the following steps:

D0B2,D0B3

1. Remove the front right cover. (Front Right Cover (D0B2,D0B3))

D0B4

1. Remove the front upper cover. (Front Upper Cover (D0B4))


3. Remove the right rear cover. (Right Rear Cover)
4. Open the right door.
5. Remove the cable cover. [A]

312
4.Replacement and Adjustment

6. Remove the fusing unit [A].

When replacing the fusing unit, install the clamp so that it is located between the binds of the
harness [A].

313
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Fusing Entrance Guide Plate

1. Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit)


2. Do the following steps:
1. Pull up the pressure arms [A].
2. Separate the pressure roller section [B] from the hot roller section.

314
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the fusing entrance guide plate [A].

Fusing Exit Guide Plate

1. Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit)


2. Remove the fusing exit guide plate [A].

Thermistor (H1) (H2)

1. Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit)


2. Do the following steps:
1. Remove the thermistor harness [A].
2. Remove the thermistors (H1) (H2) [B].

315
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Fusing Lamp

1. Remove the pressure roller section. (Fusing Entrance Guide Plate)


2. Remove the rear holding plate [A] and front holding plate [B].

316
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the hot roller unit [A].

4. Pull out the fusing lamp [A] from hot roller unit.

Hot Roller Stripper Pawls

1. Remove the hot roller unit. (Fusing Lamp)

317
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the hot roller stripper pawls [A].

Hot Roller and Hot Roller Bearings

1. Remove the hot roller unit. (Fusing Lamp)


2. Remove the hot roller [A] and hot roller bearings [B].

3. Reassemble the machine.


4. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine.
5. Execute SP7-622-119 (PM Counter Reset Fusing Roll Bear).

Thermostat (S4)

1. Remove the hot roller unit. (Fusing Lamp)

318
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the thermostat (S4) [A].

Pressure Roller and Bushings

1. Remove the fusing entrance guide plate. (Fusing Entrance Guide Plate)
2. Do the following steps:
1. Remove the two pressure arms [A].
2. Remove the two bushings [B].

319
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the pressure roller [C].

NIP Band Width Adjustment

Do this adjustment when the fusing unit is at its operating temperature. The size of the OHP sheet must
be A4/LT LEF. Any other sizes may cause a paper jam.

320
4.Replacement and Adjustment

• [A] Pressure roller


• [B] Hot roller
• [C] Spring hook
• [D] Spring
1. Place an OHP sheet on the bypass feed table.
2. Enter SP mode, and run SP 1-152-001 (Fusing Nip Check).
3. Press ‘1’ (Yes), or “Execute”.
4. Press twice. The machine feeds the OHP sheet into the bypass feed, stops it at the registration
roller for 300 seconds, then 20 seconds in the fusing unit.
5. Check that the OHP sheet is ejected to the copy tray.
6. Press the key.
7. Quit the SP mode.
8. Check that the nip band (the opaque stripe) across the ejected OHP sheet is symmetrical, with
both ends slightly thicker than the center.

• There is no standard value for the nip band on this machine. Make the adjustment based
on the band's appearance.
9. If the band is not as described above, change the position of the spring hooks [C] (one on each
side), and then check the band again.

• The higher hook position produces greater tension.

Contact/Release Solenoid (SOL1)

1. Remove the gear cover. (Paper Exit Clutch (CL1) , Reverse Clutch (CL7))

321
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the contact/release solenoid (SOL1) [A].

322
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Paper Exit Section

• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.

Paper Exit Sensor (S5)

1. Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit)


2. Remove the paper exit guide [A].

323
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the paper exit sensor (S5) [A].

324
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Paper Feed Section

• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.

Friction Roller

1. Remove the paper tray 1 (Paper Tray 1)


2. Remove the friction roller [A].

Paper Feed Roller / Pickup roller

1. Remove the paper tray 1 (Paper Tray 1)


2. Remove the paper feed roller [A].

325
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the pickup roller [B].

Tray Lift Unit

1. Remove the paper tray 1. (Paper Tray 1)


2. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3))
3. Remove the high-voltage power supply board (PCB3) [A].

326
4.Replacement and Adjustment

4. Remove the bracket [B].

327
4.Replacement and Adjustment

5. Remove the tray lift unit [A].

Tray Lift Motor (M4)

1. Remove the tray lift unit. (Tray Lift Unit)


2. Remove the bracket [A].

328
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the bracket [A].

4. Remove the tray lift motor (M4) [A].

Paper Size Switch (SW4)

1. Remove the paper tray 1. (Paper Tray 1)


2. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3),Rear Cover (D0B4))

329
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the mylar [A].

330
4.Replacement and Adjustment

4. Remove the paper size switch (SW4) [A].

Registration Roller

Driven Side

1. Remove the PCDU. (PCDU)


2. Remove the inner cover. (Inner Cover)
3. Remove the rear cover. (Right Rear Cover)
4. Remove the registration clutch (CL3). (Registration Clutch (CL3))
5. Remove the feed roller cover [A].

331
4.Replacement and Adjustment

6. Remove the registration roller [B].

Drive Side

1. Remove the ID sensor cover. (Transfer Roller)

332
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the cap, gear, and bushing and the registration roller [A].

Registration Sensor (S16)

1. Open the bypass tray [A], and then press the button [B] to open the right door [C].

333
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the feed roller cover [A].

3. Remove the registration sensor (S16) [A].

Paper End Sensor (S12), Upper Limit Sensor (S13)

1. Remove the bypass tray lower section. (Bypass Tray Friction Pad)

334
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the feed roller cover [A].

3. Do the following steps:


1. Remove the upper limit sensor (S13) [A].
2. Remove the paper end sensor (S12) [B].

Bypass Tray

1. Remove the right rear cover. (Right Rear Cover)

335
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Open the bypass tray [A], and then press the button [B] to open the right door [C].

3. Remove the bypass tray [A].

Bypass Paper Feed Roller

1. Remove the bypass tray. (Bypass Tray)


2. Remove the bypass paper feed clutch. (Bypass Paper Feed Clutch (CL5))

336
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the bypass tray upper section [A].

337
4.Replacement and Adjustment

4. Remove the bypass paper feed roller unit [A].

5. Remove the bypass paper feed roller [A].

Bypass Tray Friction Pad

1. Remove the bypass paper feed roller unit. (Bypass Paper Feed Roller)

338
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the bypass tray lower section [A].

3. Remove the bypass tray friction pad [A].

Bypass Paper End Sensor (S9)

1. Remove the bypass paper lower section. (Bypass Tray Friction Pad)

339
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the bypass paper end sensor (S9) [A].

Bypass Width Sensor (S10), Bypass Length Sensor (S11)

1. Remove the bypass tray. (Bypass Tray)


2. Remove the cover [A].

3. Remove the bypass Length Sensor (S11) [A].

340
4.Replacement and Adjustment

4. Remove the bypass Width Sensor (S10) [B].

341
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Duplex Unit

• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.

Transfer Roller

1. Remove the transfer roller [A].

Duplex Guide Plate

1. Remove the right rear cover. (Right Rear Cover)


2. Open the bypass tray [A], and then press the button [B] to open the right door [C].

3. Do the following steps:


1. Remove the duplex unit bracket [A].
342
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Open the transfer roller unit [B].

4. Remove the duplex guide plate [A].

Transfer Guide Unit

1. Remove the right rear cover. (Right Rear Cover)

343
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Open the bypass tray [A], and then press the button [B] to open the right door [C].

3. Do the following steps:


1. Remove the duplex unit bracket [A].
2. Slide the right door hinge shaft [B].
3. Remove the transfer guide unit [C].

ID Sensor (S6)

Before Replacing the ID Sensor (S6)

You must take note of the original value of SP2-933-001 to prepare for the possibility that the process

344
4.Replacement and Adjustment

control after replacement will not be done properly.


A QR-code is pasted on the sensor head of an ID sensor, which includes the characteristic value for the
sensor. This characteristic value must be input into SP2-933-001 before replacing the ID sensor.
1. Take a note of the characteristic value on the new ID sensor (surrounded by a red dashed line in
the following photo).

2. Turn the main power ON and enter SP mode.


3. Input the characteristic value into SP2-933-001.

Replacement Procedure

1. Remove the right rear cover.(Right Rear Cover)


2. Open the bypass tray [A], and then press the button [B] to open the right door [C].

3. Do the following steps:


1. Remove the duplex unit bracket [A].
2. Remove the ID sensor cover [B].
3. Remove the sensor connector. [C]

345
4.Replacement and Adjustment

4. Open the transfer guide unit [D].

4. Remove the ID sensor harness cover [A].

346
4.Replacement and Adjustment

5. Remove the duplex guide plate [A].

6. Remove the ID sensor harness [A].

7. Close the transfer guide unit.

347
4.Replacement and Adjustment

8. Remove the ID sensor (S6) [A].

9. Execute SP2-935-001 (ID.Sens Initializ).

Relay Roller (driven)

1. Open the bypass tray [A], and then press the button [B] to open the right door [C].

348
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the relay roller (driven) [A].

349
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Electrical Components

• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.

MPU (PCB7) (D0B2,D0B3)

• Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your body before handling
SD cards, circuit boards, EEPROM or memory boards.
1. Remove the rear cover (Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3))
2. Remove the EEPROM [A] from the old MPU.

Keep the EEPROM away from objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity can
damage EEPROM data.
Install the EEPROM from the old MPU on the new MPU before replacing. The EEPROM contains
the SP settings.

3. Remove all connectors from the old MPU.


4. Remove the MPU [A].

5. Install the new MPU.

350
4.Replacement and Adjustment

MPU (PCB7) (D0B4)

• Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your body before handling
SD cards, circuit boards, EEPROM or memory boards.
1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover (D0B4))
2. Remove the braket [A].

3. Remove all connectors from the old MPU.


4. Remove the old MPU [A].

351
4.Replacement and Adjustment

5. Remove the EEPROM [A], NVRAM [B] from the old MPU, and then install them on the new MPU.

Keep the NVRAM and EEPROM away from objects that can cause static electricity.
Static electricity can damage NVRAM and EEPROM data.
Install the NVRAM and EEPROM so the indentation on the NVRAM and EEPROM faces the
indentation marks on the MPU.
If they are not installed correctly, the MPU may be damaged.

352
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Install the NVRAM and EEPROM from the old MPU on the new MPU before replacing.
The NVRAM and EEPROM contain the SP settings.
If a message tells that you need an SD card to restore settings after the NVRAM replacement,
create an “SD card for restoration".
6. Install the new MPU.

If a message tells that you need an SD card to restore settings after the NVRAM replacement,
create an “SD card for restoration". (Restoring the Encryption Key)
If the [Check Status] indicator is lit in red after the power is turned on, press the [Check Status]
button and check the status of the equipment.
Note that if the [Check Status] button does not respond, applications (copy, scan, printer, fax etc.)
can be started from the control panel.

353
4.Replacement and Adjustment

If an SC such as SC890-01 etc. is displayed, refer to trouble shooting.

EEPROM (D0B2,D0B3)

• The following procedure explains how to replace a defective EEPROM. For how to transfer an
existing (not defective) EEPROM to a new MPU (PCB7), refer to the "MPU (PCB7)
(D0B2,D0B3)" replacement procedures.
When replacing an old EEPROM with a new EEPROM, EEPROM setting is required. Follow the
EEPROM setting procedure described below.

EEPROM on the MPU

1. Plug in, and turn on the main power switch.


2. Print the SMC reports (SMC Page Printing).

When the EEPROM is cleared, the data shown in the table below is reset to the factory settings
(Factory Default). Be sure to output the SMC reports before replacing the EEPROM.
3. Find any values that differ from the values in the default SMC reports (Factory Default) stored
inside the front door.
4. Turn off the main power switch and unplug the power cord.
5. Replace the EEPROM on the MPU (PCB7) and reassemble the machine.
6. Plug in, and then turn on the main power switch.
7. Change the values that differ as found in step 3 back to the values in the SMC reports output in
step 3.
8. Print the SMC reports (SMC Page Printing).
9. Confirm that the changed values have been set.
List of Items That Are Reset to Factory Settings (Factory Default) When EEPROM Is Cleared:
SP No. SP Name Action
SP1-801- Motor Speed Main Motor: 122 Return to the value of SMC report
001 Adjust output in step 2
SP1-002- Main Registration Tray Bank1 Return to the value of SMC report
004 output in step 2
SP1-002- Main Registration Tray Bank2 Return to the value of SMC report
005 output in step 2
SP1-003- Paper Buckle Bank1: Plain Return to the value of SMC report
005 output in step 2
SP1-003- Paper Buckle Bank1: Return to the value of SMC report
006 MiddleThick output in step 2
SP1-003- Paper Buckle Bank1: Thick Return to the value of SMC report
007 output in step 2
354
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


SP1-003- Paper Buckle Bank2: Plain Return to the value of SMC report
008 output in step 2
SP1-003- Paper Buckle Bank2: Return to the value of SMC report
009 MiddleThick output in step 2
SP1-003- Paper Buckle Bank2: Thick Return to the value of SMC report
010 output in step 2
SP2-224- Toner Near End Counter Return to the value of SMC report
001 output in step 2
SP4-008- Sub Scan Mag. - Return to the value of SMC report
001 Adj output in step 2
SP4-010- L-Edge Regist Adj - Return to the value of SMC report
001 output in step 2
SP4-011- S-to-S Regist Adj - Return to the value of SMC report
001 output in step 2
SP4-400- Erase Margin ADF: Trail Edge L Return to the value of SMC report
005 output in step 2
SP4-400- Erase Margin ADF: Trail Edge R Return to the value of SMC report
006 output in step 2
SP4-400- Erase Margin ADF: Left Return to the value of SMC report
007 output in step 2
SP4-400- Erase Margin ADF: Right Return to the value of SMC report
008 output in step 2
SP4-609- Gray Balance Set: Book Scan Return to the value of SMC report
001 R output in step 2
SP4-609- Gray Balance Set: DF Scan Return to the value of SMC report
002 R output in step 2
SP4-610- Gray Balance Set: Book Scan Return to the value of SMC report
001 G output in step 2
SP4-610- Gray Balance Set: DF Scan Return to the value of SMC report
002 G output in step 2
SP4-611- Gray Balance Set: Book Scan Return to the value of SMC report
001 B output in step 2
SP4-611- Gray Balance Set: DF Scan Return to the value of SMC report
002 B output in step 2
SP4-673- Black Level Adj: FactSet: Offset Return to the value of SMC report
001 FC DAC output in step 2
SP4-673- Black Level Adj: FactSet: RLC DAC Return to the value of SMC report

355
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


002 FC output in step 2
SP4-674- Black Level Adj: FactSet: Offset Return to the value of SMC report
001 BW DAC output in step 2
SP4-674- Black Level Adj: FactSet: RLC DAC Return to the value of SMC report
002 BW output in step 2
SP4-674- Black Level Adj: FactSet: Offset Return to the value of SMC report
003 BW DAC output in step 2
SP4-674- Black Level Adj: FactSet: RLC DAC Return to the value of SMC report
004 BW output in step 2
SP4-803- Home Position Adj - Return to the value of SMC report
001 output in step 2
SP5-126- Set F-size Doc - Return to the value of SMC report
001 output in step 2
SP5-131- Paper Size Type - Return to the value of SMC report
001 output in step 2
SP5-135- LG_Oficio Change - Return to the value of SMC report
001 output in step 2
SP5-181- Clutch Adjust Bank1 Return to the value of SMC report
002 output in step 2
SP5-181- Clutch Adjust Bank2 Return to the value of SMC report
003 output in step 2
SP5-182- Next feed timing Bank1 Return to the value of SMC report
002 output in step 2
SP5-182- Next feed timing Bank2 Return to the value of SMC report
003 output in step 2
SP5-183- Refeed timing Bank1 Return to the value of SMC report
002 output in step 2
SP5-183- Refeed timing Bank2 Return to the value of SMC report
003 output in step 2
SP6-006- ADF Adjustment Side Edge: Front Return to the value of SMC report
001 output in step 2
SP6-006- ADF Adjustment Side Edge: Rear Return to the value of SMC report
002 output in step 2
SP6-006- ADF Adjustment LeadingEdge: Return to the value of SMC report
003 Front output in step 2
SP6-006- ADF Adjustment Leading Edge: Return to the value of SMC report
004 Rear output in step 2

356
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


SP6-016- Size Detect Set NA-1 Return to the value of SMC report
001 output in step 2
SP6-016- Size Detect Set NA-2 Return to the value of SMC report
002 output in step 2
SP6-016- Size Detect Set EU-1 Return to the value of SMC report
003 output in step 2
SP6-016- Size Detect Set EU-2 Return to the value of SMC report
004 output in step 2
SP6-017- ADF Adjust Mag - Return to the value of SMC report
001 output in step 2
SP6-018- ADF Adjustment Scanner HP adj Return to the value of SMC report
001 output in step 2
SP6-020- ADF Job Counter - Return to the value of SMC report
001 output in step 2
SP6-030- ADF Job Cnt - Return to the value of SMC report
001 Clear output in step 2

NVRAM,EEPROM (D0B4)

EEPROM, NVRAM on the MPU

There are EEPROM [A] and NVRAM [B] on the MPU.

357
4.Replacement and Adjustment

EEPROM Replacement

1. Make sure you have the SMC Report (factory settings).


2. Print out the SMC Report (all data) with SP5-990-001.
3. Turn the main power OFF.
4. Install an SD card into SD Card Slot (lower slot).
5. Turn the main power ON.
6. Copy the EEPROM data to an SD card with SP5-824-001.
7. Turn the main power OFF. Disconnect the power cord.
8. Replace the EEPROM on the MPU and reassemble the machine. (MPU (PCB7) (D0B4))
9. Connect the power cord. Then turn the main power ON.

When you do this, SC995 will be displayed. However, DO NOT turn off the main power. Continue

358
4.Replacement and Adjustment

with this procedure.


10. Enter the MPU serial number and area code.

• For information on how to configure this SP, contact the supervisor in your branch office.
• Refer to the following area code/destination list.
3: Europe
4: Taiwan
5: Asia
6: China
11. Power cycle the machine.

If the SCB serial number is not entered correctly, SC995-01 (serial number entry error) will occur.
12. Copy the data from the SD card to the new EEPROM with SP5-825-001.
13. Turn the main power OFF.
14. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot (lower slot).
15. Turn the main power ON.
16. Check the factory settings sheet from step 1 and the SMC data printout from step 2, and then set
the user tool and SP settings so they are the same as before.
List of Items That Are Reset to Factory Settings (Factory Default) When EEPROM Is Cleared:
SP No. SP Name Action
SP1- Leading Edge Tray: Plain Return to the value
001-002 Registration of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Leading Edge Tray: Mid Thick Return to the value
001-003 Registration of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Leading Edge Tray: Thick Return to the value
001-004 Registration of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Leading Edge Bypass: Plain Return to the value
001-007 Registration of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Leading Edge Bypass: Mid Thick Return to the value
001-008 Registration of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Leading Edge Bypass: Thick Return to the value
001-009 Registration of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Leading Edge Duplex: Plain Return to the value
359
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


001-013 Registration of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Leading Edge Duplex: Mid Thick Return to the value
001-014 Registration of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Leading Edge Duplex: Thick Return to the value
001-015 Registration of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Side-to-Side Bypass Return to the value
002-001 Registration of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Side-to-Side Tray Main1 Return to the value
002-002 Registration of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Side-to-Side Tray Bank1 Return to the value
002-004 Registration of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Side-to-Side Tray Bank2 Return to the value
002-005 Registration of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Side-to-Side Duplex Return to the value
002-006 Registration of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Tray1: Plain Return to the value
003-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Tray1: Mid Thick Return to the value
003-003 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Tray1: Thick Return to the value
003-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Bank1: Plain Return to the value
003-005 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Bank1:Mid Thick Return to the value
003-006 of SMC report output in

360
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Bank1: Thick Return to the value
003-007 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Bank2: Plain Return to the value
003-008 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Bank2:Mid Thick Return to the value
003-009 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Bank2: Thick Return to the value
003-010 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Bypass: Plain Return to the value
003-012 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Bypass: Mid Thick Return to the value
003-013 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Bypass: Thick Return to the value
003-014 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Duplex: Plain Return to the value
003-018 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Duplex: Mid Thick Return to the value
003-019 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Duplex: Thick Return to the value
003-020 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- ByPass Size Adj. 0:LTSEF 1:LG Return to the value
007-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Motor Speed Adjust mainmotor:122 Return to the value
801-001 of SMC report output in
step 2

361
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. PaperExitCL Stop Pos. Return to the value
907-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. PaperExitCL Start Pos. Return to the value
907-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Dup:PaperExitCL Stop Pos. Return to the value
907-003 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Dup:ReverseCL Start Time Return to the value
907-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Duplex Feed Pos. Return to the value
907-005 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Duplex Wait Pos. Return to the value
907-006 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Paper Feed CL:OFF Return to the value
907-007 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Relay CL:OFF Return to the value
907-008 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Paper Feed Start Return to the value
907-009 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Relay CL:ON Return to the value
907-010 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Registration CL:OFF Return to the value
907-011 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Bypass Paper Feed CL:OFF Return to the value
907-013 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Bypass FD Space Return to the value

362
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


907-014 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- FeedRetryCount Bypass Tray Return to the value
909-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- FeedRetryCount Tray1 Return to the value
909-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Bypass Envelope Bypass Envelope Return to the value
911-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Fan Drive Time Fan Extra Time Return to the value
950-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Fan Drive Time Fan Cooling Time Set Return to the value
950-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Fan Drive Time Fan Start Time Set Return to the value
950-003 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Print Fan Ctrl Fan Ctrl SW Temp. Return to the value
951-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Print Fan Ctrl Fan Ctrl SW Thres Return to the value
951-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Silent Fan Ctrl Fan Ctrl SW Temp. Return to the value
952-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Extra Fan Ctrl Extra Drive State Return to the value
953-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Extra Fan Ctrl Extra Start Temp. Return to the value
953-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Extra Fan Ctrl Extra Threshold Return to the value
953-003 of SMC report output in

363
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


step 2
SP1- Extra Fan Ctrl Extra ON/OFF Return to the value
953-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Fan Ctrl Timing Judgement Time Interval Return to the value
954-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Standby Fan Ctrl Cooling Ctrl SW Temp. Return to the value
955-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Standby Fan Ctrl Cooling Ctrl SW Thres Return to the value
955-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP2- Main Scan Mag. - Return to the value
102-001 Adjustment of SMC report output in
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Lead Edge Width Return to the value
103-001 Adjustment of SMC report output in
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Trail. Edge Width Return to the value
103-002 Adjustment of SMC report output in
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Left Return to the value
103-003 Adjustment of SMC report output in
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Right Return to the value
103-004 Adjustment of SMC report output in
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. L Size Return to the value
103-006 Adjustment of SMC report output in
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. M Size Return to the value
103-007 Adjustment of SMC report output in
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. S Size Return to the value
103-008 Adjustment of SMC report output in
step 2

364
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


SP2- Erase Margin Duplex Left Edge Return to the value
103-009 Adjustment of SMC report output in
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Duplex Right Edge Return to the value
103-010 Adjustment of SMC report output in
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. L Size:Thick Return to the value
103-011 Adjustment of SMC report output in
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. M Size:Thick Return to the value
103-012 Adjustment of SMC report output in
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. S Size:Thick Return to the value
103-013 Adjustment of SMC report output in
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Duplex Left Edge:Thick Return to the value
103-014 Adjustment of SMC report output in
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Duplex Right Edge:Thick Return to the value
103-015 Adjustment of SMC report output in
step 2
SP2- Toner Near End Counter Return to the value
224-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Sub Scan - Return to the value
008-001 Magnification Adj of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Sub Scan - Return to the value
010-001 Registration Adj of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Main Scan Reg - Return to the value
011-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Set Scale Mask Book:Sub LEdge Return to the value
012-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Set Scale Mask Book:Sub TEdge Return to the value

365
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


012-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Set Scale Mask Book:Main:LEdge Return to the value
012-003 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Set Scale Mask Book:Main:TEdge Return to the value
012-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Set Scale Mask ADF: Leading Edge Return to the value
012-005 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Set Scale Mask ADF: Right Return to the value
012-007 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Set Scale Mask ADF: left Return to the value
012-008 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Dust Check Dust Detect:On/Off Return to the value
020-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Dust Check Dust Detect:Lvl Return to the value
020-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Min Size for APS - Return to the value
303-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- 8K/16K Detection - Return to the value
305-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Scan Size Detection Detection ON/OFF Return to the value
308-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Intermittent Shading : ON/OFF/Shadingless: Select Return to the value
350-001 BW of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Intermittent Shading : Interval 1 Return to the value
350-002 BW of SMC report output in

366
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


step 2
SP4- Intermittent Shading : Interval 1 Repetitions Return to the value
350-003 BW of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Intermittent Shading : Interval 2 Return to the value
350-004 BW of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Intermittent Shading : ON/OFF/Shadingless: Select Return to the value
351-001 FC of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Intermittent Shading : Interval 1 Return to the value
351-002 FC of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Intermittent Shading : Interval 1 Repetitions Return to the value
351-003 FC of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Intermittent Shading : Interval 2 Return to the value
351-004 FC of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Org Edge Mask Book:Sub:LEdge(Left) Return to the value
400-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Org Edge Mask Book:Sub:TEdge(Right) Return to the value
400-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Org Edge Mask Book:Main:LEdge(Rear) Return to the value
400-003 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Org Edge Mask Book:Main:Tedge(Front) Return to the value
400-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Org Edge Mask ADF: Leading Edge Return to the value
400-005 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Org Edge Mask ADF: Right Return to the value
400-007 of SMC report output in
step 2

367
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


SP4- Org Edge Mask ADF: leftt Return to the value
400-008 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Digital AE Low Limit Value Return to the value
460-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Digital AE Background level Return to the value
460-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:Txt Brightness: 1-255 Return to the value
551-007 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:Txt Contrast: 1-255 Return to the value
551-008 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:Txt/Photo Brightness: 1-255 Return to the value
553-007 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:Txt/Photo Contrast: 1-255 Return to the value
553-008 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:Photo Brightness: 1-255 Return to the value
554-007 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:Photo Contrast: 1-255 Return to the value
554-008 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:GrayScale Brightness: 1-255 Return to the value
565-007 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:GrayScale Contrast: 1-255 Return to the value
565-008 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:Col Brightness: 1-255 Return to the value
570-007 Txt/Photo of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:Col Contrast: 1-255 Return to the value

368
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


570-008 Txt/Photo of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:Col Gloss Brightness: 1-255 Return to the value
571-007 Photo of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:Col Gloss Contrast: 1-255 Return to the value
571-008 Photo of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Fax Apli:Txt Brightness: 1-255 Return to the value
581-007 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Fax Apli:Txt Contrast: 1-255 Return to the value
581-008 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Fax Apli:Txt/Photo Brightness: 1-255 Return to the value
582-007 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Fax Apli:Txt/Photo Contrast: 1-255 Return to the value
582-008 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Fax Apli:Photo Brightness: 1-255 Return to the value
583-007 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Fax Apli:Photo Contrast: 1-255 Return to the value
583-008 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Gray Balance Set: R Book Scan Return to the value
609-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Gray Balance Set: R DF Scan Return to the value
609-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Gray Balance Set: G Book Scan Return to the value
610-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Gray Balance Set: G DF Scan Return to the value
610-002 of SMC report output in

369
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


step 2
SP4- Gray Balance Set: B Book Scan Return to the value
611-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Gray Balance Set: B DF Scan Return to the value
611-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Analog Gain Adjust Factory Setting: R Return to the value
677-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Analog Gain Adjust Factory Setting: G Return to the value
678-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Analog Gain Adjust Factory Setting: B Return to the value
679-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Digital Gain Adjust Factory Setting: R Return to the value
680-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Digital Gain Adjust Factory Setting: G Return to the value
681-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Digital Gain Adjust Factory Setting: B Return to the value
682-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- DF Density - Return to the value
688-001 Adjustment of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Factory Setting Input On/Off Return to the value
698-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Home Position Adj - Return to the value
803-001 Value of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- PWM Factory Setting Return to the value
850-002 of SMC report output in
step 2

370
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


SP4- LED White Level Factory Setting: RE Return to the value
852-001 Peak Read of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- LED White Level Factory Setting: RO Return to the value
852-002 Peak Read of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- LED White Level Factory Setting: GE Return to the value
852-003 Peak Read of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- LED White Level Factory Setting: GO Return to the value
852-004 Peak Read of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- LED White Level Factory Setting: BE Return to the value
852-005 Peak Read of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- LED White Level Factory Setting: BO Return to the value
852-006 Peak Read of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Distortion Correction FB mode R: Distortion Amount at Return to the value
872-001 Position:0 of SMC report output in
- - step 2
SP4- FB mode R: Distortion Amount at
872-036 Position:35
SP4- Distortion Correction FB mode G: Distortion Amount Return to the value
873-001 at Position:0 of SMC report output in
- - step 2
SP4- FB mode G: Distortion Amount
873-036 at Position:35
SP4- Distortion Correction FB mode B: Distortion Amount at Return to the value
874-001 Position:0 of SMC report output in
- - step 2
SP4- FB mode B: Distortion Amount at
874-036 Position:35
SP4- Man Gamma:P ColK Offset:Highlight Return to the value
909-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:P ColK Offset:Middle Return to the value
909-002 of SMC report output in
371
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:P ColK Offset:Shadow Return to the value
909-003 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:P ColK Offset:IDmax Return to the value
909-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:P ColK Option:Highlight Return to the value
909-005 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:P ColK Option:Middle Return to the value
909-006 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:P ColK Option:Shadow Return to the value
909-007 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:P ColK Option:IDmax Return to the value
909-008 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:T:ColK Offset:Highlight Return to the value
914-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:T:ColK Offset:Middle Return to the value
914-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:T:ColK Offset:Shadow Return to the value
914-003 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:T:ColK Offset:IDmax Return to the value
914-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:T:ColK Option:Highlight Return to the value
914-005 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:T:ColK Option:Middle Return to the value
914-006 of SMC report output in
step 2

372
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


SP4- Man Gamma:T:ColK Option:Shadow Return to the value
914-007 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:T:ColK Option:IDmax Return to the value
914-008 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma Adj - Return to the value
918-009 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- High Light Correction Sensitivity Selection Return to the value
993-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- High Light Correction Range Selection Return to the value
993-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP5- Set F-size Document - Return to the value
126-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP5- Copy Data Security 0: OFF/1: ON Return to the value
178-001 Setting of SMC report output in
step 2
SP5- Tray Size Adjust Tray1:1 Return to the value
180-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP5- Tray Size Adjust Tray1:2 Return to the value
180-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP5- Tray Size Adjust Tray1:3 Return to the value
180-003 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP5- Tray Size Adjust Tray1:4 Return to the value
180-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP5- PaperFD Clutch Bank1 Return to the value
181-002 Adjust of SMC report output in
step 2
SP5- PaperFD Clutch Bank2 Return to the value

373
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


181-003 Adjust of SMC report output in
step 2
SP5- Next feed timing Bank1 Return to the value
182-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP5- Next feed timing Bank2 Return to the value
182-003 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP5- Re-feed timing Bank1 Return to the value
183-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP5- Re-feed timing Bank2 Return to the value
183-003 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP5- Machine State Destination Return to the value
996-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP6- ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Front Return to the value
006-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP6- ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Rear Return to the value
006-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP6- ADF Adjustment Leading Edge Registration: Return to the value
006-003 Front of SMC report output in
step 2
SP6- ADF Adjustment Leading Edge Registration: Rear Return to the value
006-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP6- ADF Adjustment Buckle: Duplex Front Return to the value
006-005 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP6- ADF Adjustment Buckle: Duplex Rear Return to the value
006-006 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP6- ADF Adjustment Rear Edge Erase Front Return to the value
006-007 of SMC report output in

374
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


step 2
SP6- ADF Adjustment Rear Edge Erase Rear Return to the value
006-008 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP6- Stamp Position Adj. - Return to the value
010-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP6- Original Size Detect - Return to the value
016-001 Setting of SMC report output in
step 2
SP6- DF Magnification Adj. - Return to the value
017-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP6- ADF Operation - Return to the value
901-001 Setting of SMC report output in
step 2
SP6- ADF Operation Stack Mode Return to the value
901-002 Setting of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Star50WaitHeat1 DutyStep Return to the value
801-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Star50WaitHeat1 LastDuty Return to the value
801-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Start50WaitHeat2 LastDuty Return to the value
802-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Start50JobHeat1 LastDuty Return to the value
803-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Start50JobHeat2 LastDuty Return to the value
804-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop50WaitHeat1 First Duty Return to the value
805-001 of SMC report output in
step 2

375
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


SP9- Stop50WaitHeat1 DutyStep Return to the value
805-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop50WaitHeat1 RepeatCount Return to the value
805-003 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop50WaitHeat1 LastDuty Return to the value
805-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop50WaitHeat2 First Duty Return to the value
806-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop50WaitHeat2 DutyStep Return to the value
806-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop50WaitHeat2 RepeatCount Return to the value
806-003 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop50WaitHeat2 LastDuty Return to the value
806-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop50JobHeat1 First Duty Return to the value
807-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop50JobHeat1 DutyStep Return to the value
807-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop50JobHeat1 RepeatCount Return to the value
807-003 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop50JobHeat1 LastDuty Return to the value
807-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop50JobHeat2 First Duty Return to the value
808-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop50JobHeat2 DutyStep Return to the value

376
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


808-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop50JobHeat2 RepeatCount Return to the value
808-003 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop50JobHeat2 LastDuty Return to the value
808-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Start60WaitHeat1 DutyStep Return to the value
811-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Start60WaitHeat1 LastDuty Return to the value
811-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Start60WaitHeat2 DutyStep Return to the value
812-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Start60WaitHeat2 LastDuty Return to the value
812-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Start60JobHeat1 LastDuty Return to the value
813-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Start60JobHeat2 LastDuty Return to the value
814-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop60WaitHeat1 First Duty Return to the value
815-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop60WaitHeat1 DutyStep Return to the value
815-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop60WaitHeat1 RepeatCount Return to the value
815-003 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop60WaitHeat1 LastDuty Return to the value
815-004 of SMC report output in

377
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


step 2
SP9- Stop60WaitHeat2 First Duty Return to the value
816-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop60WaitHeat2 DutyStep Return to the value
816-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop60WaitHeat2 RepeatCount Return to the value
816-003 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop60WaitHeat2 LastDuty Return to the value
816-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop60JobHeat1 First Duty Return to the value
817-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop60JobHeat1 DutyStep Return to the value
817-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop60JobHeat1 RepeatCount Return to the value
817-003 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop60JobHeat1 LastDuty Return to the value
817-004 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop60JobHeat2 First Duty Return to the value
818-001 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop60JobHeat2 DutyStep Return to the value
818-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop60JobHeat2 RepeatCount Return to the value
818-003 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP9- Stop60JobHeat2 LastDuty Return to the value
818-004 of SMC report output in
step 2

378
4.Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. SP Name Action


SP9- frequency frequency Return to the value
820-001 of SMC report output in
step 2

NVRAM Replacement

1. Make sure you have the SMC Report (factory settings).


2. Print out the SMC report (all data) with SP5-990-001.
3. Turn the main power OFF.
4. Install an SD card into SD Card Slot (lower slot).
5. Turn the main power ON.
6. Copy the NVRAM data to an SD card with SP5-824-001
7. Make sure the customer has a backup of their address book data. If they do not, do the following
procedure to create a backup.
1. Insert an SD card into SD slot, and then turn the main power ON.
2. Save the address book data in the SD card using SP5-846-051.

• The address data stored in the machine will be discarded later during this procedure. So
be sure to obtain a backup of the customer’s address book data.
• Note that the counters for the user will be reset when doing the backup/restore of the
address book data.
• If they have a backup of the address book data, use their own backup data for restoration.
There is a risk that the data cannot be backed up properly depending on the NVRAM
condition.
8. Do the following steps if the machine has the fax unit. If not, skip this step.
1. Print the Box List by with the User Tools/Counter.
• [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [General Settings] - [Box Setting: Print List]
2. Print the Special Sender List by pressing these buttons in the following order.
• [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception Settings] - [Program Special
Sender: Print List]
3. Write down the following fax settings.
• [Receiver] in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception Settings] -
[Reception File Settings] - [Forwarding].
• [Notify Destination] in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception Settings] -
[Reception File Settings] - [Store].
• [Specify User] in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception Settings] -
[Stored Reception File User Setting].
• [Notify Destination] in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception Settings] -
[Folder Transfer Result Report].

379
4.Replacement and Adjustment

• Specified folder in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Send Settings] - [Backup


File TX Setting].
• [Receiver] in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception Settings] -
[Reception File Settings] - [Output Mode Switch Timer].
• [Store: Notify Destination] in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception
Settings] - [Output Mode Switch Timer].
• All the destination information is shown on the display.

In the fax settings, address book data is stored with entry IDs, which the system internally
assigns to each data. The entry IDs may be changed due to re-assigning in
backup/restore operations.
4. Make sure that there are no files queued for sending. Ask the customer to send any files
waiting for transmission.

9. Turn the main power OFF. Disconnect the power cord.


10. Remove the SD card containing the NVRAM data from SD Slot.
11. Replace the NVRAM on the MPU and reassemble the machine. (MPU (PCB7) (D0B4))
12. Connect the AC power cord, and then turn the main power ON.

• Do not insert anything into SD Card Slot.


• SC673 appears at start-up, but this is normal because the controller and the smart
operation panel cannot communicate with each other due to changes in the operation
panel SP settings.
13. Change the SP settings for the operation panel.
If you switch the screen to enter the SP mode, SC995-02 is displayed. However, continue the
following steps.
• SP5-748-101: (OpePanel Setting: Op Type Action Setting): Change bit 0 from 0 to 1.
• SP5-748-201: (OpePanel Setting: Cheetah Panel Connect Setting): Change the value from 0
to 1.
14. Change the Flair API SP values.
• SP5-752-001 (Copy FlairAPIFunction Setting): Change bit from 0 to 1.
• SP3-301-001 (FAX:FlairAPI Setting) Change bit from 0 to 1.
15. Power cycle the machine.

• The model information is written on the NVRAM (Novita), so SC995-02 does not occur.
• Program/Change Administrator will be displayed in Japanese, but this is normal.
• If the [Check Status] indicator is lit in red after the power is turned on, press the [Check
Status] button and check the status of the equipment.
Note that if the [Check Status] button does not respond, applications (copy, scan, printer,

380
4.Replacement and Adjustment

fax etc.) can be started from the control panel.


If an SC such as SC890-01 etc. is displayed, refer to trouble shooting.
16. Re-insert the SD card that you removed in Step 10 back into SD Slot.
17. Download the old NVRAM data from the SD card onto the new NVRAM with SP5-825-001
(NVRAM Data Download).

This will take about 2 or 3 minutes.


18. Turn the main power OFF, and then remove the SD card from the SD slot.
19. Turn the main power ON.
The screen "Program/Change Administrator" will be displayed in the language that is the same
language as the time when the data was uploaded to the SD card in Step 6.
20. If the security functions (e.g. Stored file encryption/ Auto Erase Memory Setting) were applied, set
the functions again.
21. Ask the customer to restore their address book or restore the address book data using SP5-846-
052 (UCS Setting: Restore All Addr Book), and then ask the customer to ensure the address book
data has been restored properly.

If you obtained the backup of the customer’s address book data in step 3, delete the backup
immediately after the NVRAM replacement to avoid accidentally removing customer information
from the work site.
22. Output all the SMC data with SP5-990-001 and make sure all the SP/UP settings, except counter
information, are properly restored by checking the factory setting sheet from Step 1 and the SMC
Report from Step 2.

The counters will be reset.


23. Make sure that the “Reception Settings” and “Send Settings” correspond with the notes taken in
Step 8. Correct the settings if they are wrong.
24. Power cycle the machine.

If SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload) and SP5-825-001 (NVRAM Data Download) cannot be
executed for some reason, enter all data on the SMC Report manually.

If the message “SD card for restoration is required.” appears after the NVRAM replacement, restore the
encryption key.

PSU (Power Supply Unit) (PCB1)

1. Remove the inner cover. (Inner Cover)


2. Remove the left cover. (Left Cover)
3. Remove the paper exit tray. (Paper Exit Tray)
381
4.Replacement and Adjustment

4. Remove the fan duct [A].

5. Remove the PSU assembly [A].

Remove the old PSU assembly components from the Main fan (FAN2) [B] and reuse them.

HVPS (High-Voltage Power Supply Board) (PCB3)

1. Remove the rear cover (Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3),Rear Cover (D0B4))


382
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the high-voltage power supply board (PCB3) [A].

Main Motor (M3)

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3),Rear Cover (D0B4))


2. Remove the main motor (M3) [A].

After replacing the main motor (M3), apply grease to the motor shaft gear. (Main Motor)
383
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Main Fan (FAN2)

1. Remove the left cover. (Left Cover)


2. Remove the main fan (FAN2) [A].

Exhaust Fan (FAN1)

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3),Rear Cover (D0B4))

384
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the exhaust fan (FAN1) [A].

Room Temperature Sensor (S14)

1. Remove the inner cover (Inner Cover)


2. Remove the room temperature sensor (S14) [A].

385
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Paper Exit Clutch (CL1) , Reverse Clutch (CL7)

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3),Rear Cover (D0B4))


2. Remove the exhaust fan bracket [A].

3. Remove the reverse clutch (CL7) [A].

386
4.Replacement and Adjustment

4. Remove the gear cover [A].

5. Do the following steps:


1. Remove the gear [A].
2. Remove the timing belt [B].
3. Remove the gear [C].

387
4.Replacement and Adjustment

6. Remove the paper exit clutch (CL1) [A].

Paper Feed Clutch (CL4)

1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3),Rear Cover (D0B4))

388
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the lower gearbox cover [A].

389
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the paper feed clutch (CL4) [A].

Bypass Paper Feed Clutch (CL5)

1. Remove the paper feed clutch (CL4). (Paper Feed Clutch (CL4))
2. Remove the bypass paper feed clutch (CL5) [A].

Duplex Clutch (CL2)

1. Remove the lower gearbox cover. (Paper Feed Clutch (CL4))


2. Remove the main motor (M3). (Main Motor (M3))

390
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the upper gearbox cover [A].

4. Remove the gear [A].

391
4.Replacement and Adjustment

5. Remove the duplex clutch (CL2) [A].

Registration Clutch (CL3)

1. Remove the upper gearbox cover. (Duplex Clutch (CL2))


2. Remove the gear [A].

392
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the gear [A].

4. Remove the registration clutch (CL3) [A].

Relay Clutch (CL6)

1. Remove the upper gearbox cover. (Duplex Clutch (CL2))

393
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Remove the gear [A].

3. Remove the gear [A].

394
4.Replacement and Adjustment

4. Remove the relay clutch (CL6) [A].

Right Door Switch (SW1)

1. Remove the inner cover. (Inner Cover)


2. Remove the right door switch (SW1) [A].

395
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Interlock Switch (SW2)

1. Remove the inner cover. (Inner Cover)


2. Remove the interlock switch (SW2) [A].

Front Door Switch (SW5) (D0B4)

1. Remove the inner cover. (Inner Cover)


2. Remove the front door switch (SW5) [A].

396
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Adjustment after Replacement (D0B2,D0B3)

Printing

• Make sure the paper is loaded properly in each paper tray before starting these adjustments.
• Print the registration page (Test Pattern Printing) to use for these adjustments.

Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side

A: Leading edge registration (3 ± 2 mm)


B: Side-to-side registration (2 ± 1.5 mm)
1. Check the leading edge registration [A] for each paper feed station, and adjust them using SP1-
001.
Tray SP No. Threshold
Tray: Plain SP1-001-002 4.2 ± 1.5 mm
Tray: Mid Thick SP1-001-003
Tray: Thick SP1-001-004
Bypass: Plain SP1-001-007
Bypass: Mid Thick SP1-001-008
Bypass: Thick SP1-001-009
Duplex: Plain SP1-001-013
Duplex: Mid Thick SP1-001-014
Duplex: Thick SP1-001-015
2. Check the side-to-side registration [B] for each paper feed station, and adjust them using SP1-002.
Tray SP No. Threshold
Bypass SP1-002-001 2 ±1.5 mm
Tray Main1 SP1-002-002
Tray Bank1 SP1-002-004
Tray Bank2 SP1-002-005
Duplex SP1-002-006

397
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Main Scan Magnification

• Use an S5S test chart to perform the following adjustments.


1. Check the magnification, and if necessary, adjust it using SP2-102-001 (Main Scn Mag. Adj.). The
specification is ± 0.5%.

Scanning

• Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing registration /
side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment.
• Use an S5S test chart to perform the following adjustments.

Registration: Platen Mode

A: Leading edge registration (L-Edge Regist Adj)


B: Side-to-side registration (S-to-S Regist Adj)
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration, and adjust them using the following SP
modes if necessary.
SP No. SP Name Adjustment Range
SP4-010-001 L-Edge Regist Adj ±2.0 mm
SP4-011-001 S-to-S Regist Adj ±2.0 mm

Magnification

• Use an S5S test chart to do the following adjustment.

398
4.Replacement and Adjustment

A: Sub-scan Magnification
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio and adjust using the following SP mode if necessary.
SP No. SP Name Adjustment Range
SP4-008-001 Sub-scan Mag. Adj ±1.0 %

ADF Image Adjustment

Registration

A: Leading Edge Registration


B: Side-to-side Registration

• Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper.


1. Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the registration, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
SP No. SP Name Adjustment Range
SP6-006-001 SideEdge: Front ±3.0 mm
SP6-006-002 SideEdge: Rear ±3.0 mm
SP6-006-003 LeadingEdge: Front ±5.0 mm
SP6-006-004 LeadingEdge: Rear ±5.0 mm

Sub Scan Magnification

• Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper.


1. Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
SP No. SP Name Adjustment Range
SP6-017-001 ADF Adjust Mag ±5.0 %

399
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Adjustment after Replacement (D0B4)

Image Adjustment After Replacing Parts

Adjustment of the following settings is required after SP5-801 is executed or after the following parts
are replaced:
Parts Implementation items
• Scanner Carriage • Image Position Adjustment
• Laser Unit • Scanning Adjustment
• Scanner Motor (M26)
• Polygon Mirror Motor (M27)
• Paper Feed Unit
• Bypass Unit
• Duplex Unit
• ADF ADF Image Adjustment

Image Position Adjustment

• Before you start adjustment, make sure that the paper in each tray is loaded correctly.
• Use the same paper type and size as those used by customers.
• Use "14:Trimming Area" in SP2-109-001 to print a test pattern, and set SP2-109-001 back to
"0" after you finish adjustment.

Standard

• Leading Edge (A) : 4.2 mm ±1.5mm (plain paper, thin paper)


• Side to Side (B): 0.5mm to 4.0mm
• Trailing Edge (C): 0.5mm to 6.0mm (duplex mode: 3.0 to 6.0mm)

400
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Main/Sub Scan Registration Adjustment

Adjustment Standard
• Leading edge (sub-scan direction): 4.2 ± 1.5 mm
• Side to side (main-scan direction): 2 ± 1 mm
Make sure that the registration is adjusted within the adjustment standard range as shown below.

Leading Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed.
Edge
Side to Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station. Use SP mode (SP1-
Side 002) to adjust the side-to-side registration for the optional paper feed unit, LCT, and
duplex unit.
Adjustment Procedure

• Registration may be changed slightly in each sheet. Print some test pattern "14:Trimming
Area", then average the leading edge and side-to-side registration values, and adjust each SP
mode.
1. Print out the test pattern (14:Trimming Area) with SP2-109-001.
2. Do the leading edge registration [A] adjustment.
1) Check the leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1-001.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper type and process line speed).
3) Input the value. Then press the [#] key.

401
4.Replacement and Adjustment

3. After the leading edge registration adjustment, print out the new test pattern.
4. Do the side-to-side registration [B] adjustment.
1) Check the side-to-side registration and adjust it with SP1-002.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper feed station).
3) Input the value. Then press the [#] key.
4) Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment.

Erase Margin Adjustment

• Adjust the erase margin C and D only if the registration (main scan and sub-scan) cannot be
adjusted within the standard values.
• Do the registration adjustment after adjusting the erase margin C and D, and then adjust the
erase margin A and B.
1. Print out the test pattern (14:Trimming Area) with SP2-109-001.
2. Check the erase margin A and B, and then adjust them with SP2-103-001 to -015 if necessary.

402
4.Replacement and Adjustment

Scanning Adjustment

• Check and perform the image position adjustment before you do the following scanner
adjustments. (Refer to Image Position Adjustment)
• Use a C4 test chart to do the following adjustments.

Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration

1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations.

A: Leading Edge Registration


B: Side-to-side Registration

403
4.Replacement and Adjustment

2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration.


A: 4.2 ± 2mm
B: 2.0 ± 1mm
3. Adjust the following SP modes if necessary.
Name SP mode
Leading edge registration (Home Position Adj Value) SP4-803-001
Side-to-Side Registration (Main Scan Reg) SP4-011-001

Scanner magnification

1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations.

A: Sub-scan magnification
2. Check the magnification ratio.
Standard:
• Normal mode for main-scan: ±0.55% or less
• Normal mode for sub-scan: ±1.00% or less
• Reduction mode for main-scan: ±1.00% or less
• Enlargement mode for main-scan: ±1.00% or less
3. Adjust with SP4-008 if necessary.

Scanner shading correction

1. Turn the power OFF and then ON.


The shading correction is executed automatically when the machine is rebooted.

ADF Image Adjustment

ADF side-to-side, leading edge registration and trailing edge

404
4.Replacement and Adjustment

1. Use A3/DLT paper to make a temporary test chart as shown below.


A: Leading edge registration

2. Put the temporary test chart on the ADF, and then make a copy from one of the feed stations.
3. Check the registration. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the following
SP modes if necessary.
Standard: 4.2 ± 2 mm for the leading edge registration, 2 ± 1 mm for the side-to-side registration.
Use the following SP modes to adjust if necessary.
SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range
SP6-006-001 Side-to-Side Regist: Front ± 3.0 mm
SP6-006-003 Leading Edge Registration ± 5.0 mm
SP6-006-005 Buckle: Duplex Front ± 3.0 mm
SP6-006-006 Buckle: Duplex Rear ± 2.5 mm
SP6-006-007 Rear Edge Erase (Trailing Edge) ± 10.0 mm

ADF sub-scan magnification

1. Put the temporary test chart on the ADF, and then make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Adjust with SP6-017-001 if necessary.

Specification (magnification error)

• Sub-scan without magnification: ±2.75%


• Sub-scan with magnification: ±2.75%

405
5.System Maintenance (D0B2,D0B3)

5. System Maintenance (D0B2,D0B3)

Service Menu

Overview

These models have several service menus. Each service menu has several adjustment items. This
section explains how to enter each service menu and the operations that can be performed in each
service menu.
There are two menus depending on how the service menus are accessed.
Maintenance Mode Menu This is a menu for maintenance and service.
Special Maintenance menu Displays the serial number of the machine.

Maintenance Mode Menu

Menu List

Display Info
Model Name Displays the Model Name depending on Engine Firmware Settings.
FW CTL FW Displays the Firmware Version.
Version Version
Engine Displays the Engine Firmware Version.
FW
Version
Scan FW Displays the Scanner Firmware Version.
Version
Counter Printer Displays the black image counter of the printer engine.
Counter
Scanner Displays the sum total of scanner counters for each mode.
Counter Total Page/ Black Page/ Color Page
/ ADF Used
Jam Displays the number of paper jams at each location.
Counter JAM Total/ ARDF/ Initialize jam/ Tray1 nofeed jam/ Bank1 nofeed jam/ Bank2
nofeed jam/ Bypass nofeed jam/ Duplex nofeed jam (for C1b/C1c)/ Not reach
bank1 Ver. Deliver/ Not reach regist/ Not reach exit sensor/ Stay on bank1
ver. Deliver/ Stay on bank2 ver. Deliver/ Stay on regist/ Stay on exit sensor/
Stayed on duplex exit

Print Report

406
5.System Maintenance (D0B2,D0B3)

Print Report SMC Page Report Prints out the SMC repot.

Engine Maintenance
See “Engine SP Mode” for details.

Scan Maintenance
Mono Compression Sets the monochrome compression type for scanning.
MH (Default)/ MR/ MMR

Factory Default
Factory Default Return Returns to the upper level of the mode
Execute
Be very careful when doing this.
It resets a lot of settings to the factory default settings.
Refer to "EEPROM on the MPU" for details.

CTL Maintenance
FW Update Mode Not Execute Not used
Execute
Auto IP Turns automatic IP assignment on or off.
Off/ On
PaaS Validity Set Normal Normal type
NPB NPB type

Special Maintenance Menu

Menu List

Engine maintenance
Engine maintenance Serial No Displays the serial number of the machine.

407
5.System Maintenance (D0B2,D0B3)

SP Tables
See "Appendices" for the following information:
• Engine SP1-XXX (Paper handling)
• Engine SP2-XXX (Process)
• Engine SP4-XXX (Scan)
• Engine SP5-XXX (Mode)
• Engine SP6-XXX (Option)
• Engine SP7-XXX (Data Log 1)
• Input Check
• Output Check

408
5.System Maintenance (D0B2,D0B3)

Test Pattern Printing


Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used primarily for
design testing.

• Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely. Otherwise, SC will
occur.
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
2. Select “Print List/Report” from the list then press the [OK] key.

3. Select “Test Page” or “Registration Page” to print from the list then press the [OK] key.

4. Press [Yes] to print the selected pattern.

409
5.System Maintenance (D0B2,D0B3)

Test Page Registration Page

410
5.System Maintenance (D0B2,D0B3)

SMC Page Printing


1. Enter the “Maintenance Mode”.
2. Select “Print reports” from the list then press [OK] key.

3. Select “SMC Page Print” for print from the list then press [OK] key.

4. Press [Yes] to print the SMC reports.

411
5.System Maintenance (D0B2,D0B3)

Firmware Update

Overview

In order to update the firmware of this machine, download the latest firmware file from Ricoh's website
and save it on an SD card.
Insert the card in the SD card slot on the MPU (PCB7).

Before Beginning

An SD card is a fragile device. When handling SD cards, always observe the following precautions:
• Before inserting an SD card, always switch the machine off. Never insert an SD card into a slot
when the power is on.
• Do not remove an SD card from a service slot after the power has been switched on.
• Never switch the machine off while firmware is downloading from an SD card.
• Keep SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed to high temperature, high humidity,
or exposure to direct sunlight.
• Always handle SD cards with care. Do not bend or scratch them. Do not expose an SD card to
shock or vibration.

Updating Firmware

Preparation

1. Confirm the SD Card is using FAT or FAT32 filesystem if not, please reformat and change the
filesystem to FAT or FAT32.
2. Create a folder named “d0b2” on the card.
3. Copy the “d0b2*****.brn” file to “d0b2” folder on SD card.

• Do not put multiple firmware files on the same SD card. Copy only the firmware you will be
using to update the machine.

Updating Procedure

1. Turn the main power switch off.


2. Remove the rear Cover (Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3))

412
5.System Maintenance (D0B2,D0B3)

3. Locate the SD card slot [A] and insert the SD card in the slot.

4. Slowly push the SD card into the slot so it locks in place. It will make a click sound. Make sure the
SD card locks in place.

5. Turn on the update switch (SW2) [A].

6. Disconnect the network cable if the machine is connected to a network.


7. Attach the rear cover.
8. Turn the main power switch on. After about 45 seconds, the update screen will be shown on the
display.

413
5.System Maintenance (D0B2,D0B3)

9. The firmware filename will be displayed. If this is the file to be updated, press the [OK] key.

10. The file will be loaded to the memory, and the below screen will be displayed. Press the [Execute]
key to start the update process.

11. Once the update finished, "Completed" message will be displayed on the screen.

12. Turn the main power switch off.


13. Remove the rear cover (Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3))
14. Push the SD card to release and remove it from the slot.

• To remove the SD card, push it in to unlock the spring lock and it will pop out of the slot.
15. Turn the update switch off [A].

16. Turn the main power switch on. Updating the firmware has been completed.

414
5.System Maintenance (D0B2,D0B3)

Recovery after power loss

• If the update process disrupted due to a power loss, normal operation cannot be guaranteed
when the machine is turned ON.
• An error message will be repeatedly shown until the update successfully completed in order to
make sure the machine operates normally.
• To solve this issue, reinsert the SD card, switch ON the power and the firmware file will be
automatically loaded.

Handling Firmware Update Errors

If an error occurs, a message will be displayed on the screen.


There are 4 different messages as shown below.

The following are the possible error conditions for each of the 4 error messages:
Error Message Error Situations
SD Card not supported 1. SD card not inserted
2. Bad card
3. SD card format
4. SD 3.0 card
File not exists 1. FW file not in d0b2/d0b2***.brn
Invalid file format 1. Read file error
2. File size <24Byte
3. First 4 Byte not match
4. File size ≠ len in Header
5. If .ram FW
6. CheckSum error
Update Failed 1. MPU (PCB7) defective

415
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

6. System Maintenance (D0B4)

Service Program Mode

• Make sure that the data-in LED is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED indicates
that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the printer to process
the data.

SP Tables

See "Appendices" for the following information:


"SP Mode Tables"

Enabling and Disabling Service Program Mode

• The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only, so that they can
properly maintain product quality. If this mode is used by anyone other than service
representatives for any reason, data might be deleted or settings might be changed. In such
case, product quality cannot be guaranteed any more.

Entering SP Mode

For details, ask your supervisor.


Note
If there are no Classic Application (copy/printer/scanner/fax) icons on the Home screen, follow the
procedure below to display the number keyboard.
1. Press and hold the button [B] located at the right side of the operation panel and "Check Status [A]"
at the same time, until the number keyboard is displayed.

416
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

2. Enter the key code for SP mode.

Exiting SP Mode

Press "Exit" on the LCD twice to return to the user screen.

• To make the settings effective, turn the main power switch off and on after exiting service
mode.

Types of SP Modes

• System SP: SP modes related to the engine functions


• Printer SP: SP modes related to the controller functions
• Scanner SP: SP modes related to the scanner functions
• Fax SP: SP modes related to the fax functions

Select one of the Service Program modes (System, Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from the touch panel as
shown in the diagram below after you access the SP mode.This section explains the functions of the
System/Printer/Scanner SP modes. Refer to the Fax service manual for the Fax SP modes.

417
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.

1 Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number. Then press [#].
The required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing [#]. If not, just press the required
SP Mode number.
2 Press two times to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal
operation.
3 Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes.
4 Press to scroll the show to the previous or next group.
5 Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display (page).
6 Press to scroll the show the previous or next line (line by line).

Service Mode Lock/Unlock

At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot operate the
machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure that work on
the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and then set
"Service Mode Lock" to OFF after he or she logs in:
Settings > Machine Features Settings > User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools >
Service Mode Lock > OFF
• This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
• The CE can service the machine and turn the machine off and on. It is not necessary to ask
the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned on.
2. Go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to "1" if you must use the printer bit switches.
418
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

3. After machine servicing is completed:


• Change SP5169 from "1" to "0".
• Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you have completed servicing the
machine.
• The Administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON.

419
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Firmware Update (SD Card)

Updating Firmware

Preparation

• If the SD card is blank, copy the entire "romdata" folder onto the SD card.
• If the card already contains the "romdata" folder, copy the "D0B4" folder onto the card.
If the card already contains folders up to "D0B4", copy the necessary firmware files (e.g. D0B4xxxx.fwu)
into this folder.

• Do not put multiple machine firmware programs on the same SD card. Copy the only model
firmware you want.

Updating Procedure

1. First download the new firmware to the SD card.


2. Turn OFF the power.
3. Remove the SD card slot cover.
4. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot.

• Check whether the card is properly in the SD card slot. When an SD card is inserted, a
click is heard, and it is locked.
• To remove the card, release by pressing once.
5. Turn ON the power.
6. Wait until the update screen starts (about 45 seconds).
When it appears, "Please Wait" is displayed.
7. Check whether a program installation screen is displayed. (The screen is always in English,
regardless of the machine's language settings.) When the SD card contains two or more software
modules, they are displayed as follows.

- When two or more software names are displayed -


1. Press the module selection button or [1] - [5] on the 10-key pad.
2. Choose the appropriate module. (If already selected, cancel the selection.)
Operation of keys or buttons

420
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Keys or buttons to press Contents


[Exit] or 10-key pad [0] Returns to the normal screen.
[Start] Key Select all modules.
[Clear/Stop] key Cancel all selections.
Display contents
On the above screen, two programs, engine firmware and printer application, are displayed. (The
screen may change depending on the firmware or application.)
The display contents are as follows:
Display Contents
ROM: Display installed module number / version information.
NEW: Display module number / version information in the card.
The upper row corresponds to the module name, the lower row corresponds to the version number.
8. Select the module with the module selection button or 10 key pad operation. The selected module
is highlighted, and [Verify] and [Update] are displayed.

• Depending on the combination of modules to update, it may not be possible to select all of
them simultaneously.

Key or button operations


Keys or buttons to press Contents
[Update] or [#] key Update the ROM of the selected module.
[Verify] button or [./*] key Perform verification of the selected module.
9. Press the [Update] or [#] key. Software will be updated.
10. During firmware update, a "firmware update/ verification progress screen" is displayed. When
firmware update is complete, the "firmware update end screen" is displayed.

• In the middle row, the name of the module currently being updated is displayed (in this case,
the printer module is being updated).
421
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

• In the lower row, a progress bar is displayed in ten steps. (The more *, the more the progress.)
Firmware update end screen

• This screen is displayed when all selected firmware modules are to be updated. "Printer" in the
second row shows that the module updated last is the printer. (When more than one were
updated simultaneously, only the module that was updated last is displayed.)
• When Verify was completed normally, the "Update done" display of the above screen is "Verify
done." If "Verify Error" is displayed, reinstall the software of the application displayed in the
lower row.
11. After turning the main power OFF, remove the SD card.
12. Turn the main power ON again, and check whether the machine is operating normally.
13. Return the SD card slot cover to the original position.

• When the power supply is switched OFF during firmware update, update is interrupted, and
the power is switched ON again, normal operation cannot be guaranteed.
• To guarantee operation, an update error continues to be displayed until update is successful.
• In this case, insert the SD card again, switch the power ON, and continue download of
firmware from the SD card automatically.
• The PS3 firmware program is included in the preinstalled PDF firmware. In the default state,
although the PS3 firmware program is hidden in the disabled state, the function is enabled by
installing the PS3 card. (The program installed in the PS3 card is a dongle (key) for enabling
the PS3 function).
• Due to the above specification, the self-diagnosis result report shows the ROM module
number / software version of the PDF firmware at the PS location.

Error Screens during Updating

EXX shows an error code.


For error codes, refer to the following table:

422
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Error Code List

Code Contents Solutions


20 Physical address mapping cannot be • Switch the main power supply off and on to
performed. try again.
• Re-insert the SD card to reboot.
• Replace the MPU if the above solutions do
not solve the problem.
21 Insufficient memory for the download • Switch the main power supply off and on to
try again.
• Replace the MPU if the updating cannot be
done by switching the power off and on.
22 Decompression of compressed data • Switch the main power supply off and on to
failed. try again.
• Replace the SD card used for the update.
• Replace the MPU if the above solutions do
not solve the problem.
24 SD card access error • Re-insert the SD card.
• Switch the main power supply off and on to
try again.
• Replace the SD card used for the update.
• Replace the MPU if the above solutions do
not solve the problem.
32 The SD card used after download • Insert the SD card containing the same
suspension is incorrect. program as when the firmware update was
The SD card which was inserted after suspended, and then switch the main power
power interruption is different from the supply off and on to try again.
one which was inserted before power • There is a possibility that the SD card is
interruption. damaged if the update cannot be done after
the correct SD card has been inserted. In this
case, try again with a different SD card.
• Replace the MPU if the above solutions do
not solve the problem.
Replace all relevant boards if the update is
done for the MPU and FCU function.
Replace the operation panel unit if the
update is done for the operation panel.
33 Card version error. • Install the correct ROM update data for each
The wrong card version is downloaded. version in the SD card.

423
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Code Contents Solutions


34 Destination error. • Install the correct ROM update data for each
A card for the wrong destination is destination (JPN/ EXP/ OEM) in the SD card.
inserted.
35 Model error. • Install the correct ROM update data for each
A card for the wrong model is inserted. model in the SD card.
36 Module error. • Install the program to be updated in advance.
The program to be downloaded does not • There is a possibility that the SD card
exist on the main unit. containing the program to be updated has
The download destination specified by not been mounted. Check to confirm that the
the card does not match the destination SD card has been correctly mounted.
for the main unit’s program. • The SD card is incorrect if the program to be
updated has been correctly installed. In this
case, insert the correct SD card.
38 The version of the downloaded program • Make sure that the program to be overwritten
has not been authorized for the update. is the specified version.
40 Engine download fails. • Switch the main power supply off and on to
try again.
• If the download fails again, replace the MPU.
41 Fax download fails. • Switch the main power supply off and on to
try again.
• If the download fails again, replace the MPU
and the fax board.
42 Control panel / language download fails. • Switch the main power supply off and on to
try again.
• If the download fails again, replace the MPU
and the operation panel unit.
43 Printing download fails. • Switch the main power supply off and on to
try again.
• The SD card is damaged if the update fails
again. Replace the SD card.
44 The data to be overwritten cannot be • Switch the main power supply off and on to
accessed when controller-related try again.
programs are downloaded. • Install the correct ROM update data in the
SD card.
• Replace the MPU if the data to be
overwritten is contained on the MPU.
49 Firmware updates are currently • The setting of Update Firmware in the
prohibited. Administrator Tools has been set to [Prohibit]
424
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Code Contents Solutions


by an administrator. Amend the setting to [Do
not Prohibit] and try again.
50 The results of the electronic • Install the correct ROM update data in the
authorization check have rejected the SD card.
update data.
57 @Remote is not connected at the • Check the @Remote connection.
date/time reserved for receiving the
package firmware update from the
network.
58 Update cannot be done due to a • Check the @Remote connection.
reception route problem.
59 HDD is not mounted. This code is not displayed in this machine.

60 HDD could not be used during the This code is not displayed in this machine.
package firmware update.
61 The module ID for the package firmware • Prepare the correct package files.
update is incorrect.
62 The configuration of the package • Prepare the correct package files.
firmware update files is incorrect.
63 Reception fails due to power off at the • Update is to be done automatically when the
reserved date/time of the remote next reception time has elapsed.
firmware update from the network.
64 Reception fails due to power off at the • Reset the reservation date/time for the
reserved date/time of the package remote update.
firmware update from the network.
65 Reception fails due to a status error of • Update is to be done automatically when the
the machine at the reserved date/time of next reception time has elapsed.
the remote firmware update from the
network.
66 Reception failed due to a status error of • Reset the reservation date/time for the
the machine at the reserved date/time of remote update.
the package firmware update from the
network.
67 Acquisition of the latest version • Check that the network is connected
information from the Gateway fails at the correctly.
reserved date/time of the remote
firmware update from the network.

425
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Code Contents Solutions


68 Acquisition of the latest version • Check that the network is connected
information from the Gateway fails. correctly.
69 Download fails at the reserved date/time • Check that the network is connected
of the remote firmware update from the correctly.
network.
70 Package firmware download from the • Check that the network is connected
network fails. correctly.
71 Network communication error occurs at • Check that the network is connected
the reserved date/time of the package correctly.
firmware update from the network.
72 The setting of @Remote is invalid at the • Set the setting of @Remote Service in the
reserved date/time of the package Administrator Tools to [Do not Prohibit].
firmware update from the network.
57 @Remote is not connected at the • Check the @Remote connection.
date/time reserved for receiving the
package firmware update from the
network.
58 Update cannot be done due to a • Check the @Remote connection.
reception route problem.
59 HDD is not mounted. This code is not displayed in this machine.
60 HDD could not be used during the This code is not displayed in this machine.
package firmware update.
61 The module ID for the package firmware • Prepare the correct package files.
update is incorrect.
62 The configuration of the package • Prepare the correct package files.
firmware update files is incorrect.
63 Reception fails due to power off at the • Update is to be done automatically when the
reserved date/time of the remote next reception time has elapsed.
firmware update from the network.
64 Reception fails due to power off at the • Reset the reservation date/time for the
reserved date/time of the package remote update.
firmware update from the network.
65 Reception fails due to a status error of • Update is to be done automatically when the
the machine at the reserved date/time of next reception time has elapsed.
the remote firmware update from the
network.
66 Reception failed due to a status error of • Reset the reservation date/time for the

426
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Code Contents Solutions


the machine at the reserved date/time of remote update.
the package firmware update from the
network.
67 Acquisition of the latest version • Check that the network is connected
information from the Gateway fails at the correctly.
reserved date/time of the remote
firmware update from the network.
68 Acquisition of the latest version • Check that the network is connected
information from the Gateway fails. correctly.
69 Download fails at the reserved date/time • Check that the network is connected
of the remote firmware update from the correctly.
network.
70 Package firmware download from the • Check that the network is connected
network fails. correctly.
71 Network communication error occurs at • Check that the network is connected
the reserved date/time of the package correctly.
firmware update from the network.
72 The setting of @Remote is invalid at the • Set the setting of @Remote Service in the
reserved date/time of the package Administrator Tools to [Do not Prohibit].
firmware update from the network.

• The PDF firmware installed as standard contains a program required to print PS3 data as
default. However, this PS3 program is normally disabled.
• The PS3 firmware is a dongle (key) which enables PS3 data printing functions. When the PS3
firmware is installed, the PS3 program in the PDF firmware is enabled. Due to this
specification, the self-diagnosis result report shows the ROM part number/software version of
the PDF firmware contained in the PS3 program.

427
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Firmware Update (Remote Firmware Update)


In this machine, software can be updated by remote control using @Remote.

Types of firmware update files, supported update methods:

SFU SD Card RFU ARFU


Individual firmware N/A Available Available N/A
Package firmware Available Available Available Available

RFU Performable Condition

RFU is performable for a device which meets the following conditions.


1. The customer consents to the use of RFU.
2. The device is connected to a network via TCP/IP for @Remote.

428
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update)

Overview

Each firmware module (such as System, Engine, etc.) used to be updated individually. However, an all-
inclusive firmware package (package_ALL) is now available.
There are several ways to update using the firmware package.

Package Firmware Update via a network: SFU (Smart Firmware Update)

• There are two methods for SFU.


• Immediate Update: To update the firmware when visiting
• Update at the next visit: To set the date and time for downloading. The firmware will be
automatically downloaded beforehand and updated at the following visit.
• "Update at the next visit" is recommended since firmware download may take some minutes
due to the network condition.

SFU requires the connection to @Remote via a device which has the embedded @Remote
communicating function. When a machine is connected to @Remote via an intermediate device (RC
Gate), the SFU function is disabled.

Other than SFU, package firmware update can also be performed by using the following three methods.
• Package Firmware Update via a network: ARFU (Auto Remote Firmware Update)
• Package Firmware Update via an SD Card
• Package Firmware Update via a network: RFU (Remote Firmware Update)

Types of firmware update files, supported update methods:

SFU SD Card RFU ARFU


Individual firmware N/A Available Available N/A
Package firmware Available Available Available Available

429
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Immediate Update

Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware.

• The [Firmware Update] button will appear even when a machine is connected to @Remote
with a device which does not have an embedded @Remote communicating function.
• If an error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens during Updating
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Touch [Firmware Update].
Touch [Update].

3. Touch [Execute Update].

4. Touch [YES].

430
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

5. The following will be displayed.

• If the error code E66, which indicates that the download of the firmware has failed, is
displayed, go back to step 1.
• Update will be started automatically after the download is finished.
• When the machine is in the update mode, the automatic update is suspended if a print job
is started. After the print job is finished, touch [YES] on the display shown below to restart
updating.

6. [Update done] is displayed.


• The machine will automatically reboot itself.

431
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

• The figures at the lower right of the display indicate "Number of updated items/All items to
be updated".

Update at the Next Visit (Reserve)

It is possible to set the machine to download the package firmware which is necessary for SFU in
advance, and then perform the actual installation at the next service visit. This saves waiting time for
the firmware to download at the service visit.

How to Set the Machine to Download Firmware Later (Reserve)

Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware.

• The [Firmware Update] button will appear even when a machine is connected to @Remote
with a device which does not have an embedded @Remote communicating function. If an
error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens during Updating.
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Touch [Firmware Update].
Touch [Reserve].

432
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

3. Touch [Reservation setting].

4. Enter the dates and times of the next visit and the start of receiving data.
• "Next time to visit this customer": The package firmware will be automatically downloaded by
this time/date.
• "When to receive? (1-7)": The download of the package firmware will begin this number of
days before the next visit.

Successful Download

In the two diagrams below, the firmware is set to be downloaded by the day before the next scheduled
visit. In the first diagram, the download is successful on the first try. In the second diagram, the
download fails three times and is successful on the fourth try.

433
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

• If the firmware download fails or cannot be completed due to the network settings/condition, no
power to the machine, or other reason, the machine will continue retrying every six hours until the
scheduled deadline (up to a maximum of four tries). For example, if the download is set for the day
before the next visit, the machine will attempt the download at 24 hours before the visit, and then
continue trying every six hours (max. four tries total).
• The retry is only performed in cases when the firmware download has failed.
• If the machine is in Energy Saver mode when the download is scheduled to begin, the download
will be performed in the background and the machine/panel will stay in Energy Saver mode.
• The download will continue uninterrupted even if the customer initiates a print job, copy job, fax
receiving or other operation while the download is in progress.
• The download will be terminated if the customer turns the power off while the download is in
progress.
• If the download cannot be completed successfully by the time of the next scheduled visit, the
machine will stop trying to download the firmware.

How to Check if the Firmware Downloaded with Reserve

1. Enter the SP mode.


2. Touch [Firmware Update].
Touch [Reserve].

434
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

3. Touch [Reserve and received package information].

4. Check the information displayed.


When the package firmware was downloaded successfully, the details of the download result are
displayed as the following picture shows.

• This information will only be displayed if the reserved firmware has already been
downloaded. If not, all the data items are indicated with "-".

How to Install Firmware Downloaded with Reserve

1. Enter the SP mode.


2. Touch [Firmware Update].
Touch [Update].

435
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

3. Touch [Execute Update].

4. Check the version of the received package firmware, and then touch [YES].
• Update is started.

• If the version of the reserved package in the eMMC is older than the latest version, the
messages shown in the following picture are displayed.

• If you wish to download the latest version, touch [Execute] beside the message
"Download and update the latest package." Then update of the package firmware will be
started.
• If you wish to update using the firmware in the eMMC (old version), touch [Execute]
beside the message "Update to the received package."
5. [Update done] is displayed.

436
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

• The machine will automatically reboot itself.

• The figures at the lower right of the display indicate "Number of updated items/ All items to
be updated".

Update via SD Card

Update with an SD card, which is the conventional method, is available if you write the package
firmware to the SD card.

• If an error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens during Updating.


1. Create a new folder in the SD card, and then name it "package".
2. Copy the package firmware (xxxxxxxx.pkg) to this folder.

• If you copy the package firmware into the conventional "romdata" folder, the update will
437
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

not work.
• Only one version of the package firmware should be copied into the folder. If you copy
multiple versions of package firmware to the SD card, the machine will select only one
version of the firmware randomly.
3. Turn the power OFF.
4. Remove the slot cover.
5. Insert the SD card which contains the package into the SD card slot (for service).
6. Turn the power ON and touch [Update].

• When the SD card contains both a firmware package and one or more modules, the
following display may show up. Select [Package] and touch [OK] to move to step 5 above.

7. Update is started automatically after the package firmware download to the eMMC has been
completed.

438
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

8. When update is completed, "Update done" is displayed.

• The figures at the lower right of the display indicate "Number of updated items/All items to
be updated".
9. Turn the main power switch OFF, and then pull out the SD card from the SD card slot.
10. Turn the power ON.

439
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update)

• Auto remote firmware update (ARFU) requires connection to the Internet. Be sure to get
permission from the customer before setting up this feature.

Overview

By Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU), the firmware is updated by checking the global server every
76 hours and downloading the latest package if it is newer than the one installed on the machine.

Function Overview

Types of firmware update files, supported update methods:

SFU SD Card RFU ARFU


Individual firmware N/A Available Available N/A
Package firmware Available Available Available Available

What is Included in the Firmware Package

Modules included in the firmware package are indicated by ticks ( ) in the firmware download web site.
Firmware not included in the package require updating by SD cards, etc.
The table below is an example:
Included Firmware
- aics
animation
Application Site
BluetoothService
CheetahSystem
- CSPF
- Data Erase Onb
- EcoInfoWidget
Engine

440
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Downloading and Updating Process

Downloads the Latest Package

The machine checks the server for the latest package version.
If the version of the package on the global server is later than that of the package installed on the
machine, or if the machine has not downloaded the firmware package, the machine downloads the
latest package in the background even when the customer is using the machine.
If download fails, the machine will retry downloading 76 hours later.
The downloaded package can also be used with SFU (Smart Firmware Update). A package
downloaded with SFU (Smart Firmware Update) can be used with ARFU (Auto Remote Firmware
Update) and vice versa.
When replacing the MPU, the firmware package data becomes lost from the MPU. Even if the latest
firmware is on the new MPU, be sure to receive the latest package data.
When the machine connects to the server where the package files are stored, the DNS settings and the
name solution by DNS are needed. The machine will still try to download the package even if the name
cannot be resolved, but will fail because the name is not resolved.
The time and date to send the next inquiry to the global server can be checked with SP5-886-116 (Farm
Update Setting: Auto Update Next Date).
The auto remote firmware update is executed every 76 hours.

Judgement of ARFU

Update judgement is done when the latest update package is successfully downloaded, or the package
has already been downloaded.

441
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

If the judgement timing is in the range of the update prohibited time or day set with SP or WIM, the
machine will retry the update after 76 hours.

If the machine is in use when the judgement process runs, the process is retried. Retry is done up to
three times every hour (can be changed with SP) and if the machine is in use for all three retries, the
machine will retry the update after 76 hours

442
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Situations judged as machine in use

No. Situations judged as machine in use


1 When the control panel is used within 30 seconds
2 During firmware update
3 While firmware update is disabled
4 While printing (copy, printer, fax, re-printing via network)
5 While scanning (copy, scanner, fax)
6 Retrieving image data via network
7 While initial setting (User Tools settings) or SP is being set
8 While fax is transferring data
9 During on hook / on handset
10 During the PC-FAX process (from PC to machine data transfer to the end of the job)
11 While shifting to/from the energy server mode
12 When not being able to run firmware update due to the modules that are running
e.g.) Waiting for DCS transfer (refer to appendix), accessing devices such as eMMC/SD card,
etc.
13 While displaying a preview
14 While the document server function is in use
15 Connecting to TWAIN
16 During the interrupt copy process
17 While displaying the printer menu
18 While updating the display for the document server function via WIM or for stored fax
documents
19 While writing log information
20 While accessing the address book
21 During SC

Update Process

When the machine has decided to run the auto firmware update, the following message is displayed.

443
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

The popup will have "Cancel" and "OK" buttons and the update process will start either when the "OK"
button is selected or 30 seconds has passed.
When the "Cancel" button is selected, the machine will run the "Retry update" process.
When the device update and three retries in recovery mode both fail, it is determined as a device defect
and will display an SC for the defective device. If such an SC appears, replace the indicated board.

Canceling the update

It is possible to cancel the Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU) or update in recovery mode from the
operation panel.

But this is not possible while updating the operation panel itself. On the other hand, the update for the
operation panel will run at the final stage of the update. Thus canceling the update at that stage has no
real effect.
When the update is cancelled, the machine will reboot when updates for all modules of one of the
following devices is done.
1. MPU
2. FCU function on the MPU and the fax board
3. Operation Panel
For example, when the update process is cancelled while updating the first module of the operation
panel, the machine will reboot when all modules in the operation panel have been updated.
The firmware contents included in the package can be referred to in the release note in the SERES
release of the package.

444
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

The next update will run 76 hours after the cancellation. The old (cancelled) package will be discarded if
the package downloaded 76 hours later is the latest.

Checking the ARFU Result

1. Enter the SP mode.


2. Press [Firmware update].
3. Press [Update].
4. Press [Update Package Information].
5. If the firmware package is the same as the one on the global server, the update was completed
successfully. Otherwise, check the result using the logging date.
In SP7-520-041 to -045 (Update Log: Auto:Version), you can check the versions of the packages
updated by ARFU. (-041 displays the latest result. It is also printed on the SMC sheet.)

Checking the Result Using the Log Data

1. Enter the SP mode.


2. Press [System/Copy].
3. Check the results for ARFU by SP7-520-051 to 060 (Update Log: Auto:Result)
"-051" is the latest update result. For details about the number of each result log, see the next
section “Related SP.”

Related SPs

SP Number Selection Overview


Def.
SP5-886-111 0: OFF Sets auto update by ARFU ON/OFF.
1: ON
SP5-886-112 0: OFF Will not run the update when update prohibited time setting is ON and
1: ON the current time is in the range of the time set.
SP5-886-113 0 to 23 • Start time < End time: Prohibited time is from the start time to the
9 end time on the same day.
SP5-886-114 0 to 23 • Start time > End time: Prohibited time is from the start time to the
17 end time on the next day.
• Start time == End time: Prohibited time setting is disabled.
(Update will not be prohibited.)
SP5-886-115 0: OFF Even when the update function is disabled, downloading the package
1: ON is allowed.
The downloaded package can be used with SFU.
SP5-886-116 Display Displays when the latest package check will run.
only
445
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

SP Number Selection Overview


Def.
SP5-886-117 1 to 24 Set time for the next version check after retry.
1
SP5-886-120 0x00 Update will not run if the corresponding bit for each day below is set to
1.
• Prohibited at all times: bit 7
• Monday: bit 6
• Tuesday: bit 5
• Wednesday: bit 4
• Thursday: bit 3
• Friday: bit 2
• Saturday: bit 1
• Sunday: bit 0
This setting is not changed by the prohibited time setting.
e.g.) Prohibited on Mon., Fri., Sat., and Sun. : 0x47 (01000111)
SP7-520-011 Display History of dates and times when update has started.
to 015 only The five most recent are recorded, the lowest number being most
recent.
If the last update failed, this is not recorded.
SP7-520-021 Display History of dates and times when update has finished.
to 025 only The five most recent are recorded, the lowest number being most
recent.
The record is created when the update has successfully finished.
When the update is cancelled, no record is created.
SP7-520-031 Display History of the package numbers (including suffix) for which update has
to 035 only completed.
The five most recent are recorded, the lowest number being most
recent.
The record is created when the update has successfully finished.
When the update is cancelled, no record is created.
SP7-520-041 Display History of the package versions for which update has completed.
to 045 only The five most recent are recorded, the lowest number being most
recent.
The record is created when the update has successfully finished.
When the update is cancelled, no record is created.
SP7-520-051 Display History of the results of the download and the update.
to 060 only Refer below for the numbers set.

446
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Numbers set for the result history for SP7-520-051 to 060

No. Result Description


1 Downloading with SFU Cannot download or update because the machine is now
downloading the package for SFU.
2 HDD not installed Cannot download or update because the machine has no
HDD.
3 Updating with SFU Cannot download or update because the machine is being
updated with SFU.
4 HDD error Cannot download or update because the HDD cannot be
used.
5 Version information obtain error Cannot download or update because the version
information cannot be obtained.
6 Update download error Cannot download or update because the update download
failed.
In the non @Remote method, this shows that the download
failed because there was no proxy set.
7 Name resolution error Cannot download or update because the name cannot be
resolved upon downloading the update.
8 Auto update setting disabled The package has been downloaded but will not run the
update because SP5-886-111 (auto update setting) is
disabled and SP5-886-115 (auto download setting for SFU)
is enabled.
9 Update prohibited time Cannot start to update because the auto update prohibited
time setting (SP5-886-112) is enabled and the time update
initiated was in the range of prohibited time (SP5-886-113
to 114).
Or the day which update was initiated was a day for which
update was prohibited (SP5-886-120).
10 Update postponed due to Cannot start update due to the following conditions when
machine in use update was initiated.
• The machine is in use by a user (the panel was used
within 30 seconds)
• Machine offline for other reasons
• Operation prohibited
• Displaying SP/UP menu
• Firmware update is running with another method
• Configuration change prohibited
• Verifying the operation panel (smart panel)

447
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

No. Result Description


11 Update cancelled by user Update was cancelled because a user selected "Cancel" in
the popup shown before starting the update.
12 Offline failed Cannot start to update because the machine is offline for
other reasons.
13 Update successful Update was started and successfully completed.
14 Update failed Update was started but failed.
15 Update deemed completed Update was cancelled after the process was initiated
because a user selected “Cancel”. There is no need to
resume the update due to one of the following reasons:
• A newer update has been released and received.
• When retrying ARFU, the update has already been
completed by another method.
16 Update cancelled by user after Update was cancelled after the process initiated because a
update initiated user selected "Cancel" during the update.
17 Version information obtain error Cannot download or update because the name cannot be
(communication error occurred resolved when obtaining version information.
for hostname)
18 Version information obtain error Cannot download or update because the proxy verification
(proxy verification failure) failed with proxy settings when obtaining version
information.
19 Version information obtain error Cannot download or update because an error other than
(other than proxy verification proxy verification with proxy settings occurred when
failure when proxy is set) obtaining version information.
20 Update download error (proxy Cannot download or update because the proxy verification
verification failure) failed with proxy settings when downloading the package.
21 Update download error (other Cannot download or update because an error other than
than proxy verification failure proxy verification with proxy settings occurred when
when proxy is set) downloading the package.
22 Update by retry successful After power failure, unsuccessful update, or rebooting,
update by retry is executed successfully.
However, this does not apply to the case where the update
was cancelled after the process was initiated because a
user selected “Cancel”.
In this case, the update is “successful” if the retry is not
executed between the start and completion of the next
update (76 hours after the cancellation).

448
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Address Book Upload/Download

Information List

The following information is possible to be uploaded and downloaded.


Information
• Registration No. • Select Title
• User Code • Folder
• E-mail • Local Authentication
• Protection Code • Folder Authentication
• Fax Destination • Account ACL
• Fax Option • New Document Initial ACL
• Group Name • LDAP Authentication
• Key Display

Download

With this machine, download and restore from WIM. Like conventional machines, backup and restore
cannot be performed from SP mode.

1. Open a web browser.


2. Enter "http://(the machine's IP address or host name)/" in the address bar.
3. Click [Login].
4. Login using the administrator account.
Depending on the configuration of your web browser, the login user name and password might be
saved.
Configure your web browser's settings in advance so that this information is not saved (do not get
the customer's account details).
5. Point to [Device Management], and then click [Address Book].
6. Click [Maintenance].
7. Enter an encryption key as necessary.
8. Click Execute Backup.
9. A download window will appear from the browser, and so specify the save destination, and then
click save.

Upload

1. Open a web browser.


2. Enter "http://(the machine's IP address or host name)/" in the address bar.
3. Click [Login].
4. Login using the administrator account.
449
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Depending on the configuration of your web browser, the login user name and password might be
saved.
Configure your web browser's settings in advance so that this information is not saved (do not get
the customer's account details).
5. Point to [Device Management], and then click [Address Book].
6. Click [Maintenance].
7. Enter an encryption key as necessary.
8. Click "Restore Settings".
9. Click "Browser", select a backup file, and then click "Open".
10. After it has uploaded, click "OK".

• The counter in the user code information is initialized after uploading.


• The information of an administrator and supervisor cannot be downloaded nor uploaded.

450
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Uploading/Downloading NVRAM Data

Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD Card

Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.

• All data that is stored in NV-RAM of the MPU is subject to update.

• This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced.
• Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked
1. Do SP5-990 (SMC Print) before you switch the machine off. You will need a record of the NVRAM
settings if the upload fails.
2. Switch the machine main power switch off.
3. Remove the SD slot cover.
4. Insert the SD card into SD card slot. Then switch the machine on.
5. Execute SP5-824 (NVRAM Data Upload) and then press the “Execute” key.
6. The following files are copied to an NVRAM folder on the SD card when the upload procedure is
finished. The file is saved to the following path and filename:
NVRAM <serial number>.NV
Here is an example with Serial Number “K5000017114”:
NVRAM K5000017114.NV
7. In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card that holds the
uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the data was uploaded.

• You can upload NVRAM data from more than one machine to the same SD card.

Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM

Do the following procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine.
• The NVRAM data download may fail if the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if the
connection between the controller and EGB is defective.
• Do the download procedure again if the download fails.
• Do the following procedure if the second attempt fails:
Enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you created before uploading the NVRAM
data.
1. Switch the machine main power switch off.
2. Remove the SD slot cover.
3. Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into SD Card Slot.
4. Switch the machine main power switch on.

451
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

5. Do SP5-825(NVRAM Data Download) and press the “Execute” key.

• The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the machine
for the NVRAM data to download successfully. The download fails if the serial numbers do
not match.
This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:
• Total Count
• Total: Full Color
• B&W/Single Color
• Default charge counters for counter display

452
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Capturing the Device Logs

Overview

Using the Capturing Log feature, you can retrieve the device log stored in the SD card inserted in the
service slot. It allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis.
The Capturing Log feature saves device logs for the following four.
• Controller device log including operation log
• Engine device log
• Fax board device log
• Operation panel log

• In older models, a technician enabled the logging tool after a problem occurred. After that,
when the problem had been reproduced, the technician was able to retrieve the device log.
• However, this new feature saves the device logs at the time that problems occur. Then you can
copy the logs to an SD card.
• You can retrieve the device logs using a SD card without a network.
• Analysis of the device log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of the
device log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by hardware.
• Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before retrieving the Debug Logs.
Otherwise, the latest settings may not be collected when the debug logs are retrieved.

Types of device logs that can be saved

Type Storage Timing Destination (maximum


storage capacity)
Controller device • Saved at all times SD card connected to the
log including service slot.
operation log • When using an 8 GB
SD card:
If the data exceeds 4
GB, log entries are
deleted starting with
the oldest.
• When using a 16 GB
SD card:
If the data exceeds 8
GB, log entries are
deleted starting with
the oldest.
Engine device • When an engine SC occurs SD card connected to the
453
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Type Storage Timing Destination (maximum


storage capacity)
log • When paper feeding/output stop because of a service slot (Up to 300
jam times)
• When the machine doors are opened during
normal operation
FCU device log • When a specified amount of FCU function SD card connected to the
device log is stored in the MPU. If fax service slot
application is unavailable (e.g. not installed),
the machine does not transfer the log.
Operation panel • When an error related to the operation panel Memory in the operation
log occurs. panel.

Device logs are not saved in the following conditions:


• While erasing all memory
• While data encryption equipment is installed
• While changing the firmware configuration
• Forced power OFF (accidentally disconnecting the outlet)
• Engine device log while the machine is shutting down
• When one of the following SCs occurs: SC672, SC816, SC861

The following logs are not saved:


• Logs related to the energy saver mode (Engine-off, suspend-mode, or other cases)
Network communication log
Logs related to NRS
IP-FAX log
Access log for unauthorized users (guests)
• HTTP session timeout log
• Auto log-out log
• IC card related log
• Authorization for Fax

Security of the Operation Log

The following operation logs related to security are not saved.


• User ID
• Password
• IP address
• Telephone number
• Encryption key

454
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

• Transition to SP mode

Storing the Device Logs on an SD Card

The model without HDD does not have space to store device logs. To store device logs on such a
model, insert an SD card into the service slot on the back of the machine.

• It is recommended to use the SD card (8 GB or 16GB) provided as a service part. The part
number of the SD card that is registered as a service part is "B6455040"(8 GB) and
"B6455060"(16 GB).
1. Insert the SD card into the service SD card slot.
2. Turn ON the main power.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Set SP5-858-001 (Save Machine Info) to "1 (ON)"
5. Set SP5-858-002 (Target) to "1 (SD)"
6. Execute SP5-858-003 (Make LogTrace Dir)
7. Turn the power switch OFF and ON.
After the power switch is turned on, the machine starts to store the device logs on the SD card.
However, because the logs on this SD card are not organized, the procedure to retrieve the logs
with the other SD card via the operation panel (next section) is required.

If you set SP5-858-002 (Target) to "0 (HDD)" in Step 5, when an SC occurs, only the log entry of
the device related to the SC is stored in the eMMC without storing a log entry in the SD card.
When the MPU is broken, the log cannot be stored in the eMMC.

Retrieving the Device Logs via Operation Panel

After turning the power off, remove the SD card for storing the device log from the service slot and then
retrieve the log.
In addition to the method mentioned above, you can copy the device logs stored on the SD card in the
service slot by inserting another SD card into the SD card slot on the operation panel.
For details, see Procedure for Retrieving the Device Log with Another SD Card.

• Analysis of the device log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of the
device log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by hardware.

Procedure for Retrieving the Device Log with Another SD Card

1. Insert the SD card into the slot on the side of the operation panel.

• It is recommended to use the SD card (8 GBs* or 16 GBs**) provided as a service part.


This is because the log data can be acquired much faster than when using commercially
455
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

available SD cards.
• Format the SD card by using SD Formatter from Panasonic before copying the logs:
https://www.sdcard.org/downloads/formatter_3/ (free software)
* The part number of the 8 GB SD card that is registered as a service part is "B6455040".
** The part number of the 16 GB SD card that is registered as a service part is "B6455060".
2. Turn ON the main power.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Specify the date that the problem occurred in SP5-858-101 (Start Date) by setting it to the year-
month-day calendar format.
• For example, if a problem occurred on February 1, 2015, the date should be set to
"20150201".
• Be sure to check the date that the problem occurred before obtaining the logs.
5. Specify the number of days to collect the logs in SP5-858-102 (Days of Tracing).
• "2" is set by default, which is the minimum needed for investigating the problem.
• A value of "1" to "180" can be set.
6. Execute SP5-858-111 (Acquire All Info & Logs) to copy all of the log types to an SD card.
It is possible to obtain the logs separately by the following SPs.
SP Collectable Information and/or Logs
SP5-858- All of the information and logs that are collected by executing the SPs from SP5-
111 858-121 to SP5-858-145, and SMC.
SP5-858- Configuration page
121
SP5-858- Font page
122
SP5-858- Print settings list
123
SP5-858- Error log
124
SP5-858- Fax information (whether the fax destinations are included or not depends on the
131 setting of SP5-858-103.)
SP5-858- Controller log, engine log, operation panel log, FCU, and SMC.
141
SP5-858- Controller log
142
SP5-858- Engine log
143
SP5-858- Operation panel log
144
SP5-858- FCU log
456
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

SP Collectable Information and/or Logs


145
SP5-992- SMC
001
7. After executing the SP for copying the information and/or logs, a confirmation screen will appear.
To proceed with obtaining the information and/or logs, tap "Execute".

• The approximate time it takes to transfer the debug log is as follows. Transfer time may be
affected by the type or format of the SD card.
Controller device log (GW device log): 2 - 20 minutes
Engine device log: 2 minutes
Operation panel device log: 2 - 20 minutes
If the estimated time is not calculated due to an error, an error code will be displayed.
Error Description
Code
-1 Other.
-2 No SD card is inserted in the SD card slot on the side of the operation panel. In this
case, insert an SD card into the SD card slot on the side of the operation panel.
-3 The SD card is locked. In this case, unlock the SD card, as shown below.

[A]: Unlocked, [B]: Locked

457
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

8. Wait for the information and/or logs to be copied to the SD card.

9. After a message stating that the process has completed appears on the operation panel, confirm
that the LED light next to the SD card slot on the side of the operation panel is not flashing and
then remove the SD card.

• The process of obtaining logs fails in the following cases:


- When the size of the logs to obtain exceeds the amount of space available on the SD
card.
- When the SD card is removed while the logs are being copied to it.
- When the SD card is not formatted.
• If ‘failed’ appears on the touch panel display, turn the power off, and then recover from
step 1 again.

Retrieving the Device Logs via Web Image Monitor

The device logs can be retrieved via the Web Image Monitor.
1. Access the following URL and logon as an administrator:
http://[IP address or host name]/web/entry/df/websys/direct/getSysInfo.cgi

2. Specify the date that the problem occurred and the number of days to download the logs. If the fax
destinations need to be included in the fax information, set "Obtain Fax Destination(s) Information"

458
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

to "On". Then click "Calculate".

• "3" is set by default for "Number of days, including date fault occurred, to obtain".
However "2", which is the minimum needed for investigating the problems, is
recommended for reducing the downloading time.
• "Obtain Fax Destination(s) Information" is set to "Off" by default.
3. The confirmation screen will appear and the information and/or logs will start downloading. To
proceed to download the information and/or logs, wait for the open-or-save dialog to appear.

• To cancel downloading, click "Cancel".


• To reconfigure some settings, click "Download again".
• Operation panel when downloading the logs:

459
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

4. After a while, the open-or-save dialog will appear. Specify where to download and save the file.

• The debug logs are saved with the following file names. These names are the same as
the files downloaded with SD card.

The device logs are saved with the following file names.

Controller log /LogTrace/[the model number]/watching/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss]_[a unique value].gz


(mmesg)
Engine /LogTrace/[Machine Serial]/engine/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].gz
device log
Operation /LogTrace/[the model number]/opepanel/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].tar.gz
panel log
SMC /LogTrace/[the model number]/smc/[the model
number]_[5992XXX]_[yyyymmdd]_[hhmmss].csv
Configuration /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/ConfigrationPage/ConfigrationPage_
page [yyyymmdd_hhmmss].csv
Font page • /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/FontPage/FontPage_PCL_[the page
number]_[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].jpg
• /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/FontPage/FontPage_PDF_[the page
number]_[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].jpg
• /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/FontPage/FontPage_PS_[the page
number]_[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].jpg
Print settings • /LogTrace/[the model
list number]/gps/PrintSettingList/PrintSettingList_RPGL_[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].txt
• /LogTrace/[the model
number]/gps/PrintSettingList/PrintSettingList_RTIFF_[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].csv
Error log /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/ErrorLog/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].csv
Fax /LogTrace/[the model number]/faxreport/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].csv
information
FCU debug /LogTrace/[Machine Serial]/fculog/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].gz
log

460
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

SMC List Card Save Function

Overview

The SMC List Card Save (SP Text Mode) function is used to save the SMC list as CSV files to the SD
card inserted into the operation panel SD card slot.

• Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before exporting the SMC sheet data.
Otherwise, the latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is exported.

Procedure

1. Turn OFF the power.


2. Insert the SD card into the operation panel SD-card slot, and then turn ON the power.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select [System/Copy SP].
5. Select SP5-992-001 (SP Text Mode) and press [EXECUTE].
6. Select a detail SP number shown below to save data on the SD card.

Detail No. SMC Categories to Save


001 All (Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
021 Copier User Program
022 Scanner SP
023 Scanner User Program
026 Printer SP
027 Smart Operation Panel SP
028 Smart Operation Panel UP

461
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

7. Press [EXECUTE].

8. Press [EXECUTE] again to start. Press [CANCEL] to cancel the saving.

9. “It is executing it” is shown on the screen while executing.

10. Wait for 2 to 3 minutes until “Completed” is shown.

• The SMC list saving may take from 2 to 3 minutes to complete.


• Press [CANCEL] to abort executing.
11. Press [Exit] to exit from SP mode.

File Names of the Saved SMC Lists

The SMC list data saved on the SD card will be named automatically. The file naming rules are as
462
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

follows.
Example:

A:
Machine serial number (fixed for each machine)
B:
SP number saved in this file.
First four digits (5992) in this part are fixed. The other one or two digits are the detail SP number(s). In
this case, it is one digit. Therefore, this file is of SP5-992-001 (All data list). See the above SP table for
the correspondence between SP detail numbers and the contents.
C:
File creation date
Year/Month/Day (“Zero” will be omitted if each is one digit.)
D:
File creation time
Hour/Minute/Second (“Zero” will be omitted if each is one digit.)
E:
File Extension CSV (Comma Separated Value)
This part is fixed.

• A folder named by the machine serial number will be created on the SD card when this
function is executed.
• This function can save the SMC list data only to an SD card inserted into the operation panel
SD card slot.

Error Messages

SMC List Card Save error message:


• Failed:
FACTOR: Read-only file system, No space left on device.
If an error occurs, pressing “Exit” will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready state.

463
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

SP Data Import/Export

Data That Can Be Imported and Exported

• System SP
• Printer SP
• Fax SP
• Scanner SP

Exporting Device Information

When exporting SP device information from the control panel, the data is saved on an SD card.
1. Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel.
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Do SP5-749-001 (Import/Export: Export).
4. Select “Target” SP settings (System/Printer/Fax/Scanner) to be exported.
5. Select the “Option” setting (Unique/Secret).
Item Specification Note
Unique Unique information of the machine is Unique information that can be updated
included in the exported file if you #1. Items that are to be used to identify the
select "Unique". machine.
Example: Network Information/ Host name /
Information related to fax number /Mail
address assigned to the machine
#2. Items for specifying the options equipped
on the machine.
Example: Lot number for developer
Unique information that cannot be updated
#1. Items that may cause a problem if imported
Example: Serial number / Information related
to @Remote
#2. Items for managing the history of the
machine
Example: Time and date / Counter information
/ Installation date
#3. Setting values for the Engine
Secret Secret information is exported if you Secret information
select "Secret". #1. Data that cannot be exported without being
encrypted.
(Exported data is encrypted.)

464
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Item Specification Note


Example: Password / Encryption key / PIN
code
#2. Confidential information for the customer
Example: User name / User ID / Department
code / Mail address / Phone number
#3. Personal information
Example: Document name / Image data
#4. Sensitive information for the customer
Example: MAC address / Network parameters
Note: The IP address is exported when both 'Unique' and 'Secret' are selected.
6. Select the “Crpt config” setting (Encryption).
Encryption Select whether to encrypt or not If the encryption function is used, setting of
when exporting. an encryption key is required by direct input.
If you push the "Encryption" key, • Type the arbitrary password using the
you can export secret information. soft keyboard
• Can enter up to 32 characters
7. Press [Execute].
8. Press [OK].

• If data export fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log.

Importing Device Information

Import device information saved on an SD card.


1. Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel.
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Select SP5-749-101(Import/Export: Import)
4. Select whether to include (On) or exclude (Off) the machine unique information.

If you select exclude (Off), the unique information such as machine IP address will not be imported.
5. Press [Encryption Key], if the encryption key was created when the file was exported.
6. Select an encryption setting.
Unique If you want to apply the unique information to the target Refer to the above
machine, select the "Unique" key. information.
Encryption If an encrypted file is selected as the import file, this
setting is required.
7. Press [Execute].
8. Press [OK].

465
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

• If data export fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log.

Possible Solutions for Import/Export Problems

The access log file is created when export/import is executed. The file is stored in the same location as
the exported device setting information file.
If an error occurs, check the log's result code in the access log file first. Values other than 0 indicate that
an error occurred.
The result code will appear in the circled area illustrated below.
- Example of a log file

If you cannot solve the problem or do not know how to solve it after checking the code, note down the
error log entry, then contact your supervisor.
Result Code Cause Solutions
2 (INVALID A file import was attempted between Import files exported from the same
REQUEST) different models or machines with model with the same device
different device configurations. configurations.
4 (INVALID Failed to write the device information Check whether the destination device is
OUTPUT DIR) to the destination device. operating normally.
7( MODULE An unexpected error occurred during Switch the power off and then back on,
ERROR) import or export. and then try the operation again. If the
error persists, contact your supervisor.
8 (DISK FULL) The available storage space on the Execute the operation again after making
external medium is insufficient. sure there is enough storage space.
9 (DEVICE Failed to write or read the log file. Check whether the path to the folder for
ERROR) storing the file or the folder in which the
file is stored is missing.

466
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Result Code Cause Solutions


20 (PART Failed to import some settings. The reason for the failure is logged in
FAILED) "NgCode". Check the code.
Reason for the Error (Ng-Name)
2. INVALID VALUE
The specified value exceeds the
allowable range.
3. PERMISSION ERROR
The permission to edit the setting is
missing.
4. NOT EXIST
The setting does not exist in the system.
5. INTERLOCK ERROR
The setting cannot be changed because
of the system status or interlocking with
other specified settings.
6. OTHER ERROR
The setting cannot be changed for some
other reason.
21 (INVALID Failed to import the file because it is Check whether the file format is correct.
FILE) in the wrong format in the external The import file should be a CSV file.
medium.
22 (INVALID The encryption key is not valid. Use the correct encryption key.
KEY)

• When exporting device information from the control panel, the data can be saved only on an
SD card.
• The file format for exports is CSV.

467
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

Card Save Function

Overview

Card Save:
• The Card Save function is used to save print jobs received by the printer on an SD card with no
print output. Card Save mode is toggled using printer Bit Switch #1 bit number 4. Card Save will
remain enabled until the SD card becomes full, or until all file names have been used.
• Captures are stored on the SD card in the folder /prt/cardsave. File names are assigned
sequentially from PRT00000.prn to PRT99999.prn. An additional file PRT.CTL will be created. This
file contains a list of all files created on the card by the card save function.
• Previously stored files on the SD card can be overwritten or left intact. Card Save SD has "Add"
and "New" menu items.
• Card Save (Add): Appends files to the SD Card. Does not overwrite existing files. If the card
becomes full or if all file names are used, an error will be displayed on the operation panel.
Subsequent jobs will not be stored.
• Card Save (New): Overwrites files in the card's /prt/cardsave directory.
Limitation:
• Card Save cannot be used with PJL Status Readback commands. PJL Status Readbacks will not
work. In addition they will cause the Card Save to fail.

Procedure

1. Turn OFF the power.


2. Insert the SD card into the service slot or the slot on the left side of the operation panel, and then
turn ON the power.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select the [Printer SP].
5. Select [SP1-XXX] .

468
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

6. Select [1001] (Bit Switch).

7. Select "Bit Switch 1 Settings", use the numeric keypad to turn bit 4 ON, and then press the "#"
button to register the change. The result should look like: 00010000. By doing this, the Card Save
option will appear in the "List/Test Print" menu.

469
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)

8. Press [Exit] to exit SP Mode.


9. Press the [User Tools] icon > [Machine Features].
10. Press [Printer Features].
11. Card Save (Add) and Card Save (New) should be displayed on the screen. Select Card Save (Add)
or Card Save (New).
12. Press [OK] and then exit the "User Tools" menu.
13. Press the [Printer] icon.
14. "Card Save" is displayed in the top left of the display panel.
15. Send a job to the printer. The Communicating light should start blinking.
16. As soon as the printer receives the data, it will be stored on the SD card automatically with no print
output. Nothing is displayed on the screen, indicating that a Card Save operation was successful.
17. Press [Reset] to exit Card Save mode.
18. Change the bit switch settings back to the default 00000000. Press [#] in the numeric keypad to
register the changes.
19. Remove the SD card after the power is turned OFF.

Error Messages

Card Save error messages:


• Init error: A card save process (e.g. card detection, change to kernel mode) failed to initialize.
• Card not found: Card cannot be detected in the slot.
• No memory: Insufficient working memory to process the job.
• Write error: Failed to write to the card.
• Other error: An unknown error occurred.
If an error occurs, pressing [OK] will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready state.

470
7.Troubleshooting

7. Troubleshooting

Self-Diagnostic Mode (D0B4)

SC Automatic Reboot (D0B4)

When an ordinary SC (pattern D) is generated, automatically reboot is performed. Automatic reboot or


reboot by user operation can be set by SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot setting out) (default value: 1
"OFF").
When a type D occurs, an automatic reboot is done or the machine display asks the customer if it can
reboot. However, when the SC occurs twice in a short time, the machine sends a report to the
@Remote server without rebooting. This is because just rebooting may not be a good solution if an SC
occurs twice.
When an automatic reboot is performed, a confirmation screen is displayed after reboot. The
confirmation screen can be canceled by pressing the [OK] key (display is not canceled only when the
main power switch is switched OFF to ON).

Screen display during reboot

• Status display on the current screen


• Post-processing ...... Post-processing during printing, etc.
• Automatic reboot ...... After operation end
Post-processing

Until automatic reboot

• Reset key (Reboot key)


Key to perform the reboot
# Cancel key is not displayed.
• Turn on spanner LED (same as when an SC is generated).

Operation during SC reboot

• The timing of SC reboot


When @Remote is enabled, and when an NRS alarm*1 is not generated, the corresponding SC is
the object of an automatic reboot.
*1 NRS alarm: Issued when an ordinary SC (type D) is generated twice while the total counter
counts 10 times.
• Time to automatic reboot
Reboot is performed 30 seconds after an engine reboot is possible, after the end of post-
processing during printing, etc.

471
7.Troubleshooting

At that time, a reboot is performed even if the MFP is operating. The engine does not start process
control when a reboot is possible.
• Automatic reboot
See the flowchart below.

• For the SC list of the automatic reboot, refer to List of Automatic Reboot Target SC (D0B4).

472
7.Troubleshooting

Service Call Conditions

Summary

The ‘SC Table’ section shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter are put into
four types. The type is determined by their reset procedures. The table shows the classification of the
SC codes.
Level Definition Reset Procedure
A The SC is immediately displayed on the operation <D0B2,D0B3>
panel when SC occurs. Reset the SC and then cycle the main
The error involves the fusing unit. The machine power off and on.
operation is disabled. The user cannot reset the <D0B4>
error. Reset the SC (set SP5-810-1) and then
cycle the main power off and on.
B When a function is selected, the SC is displayed Turn the operation switch off and on.
on the operation panel.
The machine cannot be used (downtime
mitigation).
C No display on the operation panel. Only the SC history is updated.
The machine operates as usual.
D The SC is displayed on the operation panel. Turn the main n power switch off and
The machine cannot be used (machine-error SC). on.

• If the problem concerns PCBs, first disconnect then reconnect the connectors before replacing
the PCBs.
• If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load before replacing motors
or sensors.
• When an ordinary SC (type D) is generated, an automatic reboot is performed. When an event
is reported by the customer support system, even in the event of an ordinary SC, a reboot is
not performed. During the automatic reboot, a confirmation screen is displayed after the
reboot.
• When automatic reboot occurs twice continuously, an SC is displayed without rebooting, and
logging count is performed. Also, when an SMC print is output, an "*" mark is added alongside
the SC number for clarity.
• The automatic reboot can be enabled or disabled with SP5-875-001 (D0B4 only) (SC
automatic reboot setting) (default value: OFF).
SP descriptions
• SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot: Reboot Setting) (D0B4 only)
Enables or disables the automatic reboot function when an SC error occurs.
0: The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error
473
7.Troubleshooting

code. If the same SC occurs again, the machine does not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error occurs.
The reboot is not executed for the pattern A or C.

SC Logging

When an SC is generated, the "total count value when the SC is generated" and the "SC code" are
logged. However, if the total count value during the SC is the same as last time, logging is not
performed.
Logged data can be checked by outputting an administrative report (SMC print). The SC history is
logged up to the last 10 entries, and if there are more than 10 entries, data are progressively deleted
starting from the oldest.

List of Automatic Reboot Target SC (D0B4)

Engine SC

For details of Automatic reboot, refer to SC Automatic Reboot (D0B4).

SC100

SC code Name Automatic Reboot


101-01 LED Error (Scanning) Yes
101-02 LED Error (LED illumination adjustment) Yes
102-00 LED Illumination Adjustment Error Yes
120-00 Scanner Home Position Error 1 Yes
121-00 Scanner Home Position Error 2 Yes
141-00 Black level detection error Yes
142-00 White level detection error Yes
144-00 SBU Communication Error Yes
161-20 MPU error (DRAM initialization failure) Yes

SC200

SC code Name Automatic Reboot


202-00 Polygon motor: ON timeout error Yes
203-00 Polygon motor: OFF timeout error Yes
204-00 Polygon motor: Lock signal error Yes
220-00 Laser synchronization detection error Yes
230-00 FGATE ON error Yes
231-00 FGATE OFF error Yes
240-00 LD error Yes
270-00 Image writing ASIC communication error Yes

474
7.Troubleshooting

SC code Name Automatic Reboot


272-00 LD driver communication error Yes

SC300

SC code Name Automatic Reboot


302-00 High voltage charge error Yes
350-00 ID sensor (S6) error (detailed) No
351-00 ID sensor error: Vsg measurement error (detailed) No
353-00 ID sensor (S6): Auto adjustment PWM value error (detailed) No
354-00 ID sensor (S6): Auto adjustment timeout error (detailed) No
360-01 TD sensor calibration error No
361-01 TD sensor output upper limit error (K) No
362-01 TD sensor output lower limit error (K) No
391-00 Development bias error Yes
392-00 Initial developer setting error No

SC400

SC code Name Automatic Reboot


440-00 Image transfer current error Yes

SC500

SC code Name Automatic Reboot


501-01 1st feed tray lifting error No
501-02 1st feed tray lowering error No
502-01 2nd tray (option) error (lift error) No
502-02 2nd tray (option) error (lowering error) No
503-01 3rd tray (option) error (lift error) No
503-02 3rd tray (option) error (lowering error) No
520-00 Main motor (M3) error Yes
530-01 Main fan error Yes
530-02 Exhaust fan (FAN1) error Yes
531-01 Room temperature sensor error Yes
531-02 Image temperature sensor error Yes
541-01 Thermistor (center) (H1) disconnection No
541-02 Thermistor (center) (H1) disconnection: Low voltage No
542-01 Reload failure: Thermistor deformation No
542-03 Reload failure: Heater damage No
542-04 Reload failure: Low voltage and thermistor deformation No
542-06 Reload failure: Low voltage and heater deformation No

475
7.Troubleshooting

SC code Name Automatic Reboot


543-00 Thermistor (center) (H1) high-temperature detection: Software No
544-00 Thermistor (center) (H1) high-temperature detection: Hardware No
545-01 Heater continuously heat No
545-02 Heater continuously heats: Low voltage No
547-01 Zero Cross Error (relay-contact soldering) Yes
547-02 Zero Cross Error (relay-contact fault) Yes
547-03 Zero Cross Error (low-frequency error) Yes
549-01 Temperature lowering detection No
549-02 Temperature lowering detection: Low voltage No
549-03 Temperature lowering detection: Low voltage No
549-04 Temperature lowering detection: Low voltage No
551-01 Thermistor (end) (H2) disconnection No
551-02 Thermistor (end) (H2) disconnection: Low voltage No
552-01 Reload failure: Thermistor (end) (H2) deformation No
552-03 Reload failure: Heater (edge) disconnection No
552-04 Reload failure: Thermistor (end) (H2) deformation: Low voltage No
552-06 Reload failure: Thermistor (end) (H2) deformation: Low voltage No
553-00 Thermistor (end) (H2) high-temperature detection: Software No
554-00 Thermistor (end) (H2) high-temperature detection: Hardware No
555-01 Thermistor (end) (H2) continuous lighting No
555-02 Thermistor (end) (H2) continuous lighting: Low voltage No
557-00 Zero cross frequency exceeded No
559-00 Fusing jam SC No

SC600

SC Name Automatic
code Reboot
620-01 ADF Communication error 1 Yes
620-02 ADF Communication error 2 Yes
622-00 2nd tray communication error Yes
623-00 3rd tray communication error Yes
667-01 Master Device Mode Setting Error Yes
667-40 Macaron1 Mode Setting Error Yes
669-01 EEPROM communication error: ID error during EEPROM OPEN Yes
669-02 EEPROM communication error: Channel error during EEPROM OPEN Yes
669-03 EEPROM communication error: Device error during EEPROM OPEN Yes
669-04 EEPROM communication error: Communication interrupted error during Yes

476
7.Troubleshooting

SC Name Automatic
code Reboot
EEPROM OPEN
669-05 EEPROM communication error: Communication timeout error Yes
669-06 EEPROM communication error: Not operating error during EEPROM Yes
OPEN
669-07 EEPROM communication error: Buffer full during EEPROM OPEN Yes
669-08 EEPROM communication error: No error code during EEPROM OPEN Yes
669-09 EEPROM communication error: ID error Yes
669-10 EEPROM communication error: No error code during EEPROM Close Yes
669-11 EEPROM communication error: ID error during EEPROM data write Yes
669-12 EEPROM communication error: Channel error during EEPROM data Yes
write
669-13 EEPROM communication error: Device error during EEPROM data write Yes
669-14 EEPROM communication error: Communication interrupted error during Yes
EEPROM data write
669-15 EEPROM communication error: Communication timeout error Yes
669-16 EEPROM communication error: Not operating error during EEPROM Yes
data write
669-17 EEPROM communication error: Buffer full during EEPROM data write Yes
669-18 EEPROM communication error: No error code during EEPROM data Yes
write
669-19 EEPROM communication error: ID error during EEPROM data read Yes
669-20 EEPROM communication error: Channel error EEPROM data read Yes
669-21 EEPROM communication error: Device error during EEPROM data read Yes
669-22 EEPROM communication error: Communication interrupted error during Yes
EEPROM data read
669-23 EEPROM communication error: Communication timeout error Yes
669-24 EEPROM communication error: Not operating error during EEPROM Yes
data read
669-25 EEPROM communication error: Buffer full during EEPROM data read Yes
669-26 EEPROM communication error: No error code during EEPROM data Yes
read
669-36 EEPROM communication error: Verification error Yes
669-37 EEPROM communication error: Error Detection Yes
682-01 TD sensor (S7) communication error – Invalid device ID Yes
682-06 TD sensor (S7) communication error – Channel error Yes
682-11 TD sensor (S7) communication error – Device error Yes

477
7.Troubleshooting

SC Name Automatic
code Reboot
682-16 TD sensor (S7) communication error – Communication disconnection Yes
682-21 TD sensor (S7) communication error – Communication timeout Yes
682-26 TD sensor (S7) communication error – Device operation stopped Yes
682-31 TD sensor (S7) communication error – Request buffer full Yes
682-36 TD sensor (S7) communication error – Request buffer full Yes
687-00 PER receipt failure Yes
688-00 PRREQ signal error No

SC700

SC code Name Automatic Reboot


701-03 Paper Feed Motor Driver Error (ADF) Yes
701-08 Paper Exit Motor Driver Error (ADF) Yes
702-01 Protection Device Intercept Error 1 (ADF) Yes
702-02 Protection Device Intercept Error 2 (ADF) Yes
702-03 Protection Device Intercept Error 3 (ADF) Yes
724-03 Protection Device Intercept Error No

SC900

SC code Name Automatic Reboot


990-00 Fail-safe SC Yes

Controller SC

For details of Automatic reboot, refer to SC Automatic Reboot (D0B4).

SC600

SC code Name Automatic Reboot


641-01 Engine serial communication error (Time-out) Yes
641-02 Engine serial communication error (Retry-over) Yes
641-03 Engine serial communication error (Download Error) Yes
641-04 Engine serial communication error (UART Error) Yes
670-01 Engine start up error when the machine boots up No
670-02 Engine start up error when the machine is in operation Yes
672-00 Controller start up error No
672-10 Controller start up error No
672-11 Controller start up error No
672-12 Controller start up error No
672-13 Controller start up error No

478
7.Troubleshooting

SC code Name Automatic Reboot


672-20 Controller start up error No
672-21 Controller start up error No
672-99 Controller start up error No
673-01 System application communication error (Smart operation panel) No
673-10 Operation panel Flair communication error (Smart Operation Panel) No

SC800

SC code Name Automatic Reboot


816-01 Subsystem error Yes
816-02 Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error Yes
816-03 Transition to STR was denied. Yes
816-04 Interrupt in kernel communication driver Yes
816-05 Preparation for transition to STR failed. Yes
816-07 Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error Yes
816-08 Sysarch (LPUX_ENGINE_TIMERCTRL) error Yes
816-09 Sysarch (LPUX_RETURN_FACTOR_STR) error Yes
816-10 to 12 Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error Yes
816-13 open() error Yes
816-14 Memory address error Yes
816-15 to 18 open() error Yes
816-19 Double open() error Yes
816-20 open() error Yes
816-22 Parameter error Yes
816-23, 24 read() error Yes
816-25 write () error Yes
816-26 to 28 write() communication retry error Yes
816-29, 30 read() communication retry error Yes
816-35 read() error Yes
816-36 to 40 Subsystem error Yes
855-01 Wireless LAN card error (driver attachment failure) No
861-50 Storage boot failure Yes
871-01 FCU error Yes
871-02 FCU job error (Recovery possible) Yes
871-03 FCU job error (Recovery not possible) No
890-01 PaaS function: Tampering detection No
890-02 PaaS function: Suspended No

479
7.Troubleshooting

SC900

SC Name Automatic
code Reboot
920-02 Printer error (WORK memory not acquired) No
920-04 Printer error (Filter process not started) No
921-00 Printer error (Resident font not found) No
992-00 Undefined SC occurred Yes
994-00 Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally No
undetectable.

480
7.Troubleshooting

SC Code Descriptions

SC1xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


101-01 D Lamp error (scanning)
<D0B2,D0B3> The white peak level did not reach the prescribed threshold when the white
plate was scanned.
• CIS unit (PCB4) defective
• MPU (PCB7) defective
• Harness defective
• Condensation in the scanner unit
• CIS unit (PCB4) dirty or positioned incorrectly
• White plate dirty or positioned incorrectly
1. Perform the following operations.
• Reconnect the harness of the CIS unit (PCB4).
• Reattach or clean the CIS unit (PCB4).
• Reattach or clean the white plate.
2. Replace the following parts.
• Replace the CIS unit (PCB4).
• Replace the MPU (PCB7).
• Replace the harness of the CIS unit (PCB4).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


101-01 D LED Error (Scanning)
<D0B4> The white level peak did not reach the prescribed threshold when the white guide
plate was scanned.
• Condensation in scanner unit
• Connector defective (disconnected, loose)
• LEDB defective
• SBU defective
• Harness defective
• White Reference Seal dirty or installed incorrectly
• White Guide Plate, or White Roller dirty or installed incorrectly
• MPU defective
Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again,
do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each
step.
1. Clean the white guide plate, or white roller.

481
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


2. Reconnect the following connectors:
• SBU - MPU harness
• SBU - LEDB harness (FFC)
3. Check the white reference seal that attached back of sheet-through exposure
glass. Replace the sheet-through exposure glass, if dirty or damaged.
4. Replace the white guide plate, or the white roller.
5. Replace the Scanner Carriage.
6. Replace the SBU.
7. Replace the MPU.
8. Replace the following harnesses:
• SBU - MPU harness
• SBU - LEDB harness (FFC)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


101-02 D LED Error (LED illumination adjustment)
<D0B4> The peak level did not reach the specified threshold on both sides when scanning
the white reference seal during initial adjustment LEDB lighting.
• Condensation in the scanner unit
• Connector defective (disconnected, loose)
• LEDB defective
• SBU defective
• Harness defective
• White Reference Seal dirty or installed incorrectly
• MPU defective
Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again,
do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each
step.
1. Reconnect the following connectors:
• SBU - MPU harness
• SBU - LEDB harness (FFC)
2. Check the white reference seal that attached back of sheet-through exposure
glass. Replace the sheet-through exposure glass, if dirty or damaged.
3. Replace the Scanner Carriage.
4. Replace the LEDB.
5. Replace the SBU.
6. Replace the MPU.
7. Replace the following harnesses:
• SBU - MPU harness
482
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• SBU - LEDB harness (FFC)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


102-00 D LED light adjustment error
<D0B2,D0B3> The white peak level exceeded the prescribed threshold when the white
plate was scanned after a specified number of adjustments.
• CIS unit (PCB4) defective
• MPU (PCB7) defective
• Harness defective
1. Reconnect the harness of the CIS unit (PCB4)
2. Replace the following parts
• Replace the CIS unit (PCB4)
• Replace the MPU (PCB7)
• Replace the harness of the CIS unit (PCB4)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


102-00 D LED Illumination Adjustment Error
<D0B4> The white level peak reached the prescribed threshold when the white plate was
scanned after a specified number of adjustments.
• Connector defective (disconnected, loose)
• LEDB defective
• SBU defective
• Harness defective
• MPU defective
Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again,
do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each
step.
1. Reconnect the following connectors:
• SBU - MPU harness
• SBU - LEDB harness (FFC)
2. Check the white reference seal that attached back of sheet-through exposure
glass. Replace the sheet-through exposure glass, if dirty or damaged.
3. Replace the Scanner Carriage.
4. Replace the LEDB.
5. Replace the SBU.
6. Replace the MPU.
7. Replace the following harnesses:

483
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• SBU - MPU harness
• SBU - LEDB harness (FFC)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


120-00 D Scanner home position error 1
<D0B2,D0B3> • The scanner home position sensor does not go OFF even if the scanner
moves 30 mm at homing.
• The scanner home position sensor does not go OFF even if the scanner
moves 13 mm at the white balance adjustment.
• The scanner home position sensor goes ON before the scanner
reaches the specified position (in the sensor OFF area) at returning
from the scanning position.
• This SC is issued only when the error signal of the scanner HP sensor
(S1) is detected three times consecutively to prevent the sensor
detection error due to some noise.
• Motor driver defective
• Motor defective
• Scanner HP sensor (S1) defective
• Harness defective
• Timing belt, pulley, wire, or carriage not installed correctly
1. Perform the following operations.
• Check the harness.
• Check the timing belt, pulley, wire, or carriage installation.
2. Replace the following parts.
• Replace the scanner motor (M1).
• Replace the scanner HP sensor (S1).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


120-00 D Scanner Home Position Error 1
<D0B4> The scanner home position sensor (S42) does not go OFF.
Details:
Error detection timing
• During homing (when the machine is turned ON or when it returns from
energy saving mode)
• During an automatic adjustment (when the machine is turned ON or when it
returns from energy saving mode)
• During a scan from the ADF or exposure glass.
• At original size detection operation
484
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• Connector defective (disconnected, loose)
• Scanner motor driver (MPU) defective
• Scanner motor defective
• Scanner home position sensor defective
• Harness defective
• Timing belt, pulley, wire, or carriage not installed correctly
Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again,
do the following steps.
1. Reconnect the all connectors.
2. Check the timing belt, pulley, wire, or carriage installation.
3. Replace the following parts:
• Replace the HP sensor.
• Replace the MPU.
• Replace the scanner motor.
• Replace the harness.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


121-00 D Scanner home position error 2
<D0B2,D0B3> • The scanner home position sensor does not go ON even if the scanner
moves 480 mm (from the sensor off area) or 30 mm (from the sensor on
position) at homing.
• The scanner home position sensor goes OFF on starting the DF
scanning/Book scanning.
• The scanner home position sensor does not go ON when the scanner
reaches the specified position (in the sensor ON area) from the
scanning position
• This SC is issued only when the error signal of the scanner HP sensor
(S1) is detected three times consecutively to prevent the sensor
detection error due to some noise.
• Motor driver defective
• Motor defective
• Scanner HP sensor (S1) defective
• Harness defective
• Timing belt, pulley, wire, or carriage not installed correctly
1. Perform the following operations.
• Check the harness.
• Check the timing belt, pulley, wire, or carriage installation.
2. Replace the following parts.
485
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• Replace the scanner motor (M1).
• Replace the scanner HP sensor (S1).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


121-00 D Scanner Home Position Error 2
<D0B4> The scanner home position sensor (S42) does not go ON.
Details:
Error detection timing
• During homing (when the machine is turned ON or when it returns from
energy saving mode)
• During an automatic adjustment (when the machine is turned ON or when it
returns from energy saving mode)
• During a scan from the ADF or exposure glass.
• At original size detection operation
• Connector defective (disconnected, loose)
• Scanner motor driver (MPU) defective
• Scanner motor defective
• Scanner home position sensor defective
• Harness defective
• Timing belt, pulley, wire, or carriage not installed correctly
Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again,
do the following steps.
1. Reconnect the all connectors.
2. Check the timing belt, pulley, wire, or carriage installation.
3. Replace the following parts:
• Replace the HP sensor.
• Replace the MPU.
• Replace the scanner motor.
• Replace the harness.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


141-00 D Black level detection error
<D0B2,D0B3> The black level cannot be adjusted within the specified value.
• CIS unit (PCB4) defective
• MPU (PCB7) defective
• Harness defective
1. Reconnect the harness of the CIS unit (PCB4).

486
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


2. Replace the following parts.
• Replace the CIS unit (PCB4)
• Replace the MPU (PCB7).
• Replace the harness of the CIS unit (PCB4).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


141-00 D Black level detection error
<D0B4> The black level cannot be reached the target during auto gain control.
• Scanner Carriage defective
• Harness defective
• MPU defective
Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again,
do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each
step.
1. Reconnect the following connectors:
• Scanner Carriage - MPU harness (FFC)
2. Replace the Scanner Carriage.
3. Replace the MPU.
4. Replace the following harnesses:
• Scanner Carriage - MPU harness (FFC)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


142-00 D White level detection error
<D0B2,D0B3> The white level cannot be adjusted within the specified value.
• CIS unit (PCB4) defective
• MPU (PCB7) defective
• Harness defective
• Condensation in the scanner unit
• CIS unit (PCB4) dirty or positioned incorrectly
• White plate dirty or positioned incorrectly
1. Perform the following operations.
• Reconnect the harness of the CIS unit (PCB4).
• Reattach or clean the CIS unit (PCB4).
• Reattach or clean the white plate.
2. Replace the following parts.
• Replace the CIS unit (PCB4)
• Replace the MPU (PCB7).

487
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• Replace the harness of the CIS unit (PCB4).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


142-00 D White level detection error
<D0B4> The white level cannot be adjusted to the second target level within the target
during auto gain control.
• Condensation in the scanner unit
• Scanner Carriage defective
• Harness defective
• Connector defective (disconnected, loose)
• White plate dirty or installed incorrectly
• MPU defective
Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again,
do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each
step.
1. Reconnect the following connectors:
• Scanner Carriage - MPU harness (FFC)
• SBU - LEDB harness (FFC)
2. Check the white reference seal that attached back of sheet-through exposure
glass. Replace the sheet-through exposure glass, if dirty or damaged.
3. Replace the scanner carriage.
4. Replace the MPU.
5. Replace the following harnesses:
• Scanner Carriage - MPU harness (FFC)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


144-00 D Scanner communication error
<D0B2,D0B3> The machine cannot communicate in the MPU (PCB7), or the
communication result is unexpected.
• Unexpected communication
• Power failure
1. Reconnect the harness of the CIS unit (PCB4).
2. Replace the following parts.
• Replace the MPU (PCB7).
• Replace the harness of the CIS unit (PCB4).

488
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


144-00 D SBU Communication Error
<D0B4> • The machine cannot detect that the SBU is connected.
• The machine cannot communicate with the SBU.
• The communication data is incorrect.
• Scanner Carriage defective
• MPU defective
• Harness defective
Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again,
do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each
step.
1. Reconnect the following connectors:
• Scanner Carriage - MPU harness (FFC)
2. Replace the Scanner Carriage.
3. Replace the MPU.
4. Replace the following harnesses:
• Scanner Carriage - MPU harness (FFC)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


161-20 D MPU error (DRAM initialization failure)
<D0B4> An error occurred during performed every time the machine is turned on, or returns
to full operation from energy saving mode.
• MPU board defective (Macaron/ DRAM device connection error)
• DRAM device defective
• Reconnect the all connectors on MPU board if they are disconnected, or
loose.
• Replace the MPU.

SC2xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


202-00 D Polygon motor: ON timeout error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> Polygon motor locking has not been detected when 8 seconds have
elapsed after the machine turned the polygon motor ON.
• The interface harness to the polygon motor driver damaged or not
connected correctly.
• Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective
• Polygon motor drive pulse cannot be output correctly. (Polygon
controller)

489
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• Check the harness of the laser unit (disconnected, etc.).
• Check if the laser unit connector is connected.
• Check if the PSU 24 V power is output.
• Replace the interface harness of the laser unit.
• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the MPU (PCB7)
• Replace the PSU (PCB1)

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


203-00 D Polygon motor: OFF timeout error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> Polygon motor has not stopped when 3 seconds have elapsed after
the machine turned the polygon motor OFF.
• The interface harness to the polygon motor driver damaged or not
connected correctly.
• Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective.
• Polygon motor drive pulse cannot be output correctly.
• Check the harness of the laser unit (disconnected, etc.).
• Check if the laser unit connector is connected.
• Check if the PSU 24 V power is output.
• Replace the interface harness of the laser unit.
• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the MPU (PCB7).
• Replace the PSU (PCB1).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


204-00 D Polygon motor: Lock signal error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> An error is detected during the polygon motor rotation.
• The interface harness to the polygon motor driver damaged or not
connected correctly.
• Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective.
• Check the harness of the laser unit (disconnected, etc.).
• Check if the laser unit connector is connected.
• Check if the PSU 24 V power is output.
• Replace the interface harness of the laser unit.
• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the MPU (PCB7).
• Replace the PSU (PCB1).

490
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


220-00 D Laser synchronization detection error
<D0B2,D0B3> An error of the laser synchronizing is detected at the LD lighting.
• The interface harness to the synchronization detection unit damaged or
not connected correctly.
• Synchronization detection board defective
• Beam does not enter photodetector.
• Check the harness of the laser unit (disconnected, etc.).
• Check if the laser unit connector is connected.
• Replace the interface harness of the laser unit.
• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the MPU (PCB7).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


220-00 D Laser synchronization detection error
<D0B4> An error of the laser synchronizing is detected at the LD lighting.
• Laser unit defective
• MPU defective
• LDB harness defective
• Condensation of the laser unit.
• Reconnect the following harnes:
• Laser unit - MPU harness
• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the MPU.
• Replace the following harnes:
• Laser unit - MPU harness

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


230-00 D FGATE ON error
<D0B4> Write image length signal (FGATE signal) absent even at the time to start writing.
• MPU failure (Write ASIC failure)
• Connection error between MPU engine and controller (Harness disconnection,
etc. between CTL ASIC and write ASIC).
• Replace the MPU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


231-00 D FGATE OFF error
<D0B4> When the write image length signal (FGATE signal) is absent even at the time to

491
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


stop writing.
• MPU failure (Write ASIC failure)
• Connection error between MPU engine and controller (Harness disconnection,
etc. between CTL ASIC and write ASIC).
• Replace the MPU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


240-00 D LD error
<D0B4> • When the LD current during LD lighting exceeds the specfied value.
• When the LD driver initialization operation at the time of LD lighting does not
complete normally.
• When the harness of the LDB becomes disconnected (connector
disconnection).
• LDB harness connection error.
• LD characteristic degradation (LD breakdown, current-to-optical output
characteristic degradation).
• LDB failure
• LDB harness defect.
• Reconnect the following harnes:
• Laser unit - MPU harness
• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the MPU.
• Replace the following harnesses:
• Laser unit - MPU harness

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


270-00 D Image writing ASIC communication error
<D0B4> When communication between the CPU and writing ASIC was not performed
correctly.
• MPU failure
• Replace the MPU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


272-00 D LD driver communication error
<D0B4> When the power supply for the LD board is defective.
• LDB harness defective
• MPU defective (LD5V Power error)

492
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• LDB defective (LD drive error)
• Reconnect the following harnes:
• Laser unit - MPU harness
• Replace the MPU.
• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the following harnesses:
• Laser unit - MPU harness

SC3xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


302-00 D High voltage charge error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> The machine detects "1" (error) 10 times consecutively when
monitoring the output error signal every 20 msec (excluding in Sleep
mode or with the front door open).
• PCDU defective.
• HVPS (PCB3) board harness defective.
• Replace the PCDU.
• Replace the harness of the HVPS (PCB3) board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


350-00 D ID sensor (S6) error (detailed)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
Factory Use only
One of the conditions below occurs during the ID sensor detection
(only when the SP5-995-001 is set to “1”).
• Vsp > 2.5V
• Vsg < 2.5V
• Vsp = 0V
• Vsg = 0V
• ID sensor (S6) defective.
• ID sensor (S6) harness damaged.
• ID sensor (S6) not connected correctly.
• MPU (PCB7) defective.
• Laser unit defective.
• Imaging density fault.
• HVPS (PCB3) board defective.
• ID sensor (S6) dirt.

493
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• Clean the ID sensor (S6).
• Replace the ID sensor (S6).
• Replace and reset the ID sensor (S6) harness.
• Replace the MPU (PCB7).
• Replace the HVPS (PCB3) board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


351-00 D ID sensor error: Vsg measurement error (detailed)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
Factory Use only
Only when the following two conditions are met during the ID sensor
detection (only when the SP5-995-001 is set to “1”).
• Vsg is 5V and LED drive current is minimum (PWM=0).
• ID sensor (S6) defective.
• ID sensor (S6) harness damaged.
• ID sensor (S6) not connected correctly.
• MPU (PCB7) defective.
• Laser unit defective.
• Imaging density fault.
• HVPS (PCB3) board defective.
• Clean the ID sensor (S6).
• Replace the ID sensor (S6).
• Replace and reset the ID sensor (S6) harness.
• Replace the MPU (PCB7).
• Replace the HVPS (PCB3) board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


353-00 D ID sensor (S6): Auto adjustment PWM value error (detailed)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
Factory Use only
One of the following conditions occurs when the ID sensor (S6) is
adjusting Vsg automatically, this SC is issued (only when the SP5-
995-001 is set to “1”).
• Vsg is less than 4 V with the LED drive current set to maximum
(PWM=1023).
• Vsg is more than 4 V with the LED drive current set to minimum
(PWM=1).
• ID sensor (S6) defective.
494
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• ID sensor (S6) harness damaged.
• ID sensor (S6) not connected correctly.
• MPU (PCB7) defective.
• Laser unit defective.
• Imaging density fault.
• HVPS (PCB3) board defective.
• ID sensor (S6) dirt.
• Clean the ID sensor (S6).
• Replace the ID sensor (S6).
• Replace and reset the ID sensor (S6) harness.
• Replace the MPU (PCB7).
• Replace the HVPS (PCB3) board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


354-00 D ID sensor (S6): Auto adjustment timeout error (detailed)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
Factory Use only
If Vsg is not automatically adjusted to 4.0±0.2 V twice consecutively
when the ID sensor (S6) is adjusting Vsg automatically, this SC is
issued (only when the SP5-995-001 is set to “1”).
• ID sensor (S6) defective.
• ID sensor (S6) harness damaged.
• ID sensor (S6) not connected correctly.
• MPU (PCB7) defective.
• Laser unit defective.
• Imaging density fault.
• HVPS (PCB3) board defective.
• ID sensor (S6) dirt.
• Clean the ID sensor (S6).
• Replace the ID sensor (S6).
• Replace and reset the ID sensor (S6) harness.
• Replace the MPU (PCB7).
• Replace the HVPS (PCB3) board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


360-01 D TD sensor calibration error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> The error of the TD sensor calibration is determined if the TD sensor
calibration is not out of the target range described below. The TD
495
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


sensor calibration error is detected three times consecutively, this SC
is issued.
• Upper threshold (SP2-992-001).
• Lower threshold (SP2-992-002).
• TD sensor defective.
• TD sensor harness not connected correctly or damaged.
• Not initial developer.
• Replace the harness of the TD sensor (S7).
• Insert the connector of the TD sensor (S7).
• Replace the development unit.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


361-01 D TD sensor output upper limit error (K)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> TD sensor output:
The Vt (SP2-220-004) output continuously exceeds the upper limit
threshold value (SP2-992-001) for the time of the upper limit threshold
(SP2-992-003).
TD sensor (S7) is not connected correctly.
• Check if the TD sensor (S7) is connected properly.
• Check the TD Sensor harness (disconnected, etc.).
• Replace the development unit if any errors detected.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


362-01 D TD sensor output lower limit error (K)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> TD sensor output:
The Vt (SP2-220-004) output is continuously below the lower limit
threshold value (SP2-992-002) for the time of the lower limit threshold
(SP2-992-004).
TD sensor (S7) is not connected correctly.
• Check if the TD sensor connector is connected.
• Check the TD Sensor harness (disconnected, etc.).
• Replace the development unit if some error is detected.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


391-00 D Development bias error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> The machine detects “0” (abnormality) 10 times consecutively in
signal output from the detection target (PWM)

496
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• PCDU defective.
• HVPS (PCB3) board harness defective.
• Replace the PCDU.
• Replace the harness of the HVPS (PCB3) board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


392-00 D Initial developer setting error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> • A read error for the ID sensor pattern at the initial developer
setting is detected.
• If the Vsp output is more than 2.5 V, the machine detects that
there is no developer, and displays SC.
• ID sensor (S6) defective.
• The OPC drum does not rotate.
• The development roller does not rotate.
• Replace the ID sensor (S6).
• Replace the developer.
• Replace the PCDU.

SC4xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


440-00 D Image transfer current error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> The machine detects "1" (error) 10 times consecutively when
monitoring the output error signal every 20 msec (excluding in Sleep
mode or with the front door open).
Right door not closed correctly.
The PCDU is not in the correct position.
HVPS (PCB3) board defective.
HVPS (PCB3) board harness defective.
• Close the right door correctly.
• Reinstall the PCDU correctly or replace the PCDU.
• Replace the HVPS (PCB3) board.
• Replace the harness of the HVPS (PCB3) board.

SC5xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


501-01 D 1st feed tray lifting error
<D0B2,D0B3> The machine does not detect the upper limit sensor for 10,000 msec when
497
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


the tray bottom plate is raised either at tray initialization (upper limit not
detected) or to check the tray bottom plate and amount of remaining paper.
* If the error occurs three times consecutively, it is handled as a 1st feed tray
lifting error. Up to two times, the error is handled by a tray reset.

• Tray lift motor error/connector disconnected


• Upper limit sensor error/connector disconnected
• Harness disconnected
• PCB malfunction
• Remaining paper or other object is stuck in between the tray and tray lift
motor.
• Paper not set properly
• Bottom plate broken
• Pickup roller abnormality
• Pickup arm broken
• Remaining paper or other object stuck inside the tray.
• Turn the power off and on.
• Pull out the tray and check the paper. Check whether there is too much
paper or it is skewed.
• Remove the tray and check whether there are any paper scraps on the
tray lift motor.
• Check whether there are any paper scraps on the upper limit sensor.
• Check the connection of the upper limit sensor connector.
• Check the connections of the IOB connectors (upper limit sensor, tray
lift motor).
• Check the connection of the tray lift motor connector.
• Check the upper limit sensor. Run an IO check on the upper limit sensor
and replace it if faulty.
• Check the tray lift motor. Run an IO check on the tray lift motor and
replace it if faulty.
• Check the paper feed unit harness, and replace it if faulty.
• Check for problems with the harness between the IOB and the tray lift
motor and replace the harness if any problems are found.
• Check for problems with the harness between the IOB and the paper
feed unit and replace the harness if any problems are found.
• Replace the IOB.

498
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


501-01 B 1st feed tray lifting error
<D0B4> The machine does not detect the upper limit sensor for 10,000 msec when the tray
bottom plate is raised either at tray initialization (upper limit not detected) or to
check the tray bottom plate and amount of remaining paper.
* If the error occurs three times consecutively, it is handled as a 1st feed tray lifting
error. Up to two times, the error is handled by a tray reset.

• Tray lift motor error/connector disconnected


• Upper limit sensor error/connector disconnected
• Harness disconnected
• PCB malfunction
• Remaining paper or other object is stuck in between the tray and tray lift
motor.
• Paper not set properly
• Bottom plate broken
• Pickup roller abnormality
• Pickup arm broken
• Remaining paper or other object stuck inside the tray.
• Turn the power off and on.
• Pull out the tray and check the paper. Check whether there is too much paper
or it is skewed.
• Remove the tray and check whether there are any paper scraps on the tray lift
motor.
• Check whether there are any paper scraps on the upper limit sensor.
• Check the connection of the upper limit sensor connector.
• Check the connections of the IOB connectors (upper limit sensor, tray lift
motor).
• Check the connection of the tray lift motor connector.
• Check the upper limit sensor. Run an IO check on the upper limit sensor and
replace it if faulty.
• Check the tray lift motor. Run an IO check on the tray lift motor and replace it if
faulty.
• Check the paper feed unit harness, and replace it if faulty.
• Check for problems with the harness between the IOB and the tray lift motor
and replace the harness if any problems are found.
• Check for problems with the harness between the IOB and the paper feed unit
and replace the harness if any problems are found.
• Replace the IOB.
499
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


501-02 D 1st feed tray lowering error
<D0B2,D0B3> When the upper limit and paper load are simultaneously detected at power-
on or tray installation, the upper limit detection sensor does not turn off even
when the tray is lowered for 1,000 msec.
* If the machine detects an error five times consecutively, it is handled as a
1st feed tray lowering error. Up to four times, the error is handled by a tray
reset.
• Tray lift motor abnormality / disconnected connector
• Upper limit sensor abnormality / disconnected connector
• Harness disconnection
• PCB malfunction
• Remaining paper or other object is stuck in between the tray and tray lift
motor.
• Paper not set properly
• Bottom plate broken
• Pickup roller abnormality
• Pickup arm broken
• Remaining paper or other object stuck inside the tray.
• Turn the power off and on.
• Pull out the tray and check the paper. Check whether there is too much
paper or it is skewed.
• Remove the tray and check whether there are any paper scraps in the
tray lift motor.
• Check whether there are any paper scraps on the upper limit sensor.
• Check the connection of the upper limit sensor connector.
• Check the connections of the IOB connectors (upper limit sensor, tray
lift motor).
• Check the connection of the tray lift motor connector.
• Check the upper limit sensor. Run an IO check on the upper limit sensor
and replace it if faulty.
• Check the tray lift motor. Run an IO check on the tray lift motor and
replace it if faulty.
• Check the paper feed unit harness, and replace it if faulty.
• Check for problems with the harness between the IOB and the tray lift
motor and replace the harness if any problems are found.
• Check for problems with the harness between the IOB and the paper
feed unit and replace the harness if any problems are found.
500
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• Replace the IOB

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


501-02 B 1st feed tray lowering error
<D0B4> When the upper limit and paper load are simultaneously detected at power-on or
tray installation, the upper limit detection sensor does not turn off even when the
tray is lowered for 1,000 msec.
* If the machine detects an error five times consecutively, it is handled as a 1st
feed tray lowering error. Up to four times, the error is handled by a tray reset.
• Tray lift motor abnormality / disconnected connector
• Upper limit sensor abnormality / disconnected connector
• Harness disconnection
• PCB malfunction
• Remaining paper or other object is stuck in between the tray and tray lift
motor.
• Paper not set properly
• Bottom plate broken
• Pickup roller abnormality
• Pickup arm broken
• Remaining paper or other object stuck inside the tray.
• Turn the power off and on.
• Pull out the tray and check the paper. Check whether there is too much paper
or it is skewed.
• Remove the tray and check whether there are any paper scraps in the tray lift
motor.
• Check whether there are any paper scraps on the upper limit sensor.
• Check the connection of the upper limit sensor connector.
• Check the connections of the IOB connectors (upper limit sensor, tray lift
motor).
• Check the connection of the tray lift motor connector.
• Check the upper limit sensor. Run an IO check on the upper limit sensor and
replace it if faulty.
• Check the tray lift motor. Run an IO check on the tray lift motor and replace it if
faulty.
• Check the paper feed unit harness, and replace it if faulty.
• Check for problems with the harness between the IOB and the tray lift motor
and replace the harness if any problems are found.
• Check for problems with the harness between the IOB and the paper feed unit
501
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


and replace the harness if any problems are found.
• Replace the IOB

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


502-01 B 2nd tray (option) error (lift error)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> The tray lift sensor does not detect the tray bottom plate or stack of
paper for 10 seconds after the machine starts to initialize all units.
* If the machine detects an error three times consecutively, this SC is
issued.
• Tray lift motor (M4) error or harness disconnected.
• Tray lift sensor error or harness disconnected.
• Each harness damaged.
• Mainboard defective.
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the tray
and tray lift motor (M4) or in the tray.
• Paper set fault.
• Bottom plate defective.
• Paper feed roller missing.
• Tray lift sensor feeler defective.
• Reload the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter.
• Replace the tray lift motor (M4).
• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the tray lift sensor.
• Replace the main board.
• Replace the tray.
• Replace the paper feed roller.
• Replace the tray lift sensor feeler.
• Replace the bottom plate.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


502-02 B 2nd tray (option) error (lowering error)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> The tray lift sensor does not turn off for 1,000 msec. after the tray
bottom plate has started to lower when the upper limit and paper load
are simultaneously detected at the power-on or tray installation.
* If the machine detects an error five times consecutively, this SC is
issued.
502
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• Tray lift motor (M4) error or harness disconnected.
• Tray lift sensor error or harness disconnected.
• Each harness damaged.
• Mainboard defective.
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the tray
and tray lift motor (M4) or in the tray.
• Paper set fault.
• Bottom plate defective.
• Paper feed roller missing.
• Tray lift sensor feeler defective.
• Reload the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter.
• Replace the tray lift motor (M4).
• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the tray lift sensor.
• Replace the main board.
• Replace the paper feed roller.
• Replace the tray lift sensor feeler
• Replace the tray bottom plate.
• Replace the tray.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


503-01 B 3rd tray (option) error (lift error)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> The tray lift sensor does not detect the tray bottom plate or stack of
paper for 10 seconds after the machine starts to initialize all units.
* If the machine detects an error three times consecutively, this SC is
issued.
• Tray lift motor (M4) error or harness disconnected.
• Tray lift sensor error or harness disconnected.
• Each harness damaged.
• Mainboard defective.
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the tray
and tray lift motor (M4).
• Paper set fault.
• Tray bottom plate defective.
• Paper feed roller missing.
• Tray lift sensor feeler defective.
503
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught in the tray.
• Reload the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter.
• Replace the tray lift motor (M4).
• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the tray lift sensor.
• Replace the main board.
• Replace the tray.
• Replace the paper feed roller.
• Replace the tray lift sensor feeler
• Replace the tray bottom plate.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


503-02 B 3rd tray (option) error (lowering error)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> The tray lift sensor does not turn off for 1,000 msec. after the tray
bottom plate has started to lower when the upper limit and paper load
are simultaneously detected at the power-on or tray installation.
* If the machine detects an error five times consecutively, this SC is
issued.
• Tray lift motor (M4) error or harness disconnected.
• Tray lift sensor error or harness disconnected.
• Each harness damaged.
• Mainboard defective.
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the tray
and tray lift motor (M4).
• Paper set fault.
• Bottom plate defective.
• Paper feed roller missing.
• Tray lift sensor feeler defective.
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught in the tray.
• Reload the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter.
• Replace the tray lift motor (M4).
• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the tray lift sensor.
• Replace the main board.
504
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• Replace the tray.
• Replace the paper feed roller.
• Replace the tray lift sensor feeler
• Replace the bottom plate.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


520-00 D Main motor (M3) error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> "High" signal is detected continuously 20 times or more when the
main motor (M3) is turned on.
Detection cycle: 100 msec
• Motor lock due to overload to the drive chain.
• Motor driver defective.
• Replace the main motor (M3).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


530-01 D Main fan error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> A motor lock error is detected for 5 seconds or more when the main
fan (FAN2) is turned on.
Main fan motor defective.
Replace the main fan (FAN2).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


530-02 D Exhaust fan (FAN1) error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> A motor lock error is detected for 5 seconds or more when the exhaust
fan (FAN1) is turned on.
Exhaust fan (FAN1) motor defective.
Replace the exhaust fan (FAN1).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


531-01 D Room temperature sensor error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> Temperature thermistor output is 0.56V or less or 3.0V or more.
• Temperature sensor disconnected.
• Temperature sensor malfunction.
• Reconnect the temperature sensor connector.
• Replace the temperature sensor.
• Replace the temperature sensor harness.
• Replace the IOB.

505
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


531-02 D Image temperature sensor error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> Temperature thermistor output is 0.56V or less or 3.0V or more.
• Temperature sensor disconnected.
• Temperature sensor malfunction.
• Reconnect the temperature sensor connector.
• Replace the temperature sensor.
• Replace the temperature sensor harness.
• Replace the IOB.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


541-01 A Thermistor (center) (H1) disconnection
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> Temperature of 0°C or lower is detected ten or more times
consecutively for 4 seconds.
• Measurement interval: 0.1 sec.
• Thermistor (center) (H1) disconnection.
• Thermistor (center) (H1) not connected correctly.
• Reconnect the thermistor (center) (H1).
• Replace the thermistor (center) (H1).
• Clear this SC by executing SP5-810-001.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


541-02 A Thermistor (center) (H1) disconnection: Low voltage
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> An error is detected only when the input voltage at power-on is low.
• A temperature of 0°C or lower is detected for 5 seconds
continuously.
• The error is detected ten or more times.
• Measurement interval: 0.1 sec.
• Thermistor (center) (H1) disconnection.
• Thermistor (center) (H1) not connected correctly.
• Reconnect the thermistor (center) (H1).
• Replace the thermistor (center) (H1).
• Clear this SC by executing SP5 -810-001.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


542-01 A Reload failure: Thermistor deformation
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> The temperature of 22°C or lower is detected five times consecutively

506
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


for 2 seconds.
• Measurement begins 2 seconds after the heater is turned on.
• Measurement interval: 0.1 sec.
• If the temperature is less than 45°C, measurement starts two
seconds after the temperature reaches 45°C.
• If the reload temperature is reached during measuring, the
measurement is canceled.
• Inclination measurement is not performed during pre-rotation.
• Thermistor deformed.
• Thermistor out of position.
• Out of guaranteed input voltage.
• Replace the thermistor (center) (H1).
• Clear this SC by executing SP5-810-001.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


542-03 A Reload failure: Heater damage
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> Normal (no pre-rotation):
• The reload temperature is not reached for 17 seconds after
heater control starts.
Pre-rotation:
• The reload temperature is not reached for 21 seconds after
heater control starts.
• Heater damaged.
• After over-heat prevention.
• Replace the heater.
• Clear this SC by executing SP5-810-001.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


542-04 D Reload failure: Low voltage and thermistor deformation
<D0B2,D0B3> An error is detected only when the input voltage at power-on is low.
The temperature of 17°C or lower is detected five times consecutively for 3
seconds.
• Measurement begins 15 seconds after the heater is turned on.
• Measurement interval: 0.1 sec.
• If the temperature is less than 45°C, measurement starts 15 seconds
after the temperature reaches 45°C.
• If the reload temperature is reached during measuring, the

507
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


measurement is canceled.
• Inclination measurement is not performed during pre-rotation.
• Thermistor deformed.
• Thermistor out of position.
• Out of guaranteed input voltage.
• After over-heat prevention.
• Replace the thermistor (center) (H1).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


542-04 C Reload failure: Low voltage and thermistor deformation
<D0B4> An error is detected only when the input voltage at power-on is low.
The temperature of 17°C or lower is detected five times consecutively for 3
seconds.
• Measurement begins 15 seconds after the heater is turned on.
• Measurement interval: 0.1 sec.
• If the temperature is less than 45°C, measurement starts 15 seconds after the
temperature reaches 45°C.
• If the reload temperature is reached during measuring, the measurement is
canceled.
• Inclination measurement is not performed during pre-rotation.
• Thermistor deformed.
• Thermistor out of position.
• Out of guaranteed input voltage.
• After over-heat prevention.
• Replace the thermistor (center) (H1).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


542-06 D Reload failure: Low voltage and heater deformation
<D0B2,D0B3> An error is detected only when the input voltage at power-on is low.
• Normal (no pre-rotation):
The reload temperature is not reached for 24 seconds after heater
control starts.
• Pre-rotation:
The reload temperature is not reached for 28 seconds after heater
control starts.
• Heater damaged.
• After over-heat prevention.

508
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• Replace the heater.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


542-06 C Reload failure: Low voltage and heater deformation
<D0B4> An error is detected only when the input voltage at power-on is low.
• Normal (no pre-rotation):
The reload temperature is not reached for 24 seconds after heater control
starts.
• Pre-rotation:
The reload temperature is not reached for 28 seconds after heater control
starts.
• Heater damaged.
• After over-heat prevention.
• Replace the heater.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


543-00 A Thermistor (center) (H1) high-temperature detection: Software
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> An error is detected when the temperature of 230°C or higher is
detected for 1 second continuously.
• Detection with the thermistor (center) (H1).
• Detection time: 10 or more.
• Measurement interval: 0.1 sec.
• Triac short-circuit.
• MPU (PCB7) defective.
• Replace the MPU (PCB7).
• Clear this SC by executing SP5-810-001.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


544-00 A Thermistor (center) (H1) high-temperature detection: Hardware
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> An error is detected when the temperature of 250°C or higher is
detected.
• Detection with the thermistor (center) (H1).
• Triac short-circuit.
• MPU (PCB7) control board defective.
• Fusing control error.
• Replace the MPU (PCB7).
• Clear this SC by executing SP5-810-001.

509
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


545-01 A Heater continuously heat
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> After reloading, the heater (center) turns on at full power for 10
seconds or more continuously.
• Thermistor detection error.
• Heater damaged.
• After over-heat prevention.
• Replace the thermistor (center) (H1).
• Replace the heater.
• Clear this SC by executing SP5-810-001.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


545-02 D Heater continuously heats: Low voltage
<D0B2,D0B3> Detected only when the waiting for input voltage is the same as the normal
voltage.
After reloading, the heater (center) turns on at full power for 10 seconds or
more continuously.
• Thermistor detection error.
• Heater damaged.
• After over-heat prevention.
• Replace the thermistor (center) (H1).
• Replace the heater.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


545-02 C Heater continuously heats: Low voltage
<D0B4> Detected only when the waiting for input voltage is the same as the normal
voltage.
After reloading, the heater (edge) turns on at full power for 10 seconds or more
continuously.
• Thermistor detection error.
• Heater damaged.
• After over-heat prevention.
• Replace the thermistor (center) (H1).
• Replace the heater.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


547-01 D Zero Cross Error (relay-contact soldering)

510
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> When a zero cross signal is detected consecutively three times or
more, this SC is issued.
When a zero cross signal is detected consecutively less than three
times, the error counter for the zero cross signal increments, and then
the machine retries the checking out the zero cross signal again.
• Fusing relay defective (contact soldering, contact open).
• Drive circuit of the fusing relay defective.
• PSU fuse (24 VS) damaged.
• Frequency instability of the input power line.
• Replace the fusing relay.
• Replace the fuse of the PSU (PCB1).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


547-02 D Zero Cross Error (relay-contact fault)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> When a zero cross signal is detected consecutively three times or
more, this SC is issued.
When a zero cross signal is detected consecutively less than three
times, the machine tries to turn off the relay of the fusing unit.
• Fusing relay defective (contact soldering, contact open).
• Drive circuit of the fusing relay defective.
• PSU fuse (24 VS) damaged.
• Frequency instability of the input power line.
• Replace the fusing relay.
• Replace the fuse of the PSU (PCB1).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


547-03 D Zero Cross Error (low-frequency error)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> When the low frequency is detected once, the SC557 is determined.
When a low frequency is detected twice or more, this SC is issued.
• Fusing relay defective (contact soldering, contact open)
• Drive circuit of the fusing relay defective.
• PSU fuse (24 VS) damaged.
• Frequency instability of the input power line.
• Replace the fusing relay.
• Replace the fuse of the PSU (PCB1).

511
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


549-01 D Temperature lowering detection
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> If the target temperature of -30°C is detected for more than 30
seconds after the thermistor (center) has performed all corrections 30
seconds after the registration roller restarts, this SC is issued.
• Heater damaged during paper feeding.
• Heater not connected correctly.
• Reconnect the heater.
• Replace the heater.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


549-02 D Temperature lowering detection: Low voltage
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> If the target temperature of -30°C is detected for more than 30
seconds after the thermistor (end) has performed all corrections 30
seconds after the registration roller restarts, this SC is issued.
• Heater damaged during paper feeding.
• Loose connectors.
• Lowering the input voltage.
• Reconnect the heater.
• Replace the heater.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


549-03 D Temperature lowering detection: Low voltage
<D0B2,D0B3> When [specified temperature B] is not reached within the time specified with
SP1-105-050 before the low voltage job and after rotation is completed.
• Heater damaged during paper feeding.
• Loose connectors.
• Lowering the input voltage.
• Reconnect the heater.
• Replace the heater.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


549-03 C Temperature lowering detection: Low voltage
<D0B4> When [specified temperature B] is not reached within the time specified with SP1-
105-050 before the low voltage job and after rotation is completed.
• Heater damaged during paper feeding.
• Loose connectors.
• Lowering the input voltage.

512
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• Reconnect the heater.
• Replace the heater.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


549-04 D Temperature lowering detection: Low voltage
<D0B2,D0B3> After the machine has entered the CPM down level 3 in the low voltage
operation mode, the center or edge thermistor temperature <= down
temperature is detected continuously for the time specified with SP1-124-
104 (default: 30 sec).
• Heater damaged during paper feeding.
• Loose connectors.
• Lowering the input voltage.
• Reconnect the heater.
• Replace the heater.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


549-04 C Temperature lowering detection: Low voltage
<D0B4> After the machine has entered the CPM down level 3 in the low voltage operation
mode, the center or edge thermistor temperature <= down temperature is detected
continuously for the time specified with SP1-124-104 (default: 30 sec).
• Heater damaged during paper feeding.
• Loose connectors.
• Lowering the input voltage.
• Reconnect the heater.
• Replace the heater.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


551-01 A Thermistor (end) (H2) disconnection
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> Temperature of 0°C or lower is detected for 4 seconds continuously.
• Detection time: 10 or more.
• Measurement interval: 0.1 sec.
• Thermistor (end) (H2) disconnection.
• Thermistor (end) (H2) not connected correctly.
• Reconnect the thermistor (end).
• Replace the thermistor (end).
• Clear this SC by executing SP5-810-001.

513
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


551-02 A Thermistor (end) (H2) disconnection: Low voltage
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> • An error is detected only when the input voltage at power-on is
low.
• A temperature of 0°C or lower is detected for 5 seconds
continuously.
• Detection time: 10 or more.
• Detection interval: 0.1 seconds.
• Thermistor (end) (H2) disconnection.
• Thermistor (end) (H2) not connected correctly.
• Reconnect the thermistor (end).
• Replace the thermistor (end).
• Clear this SC by executing SP5-810-001.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


552-01 A Reload failure: Thermistor (end) (H2) deformation
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> The temperature of 20°C or lower is detected five times consecutively
for 2 seconds.
• Measurement begins 2 seconds after the heater is turned on.
• Measurement interval: 0.1 sec.
• If the temperature is less than 45°C, measurement starts two
seconds after the temperature reaches 45°C.
• If the reload temperature is reached during measuring, the
measurement is canceled.
• Measurement is not performed during pre-rotation.
• Thermistor deformed.
• Thermistor out of position.
• Out of guaranteed input voltage.
• Replace the thermistor (end).
• Clear this SC by executing SP5-810-001.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


552-03 A Reload failure: Heater (edge) disconnection
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> Normal (no pre-rotation):
• The reload temperature is not reached for 18 seconds after
heater control starts.
Pre-rotation:
• The reload temperature is not reached for 22 seconds after

514
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


heater control starts.
• Heater (edge) damaged.
• After over-heat prevention.
• Replace the heater (edge).
• Clear this SC by executing SP5-810-001.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


552-04 D Reload failure: Thermistor (end) (H2) deformation: Low voltage
<D0B2,D0B3> An error is detected only when the input voltage at power-on is low.
The temperature of 14°C or lower is detected five times consecutively for 3
seconds.
• Measurement begins 15 seconds after the heater is turned on.
• Measurement interval: 0.1 sec.
• If the temperature is less than 45°C, measurement starts 15 seconds
after the temperature reaches 45°C.
• If the reload temperature is reached during measuring, the
measurement is canceled.
• Measurement is not performed during pre-rotation.
• Thermistor (end) (H2) deformed.
• Thermistor (end) (H2) out of position.
• Out of guaranteed input voltage.
• After over-heat prevention.
• Replace the thermistor (end).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


552-04 C Reload failure: Thermistor (end) (H2) deformation: Low voltage
<D0B4> An error is detected only when the input voltage at power-on is low.
The temperature of 14°C or lower is detected five times consecutively for 3
seconds.
• Measurement begins 15 seconds after the heater is turned on.
• Measurement interval: 0.1 sec.
• If the temperature is less than 45°C, measurement starts 15 seconds after the
temperature reaches 45°C.
• If the reload temperature is reached during measuring, the measurement is
canceled.
• Measurement is not performed during pre-rotation.
• Thermistor (end) (H2) deformed.

515
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• Thermistor (end) (H2) out of position.
• Out of guaranteed input voltage.
• After over-heat prevention.
• Replace the thermistor (end).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


552-06 D Reload failure: Thermistor (end) (H2) deformation: Low voltage
<D0B2,D0B3> An error is detected only when the input voltage at power-on is low.
• Normal (no pre-rotation): The reload temperature is not reached for 27
seconds after heater control starts.
• Pre-rotation: The reload temperature is not reached for 30 seconds after
heater control starts.
• Heater damaged.
• After over-heat prevention.
• Replace the heater.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


552-06 C Reload failure: Thermistor (end) (H2) deformation: Low voltage
<D0B4> An error is detected only when the input voltage at power-on is low.
• Normal (no pre-rotation): The reload temperature is not reached for 27
seconds after heater control starts.
• Pre-rotation: The reload temperature is not reached for 30 seconds after
heater control starts.
• Heater damaged.
• After over-heat prevention.
• Replace the heater.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


553-00 A Thermistor (end) (H2) high-temperature detection: Software
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> • Temperature above 230°C is detected for 1 second continuously.
• Detection with the thermistor (end).
Detection time: 10 or more.
Measurement interval: 0.1 sec.
• Triac short-circuit.
• MPU (PCB7) defective.
• Replace the MPU (PCB7).
• Clear this SC by executing SP5-810-001.

516
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


554-00 A Thermistor (end) (H2) high-temperature detection: Hardware
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> A temperature of 250°C or higher is detected by the thermistor (end).
• Triac short-circuit.
• MPU (PCB7) defective.
• Fusing control error.
• Replace the MPU (PCB7).
• Clear this SC by executing SP5-810-001.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


555-01 A Thermistor (end) (H2) continuous lighting
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> After reloading, the heater (center) turns on at full power for 10
seconds or more continuously.
• Thermistor (end) (H2) detection error.
• Heater damaged.
• After over-heat prevention.
• Replace the thermistor (end).
• Replace the heater.
• Clear this SC by executing SP5-810-001.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


555-02 D Thermistor (end) (H2) continuous lighting: Low voltage
<D0B2,D0B3> After reloading, the heater (edge) turns on at full power for 10 seconds or
more continuously.
• Thermistor (end) (H2) detection error.
• Heater damaged.
• After over-heat prevention.
• Turn the power off and on.
• Replace the thermistor (end).
• Replace the heater (edge).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


555-02 C Thermistor (end) (H2) continuous lighting: Low voltage
<D0B4> After reloading, the heater (edge) turns on at full power for 20 seconds or more
continuously.
• Thermistor (end) (H2) detection error.
• Heater damaged.

517
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• After over-heat prevention.
• Turn the power off and on.
• Replace the thermistor (end).
• Replace the heater (edge).

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


557-00 C Zero cross frequency exceeded
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> When a low frequency is detected once, this SC is issued.
Powerline noise.
Turn the power off and on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


559-00 A Fusing jam SC
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> A fusing jam, which does not reach the paper exit sensor (S5), is
detected three times consecutively.
• If paper exits normally (passes the paper exit sensor (S5)), the
count will be cleared.
• This detection is effective only when the setting of SP1-159-001
(Fusing jam 3 times SC setting) is set to “1 (on)”. (Default: 0 (off))
• The fusing jam counter value is retained after turning the power
off/on.
• The fusing jam counter is reset when clearing this SC after
SC559-00 has been issued.
Paper winding around the fusing roller.
• Replace the fusing unit.
• Clear this SC by executing SP5-810-001.

SC6xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


620-01 D ADF Communication error 1
<D0B4> After ADF connection was recognized on startup, an error is detected.
(disconnection detection)
• ADF connection error
• ADF defection
• MPU defective
• Noise contamination
• Check if all connectors related to ADF are connected securely.

518
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


Reconnect the connectors if they are disconnected, or loose.
• Check for the existence of noise or software bugs in the machine and ADF
firmware. Run the firmware update when a new firmware is released.
• Check the harness. Replace the harness if it is disconnected, or damaged.
• Check for MPU malfunction and replace the MPU if any abnormalities exist.
• Check if there are any signs of a short circuit on the ADF Main Board. If there
are any defects, replace the board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


620-02 D ADF Communication error 2
<D0B4> When detecting a retry due to a communication error after initially connecting
successfully, or when detecting an incompatible ADF unit connection (i.e., an ADF
model code that does not comply with the standard)
• ADF connection error
• ADF defection
• MPU defective
• Noise contamination
• Incompatible ADF unit connection (ADF model code not compliant with the
standard)
• Do not use an incompatible ADF. Replace it with a compatible ADF.
• Perform the same recovery procedures as the SC620-01 if there is recurrence
when using a compatible ADF.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


622-00 D 2nd tray communication error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> • An error occurs during the line connection between the main
machine and the optional PFU (2nd tray).
• A communication error report is received between the main
machine and the optional PFU (2nd tray).
• The 2nd paper tray's main board defective.
• MPU (PCB7) defective.
• 2nd tray and the machine are not connected correctly.
• Reconnect the 2nd tray connection cable.
• Replace MPU (PCB7).
• Replace the 2nd tray.

519
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


623-00 D 3rd tray communication error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> • An error occurs during the line connection between the main
machine and the optional PFU (3rd tray).
• A communication error report is received between the main
machine and the optional PFU (3rd tray).
• 2nd tray main board defective.
• 3rd tray main board defective.
• 2nd tray and 3rd tray not connected correctly.
• Reconnect the 2nd tray and 3rd tray connection cable.
• Replace the 3rd tray.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


641-01 D Engine serial communication error (Time-out)
<D0B4> No response over the specified time.
• MPU or software failure
• Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


641-02 D Engine serial communication error (Retry-over)
<D0B4> When commands are sent in the normal mode, communication fails over the upper
limit numbers (3 times) of command byte retry.
• MPU or software failure
• Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


641-03 D Engine serial communication error (Download Error)
<D0B4> In the download command mode (ESIF_LECI_DLCOM) or download data mode
(ESIF_LECI_DLDAT), a communication error is returned from engine.
• MPU or software failure
• Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


641-04 D Engine serial communication error (UART Error)
<D0B4> UART receive errors (Break condition, Framing, Parity or Overrun error) are
detected.
• MPU or software failure
• Turn the main power off/on.

520
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


667-01 D Master Device Mode Setting Error
<D0B4> The machine detects the CPU mode error when starting up, or recovery from
energy saving mode.
Board defects (parts mounting defects, solder scraps,etc.)
Recovery via automatic reboot

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


667-40 D Macaron1 Mode Setting Error
<D0B4> The machine detects the Macaron1 mode error when starting up, or recovery from
energy saving mode.
Board defects (parts mounting defects, solder scraps,etc.)
Recovery via automatic reboot

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


669-01 D EEPROM communication error – Access-type designation error
<D0B2,D0B3>
669-02 D EEPROM communication error – Bus error
<D0B2,D0B3>
669-03 D EEPROM communication error – Device error
<D0B2,D0B3>
669-04 D EEPROM communication error – Communication abort error
<D0B2,D0B3>
669-05 D EEPROM communication error – Communication failed error
<D0B2,D0B3>
669-06 D EEPROM communication error – Device access inhibited
<D0B2,D0B3>
669-07 D EEPROM communication error – Buffer full error
<D0B2,D0B3>
669-08 D EEPROM communication error – Request parameter error
<D0B2,D0B3>
When the machine retries three times after an error report has been
received in the EEPROM communication, but the machine does not recover
the communication, this SC is issued.
• Noise
• EEPROM not connected
• EEPROM mounted in reverse

521
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• EEPROM defective
EEPROM not connected:
• Reinstall the EEPROM on the MPU (PCB7).
EEPROM mounted in reverse:
• Mount the EEPROM correctly on the MPU (PCB7).
EEPROM defective:
• Replace the EEPROM on the MPU (PCB7).

SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


669-01 D EEPROM communication error: ID error during EEPROM OPEN
<D0B4>
669-02 D EEPROM communication error: Channel error during EEPROM OPEN
<D0B4>
669-03 D EEPROM communication error: Device error during EEPROM OPEN
<D0B4>
669-04 D EEPROM communication error: Communication interrupted error during EEPROM
<D0B4> OPEN
669-05 D EEPROM communication error: Communication timeout error
<D0B4>
669-06 D EEPROM communication error: Not operating error during EEPROM OPEN
<D0B4>
669-07 D EEPROM communication error: Buffer full during EEPROM OPEN
<D0B4>
669-08 D EEPROM communication error: No error code during EEPROM OPEN
<D0B4>
669-09 D EEPROM communication error: ID error
<D0B4>
669-10 D EEPROM communication error: No error code during EEPROM Close
<D0B4>
669-11 D EEPROM communication error: ID error during EEPROM data write
<D0B4>
669-12 D EEPROM communication error: Channel error during EEPROM data write
<D0B4>
669-13 D EEPROM communication error: Device error during EEPROM data write
<D0B4>
669-14 D EEPROM communication error: Communication interrupted error during EEPROM
<D0B4> data write

522
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


669-15 D EEPROM communication error: Communication timeout error
<D0B4>
669-16 D EEPROM communication error: Not operating error during EEPROM data write
<D0B4>
669-17 D EEPROM communication error: Buffer full during EEPROM data write
<D0B4>
669-18 D EEPROM communication error: No error code during EEPROM data write
<D0B4>
669-19 D EEPROM communication error: ID error during EEPROM data read
<D0B4>
669-20 D EEPROM communication error: Channel error EEPROM data read
<D0B4>
669-21 D EEPROM communication error: Device error during EEPROM data read
<D0B4>
669-22 D EEPROM communication error: Communication interrupted error during EEPROM
<D0B4> data read
669-23 D EEPROM communication error: Communication timeout error
<D0B4>
669-24 D EEPROM communication error: Not operating error during EEPROM data read
<D0B4>
669-25 D EEPROM communication error: Buffer full during EEPROM data read
<D0B4>
669-26 D EEPROM communication error: No error code during EEPROM data read
<D0B4>
669-36 D EEPROM communication error: Verification error
<D0B4>
669-37 D EEPROM communication error: Error Detection
<D0B4>
An error is notified during EEPROM communication and the machine does not
recover after three retries.
• Electromagnetic noise
• EEPROM defective
• MPU defective
Power cycle the machine to see if the error reoccurs. If the SC occurs again, do the
following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power off/on after each
step.
1. Re-install the EEPROM on the MPU.

523
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


2. Replace the EEPROM on the MPU.
3. Replace the MPU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


670-01 D Engine start up error when the machine boots up
<D0B4> • /ENGRDY signal was not asserted when the machine was turned on.
• PCI I/F is not linked up when the machine returns from energy saving mode.
• EC/PC/SC response was not received within specified time from power on.
• Writing to Rapi driver failed (the other party not found through PCI).
• MPU is down / unstable
• MPU defective
• Check if the MPU is connected securely.
• Replace the MPU board.
• Replace the PSU board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


670-02 D Engine start up error when the machine is in operation
<D0B4> MPU reset unexpectedly.
• CPU reset by software
• CPU reset by anomaly CPU
• CPU reset by hardware defect / noise
• Hardware defect
• Check the machine and CTL firmware version.
• Run the firmware update when there is a new firmware released.
• Check if the MPU is connected securely.
• Replace the MPU board.
• Replace the PSU board.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


672-00 D Controller start up error
<D0B4> After the machine was powered on, communication between the MPU (controller)
and the operation panel was not established.
• Controller stalled
• Board installed incorrectly
• MPU defective
• Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective
• Controller late

524
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• Turn the main switch off and on.
• Reconnect the harness of the operation panel.
• Replace the cable/harness between operation panel and MPU.
• Replace the MPU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


672-10 D Controller start up error
<D0B4> After the machine was powered on, communication between the MPU (controller)
and the operation panel was not established.
• Controller stalled
• Board installed incorrectly
• MPU defective
• Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective
• Controller late
• Turn the main switch off and on.
• Reconnect the harness of the operation panel.
• Replace the cable/harness between operation panel and MPU.
• Replace the MPU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


672-11 D Controller start up error
<D0B4> Communication error (send) between operation panel and MPU (controller) after
machine is powered on.
• Controller stalled
• Board installed incorrectly
• MPU defective
• Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective
• Controller late
• Turn the main switch off and on.
• Reconnect the harness of the operation panel.
• Replace the cable/harness between operation panel and MPU.
• Replace the MPU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


672-12 D Controller start up error
<D0B4> Communication with MPU (controller) was interrupted after a normal startup.
• Controller stalled

525
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• Board installed incorrectly
• MPU defective
• Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective
• Controller late
• Turn the main switch off and on.
• Reconnect the harness of the operation panel.
• Replace the cable/harness between operation panel and MPU.
• Replace the MPU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


672-13 D Controller start up error
<D0B4> After the machine was powered on, communication between the MPU (controller)
and the operation panel was not established.
• Controller stalled
• Board installed incorrectly
• MPU defective
• Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective
• Controller late
• Turn the main switch off and on.
• Reconnect the harness of the operation panel.
• Replace the cable/harness between operation panel and MPU.
• Replace the MPU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


672-20 D Controller start up error
<D0B4> This error occurs when communication between the MPU (controller) and
operation panel could not be established after powering on the machine, or when
communication between the MPU (controller) and operation panel was interrupted
after a normal startup.
Harness connection fault
• Replace the USB cable/harness between operation panel and MPU.
• Replace the MPU.
• Replace the operation panel.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


672-21 D Controller start up error
<D0B4> This error occurs when communication between the MPU (controller) and

526
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


operation panel could not be established after powering on the machine, or when
communication between the MPU (controller) and operation panel was interrupted
after a normal startup.
MPU (controller) defective
• Replace the MPU (controller).
• Replace the USB cable/harness of the MPU (controller).
• Replace the operation panel.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


672-99 D Controller start up error
<D0B4> After the machine was powered on, communication between the controller and the
operation panel was not established, or communication with controller was
interrupted after a normal startup.
• Controller stalled
• Board installed incorrectly
• MPU defective
• Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective
• Controller late
• Turn the main switch off and on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


673-01 D System application communication error (Smart operation panel)
<D0B4> The system application (Monitor Service) of Smart Operation Panel performed
abnormal operation.
The system application (Monitor Service) of Smart Operation Panel ended
abnormally.
• Press the Reboot button on the screen of the SC.
• Turn the main switch off and on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


673-10 D Operation panel Flair communication error (Smart Operation Panel)
<D0B4> This SC is issued only for the machine that has the Smart Operation Panel
installed.
• Communication between Smart Operation Panel and main machine (this is
called "Flair communication") is not sent to Smart Operation Panel.
The CATS module (controller) did not see the response to notification of monitoring
service module (operation panel).

527
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• Turn the main power OFF/ON.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


682-01 D TD sensor (S7) communication error – Invalid device ID
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
682-06 D TD sensor (S7) communication error – Channel error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
682-11 D TD sensor (S7) communication error – Device error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
682-16 D TD sensor (S7) communication error – Communication disconnection
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
682-21 D TD sensor (S7) communication error – Communication timeout
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
682-26 D TD sensor (S7) communication error – Device operation stopped
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
682-31 D TD sensor (S7) communication error – Request buffer full
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
682-36 D TD sensor (S7) communication error – Request buffer full
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
When the machine retries three times after receiving notification of an
abnormality during EEPROM communication but cannot recover
communication
• Remove and reinstall the PCDU
• Disconnect and reconnect the harness (MPU side) between the
MPU and TD sensor (S7)
• Replace the PCDU
• Replace the harness between the MPU and TD sensor (S7)
• Replace the MPU

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


687-00 D PER receipt failure
<D0B4> Even though 120 seconds have elapsed after RAPI-PES (request for image
transfer) is issued, a RAPI-PER receipt is not received from the MPU.
• Defective MPU
• Noise
Power cycle the machine to see if the error reoccurs. If the SC occurs again, do
the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power off/on after each

528
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


step.
1. Update the firmware
2. Reconnect the following connectors:
• ADF - MPU harness
3. Replace the MPU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


688-00 D PRREQ signal error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> When registration does not restart within the prescribed period of time
(40 seconds) after the registration roller arrives at the waiting position
because a ready to send images notification (PREQ) is not sent by the
controller.
Controller problem
• Check whether the firmware is the latest version.
• Update the firmware to the latest version.
• Repeat the SC using the copy/print procedure used when the SC
occurred.

SC7xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


701-03 D Paper Feed Motor Driver Error (ADF)
<D0B4>
701-08 D Paper Exit Motor Driver Error (ADF)
<D0B4>
Detection of error signal from motor driver.
• Encoder disconnection
• Encoder connector dropout
• Encoder defective
• Overload
• Motor deterioration
• Check that the board, relay, and motor connectors are connected securely (no
disconnection or looseness). Reconnect any connector that is disconnected or
loose.
• Check the harness from the board to the motor. Replace the harness if it is
disconnected or damaged.
• Check that the motor runs, is not overloaded, and is properly driven. Replace
the motor if there are any abnormalities.

529
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


• Check if there are any signs of a short circuit. Replace the parts if there are
any defects.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


702-01 D Protection Device Intercept Error 1 (ADF)
<D0B4> When original source 5V power supply is ON, protection device intercept of 24V
power supply system is detected.
Any of feed motor, transport motor, reverse solenoid, paper feed solenoid, paper
feed clutch and FAN motor defective, a harness short-circuit occurs, and the
protection device of the 24V power supply system intercepts.
• Check that the board, relay, and motor/solenoid/clutch connectors for the
motor, solenoid, and clutch are connected properly (no disconnection or
looseness). Reconnect any connector that is disconnected or loose.
• Check the harness from the board to the motor/solenoid/clutch. Replace the
harness if it is disconnected or damaged.
• Check that the motor/solenoid/clutch runs (output check), is not overloaded,
and is properly driven. Replace the motor/solenoid/clutch if there are any
abnormalities.
• Check if there are any signs of a short circuit. Replace the parts if there are
any defects.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


702-02 D Protection Device Intercept Error 2 (ADF)
<D0B4> When original source 5V power supply is ON, protection device intercept of
24VOUT power supply system is detected.
Solenoid defective or harness short-circuit occurs in 24VOUT power supply
system.
• Check that the board, relay, and solenoid connectors are connected securely
(no disconnection or looseness). Reconnect any connector that is
disconnected or loose.
• Check the harness from the board to the solenoid. Replace the harness if it is
disconnected or damaged.
• Check that the solenoid runs (output check). Replace the solenoid if there are
any abnormalities.
• Check if there are any signs of a short circuit. Replace the parts if there are
any defects.

530
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


702-03 D Protection Device Intercept Error 3 (ADF)
<D0B4> When original source 5V power supply is ON, protection device intercept of 5VE
power supply system is detected.
Sensor defective or a harness short-circuit occur in 5VE power supply system.
• Check that the board, relay, and solenoid connectors for Original Set Sensor
are connected securely. Reconnect any connector that is disconnected or
loose.
• Check the harness for the Original Set Sensor from the board to the sensor.
Replace the harness if it is disconnected, or damaged.
• Check if the Original Set Sensor turns OFF/ON (INPUT Check). Replace the
part if there are any defects.
• Check if there are any signs of a short circuit. Replace the parts if there are
any defects.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


702-04 D Protection Device Intercept Error
<D0B3> When a protection device interruption of 24V/5V/5VE power supply system is
detected in the ADF set state.
Short-circuit or motor soleniod defect due to pinching of the harness inside the
ADF.
• The target parts that need to be checked are the Original set sensor (S18),
ADF pick-up solenoid (SOL3), ADF main motor (M6), ADF inverter solenoid
(SOL2) ,ADF registration sensor (S20), ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21), ADF
cover sensor (S19).
1. Check if the connector of the target part is connected securely. Reconnect the
connector if it is disconnected, or loose.
2. Check the harness for the target part. Replace the harness if it is
disconnected, or damaged.
3. Check if the motor runs, has no overloads, and is properly driven. Replace the
parts if there are any defects.
4. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit. Replace the parts if there are
any defects.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


724-03 B Protection Device Intercept Error
<D0B4> Blown fuse discovered when detecting the 1 bin tray set (either or both of the
+5VE/+24V fuses are blown)

531
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


1 bin tray harness pinching, short circuit, etc.
• Replace the 1 bin tray control board
• Replace parts at location of 1 bin tray failure

SC8xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


816-01 D Subsystem error
<D0B4>
816-02 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
<D0B4>
816-03 D Transition to STR was denied.
<D0B4>
816-04 D Interrupt in kernel communication driver
<D0B4>
816-05 D Preparation for transition to STR failed.
<D0B4>
816-07 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
<D0B4>
816-08 D Sysarch (LPUX_ENGINE_TIMERCTRL) error
<D0B4>
816-09 D Sysarch (LPUX_RETURN_FACTOR_STR) error
<D0B4>
816-10 to D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
12
<D0B4>
816-13 D open() error
<D0B4>
816-14 D Memory address error
<D0B4>
816-15 to D open() error
18
<D0B4>
816-19 D Double open() error
<D0B4>
816-20 D open() error
<D0B4>
816-22 D Parameter error

532
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


<D0B4>
816-23, 24 D read() error
<D0B4>
816-25 D write () error
<D0B4>
816-26 to D write() communication retry error
28
<D0B4>
816-29, 30 D read() communication retry error
<D0B4>
816-35 D read() error
<D0B4>
816-36 to D Subsystem error
40
<D0B4>
• Energy saving I/O subsystem defective
• Energy saving I/O subsystem detected a MPU error (non response).
• Error was detected during preparation for transition to STR.
1. Turn the main power off/on.
2. Update the controller firmware and the subsystem firmware to the latest
version.
3. Disable the STR shift function by SP5-191-001 (Power Str Set).
4. Replace the MPU.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


855-01 B Wireless LAN card error (driver attachment failure)
<D0B4> Wireless LAN card error (wireless LAN card: 802.11 is covered)
• Defective wireless LAN card
• Loose connection
1. Turn the main power OFF/ON.
2. Replace wireless LAN card

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


861-50 D Storage boot failure
<D0B4> Access to the storage device fails when recovery from energy saving.
No response from the storage device.
1. Turn the main power OFF/ON.

533
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


2. If the problem persists, replace the storage device.

No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


871-01 D FCU error
<D0B4> An error occurred when FCS detects FCU defective.
• Time-out error
• Abnormal Parameter
1. Turn the main power OFF/ON.
2. Update the firmware if more recent firmware was released.

No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


871-02 D FCU job error (Recovery possible)
<D0B4> This SC occurs when the FCU has detected a job error (failure to start or complete
a job) that may be recovered by auto reboot.
-
1. Turn the main power OFF/ON.
2. Update the firmware if more recent firmware was released.

No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


871-03 D FCU job error (Recovery not possible)
<D0B4> This SC occurs when the FCU has detected a job error (failure to start or complete
a job) that will not be recovered by auto reboot.
-
1. Turn the main power OFF/ON.
2. Update the firmware if more recent firmware was released.

No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


890-01 A PaaS* function: Tampering detection
<D0B4> PaaS data in NVRAM and on USB flash drive do not match at startup.
Occurs when product replacement was performed under certain conditions with
respect to equipment for which PaaS functionality was activated even once.
1. Execute SP5-760-002.
2. Turn the main power OFF/ON.
3. Execute SP5-760-024.
4. Turn the main power OFF/ON.
5. After rebooting, check the SP5-760-001(PaaS Mode) value is “0” to confirm
PaaS mode.

534
7.Troubleshooting

* PaaS stands for “Printer as a Service”. It is a remote service like the @remote service
No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
890-02 D PaaS function: Suspended
<D0B4> This SC occurs when the PaaS function is suspended because of an internal or
external factor (receiving a request from PaaS-PF to suspend).
The SC occurs due to the following factors when the PaaS function is activated:
• Exceeds the specified number of printing pages.
• Receives a request to suspend from the PaaS-PF while PaaS is installed.
• Cannot establish communication with the PaaS-PF over an extended period of
time (approx. 1 month) while PaaS is installed.
The warning dialog box displayed when this SC occurs contains instructions.
Follow the instructions to solve the problem.

SC9xx

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


903-00 D Total counter error
<D0B2,D0B3> • If the counter values (4 bits) for the machine and mirroring agree, the
SUM value of the machine is recalculated, and it does not agree with
the SUM value of upper 4 bits, this SC is issued.
• If the counter values (4 bits) for the machine and mirroring do not agree,
recalculate the SUM values for the machine and mirroring. If the values
for both machine and mirroring do not agree with the SUM value of
upper 4 bits, this SC is issued.
EEPROM defective
Replace the EEPROM.

SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


920-02 B Printer error (WORK memory not acquired)
<D0B4> When an error is detected in the application, which makes continued operation
impossible.
• Software bug
• Unexpected hardware configuration (such as insufficient memory)
• Turn the main power off/on.
• Increase the memory storage capacity.

SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


920-04 B Printer error (Filter process not started)
<D0B4> When an error is detected in the application, which makes continued operation

535
7.Troubleshooting

SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


impossible.
• Software bug
• Unexpected hardware configuration (such as insufficient memory)
• Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


921-00 B Printer error (Resident font not found)
<D0B4> Resident font was not found at printer startup.
Preinstalled font files not found.
Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


990-00 D Fail-safe SC
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> An unexpected error occurred in the software.
System error
Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


992-00 D Undefined SC occurred
<D0B4> An error not controlled by the system occurred (the error does not come under any
other SC code).
• Software defective
• Incorrect SC code from previous machine
Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution


994-00 C Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally undetectable
<D0B4> An error occurred because the number of records exceeded the limit for images
managed in the service layer of the firmware.
This can occur if there are too many application screens open on the operation
panel.
Logging only.

536
7.Troubleshooting

Jam Detection

Jam Description and Position Code

• Position code: Shows the location of a jam. Appears on the operation panel.
These are lists of codes for the main machine and peripheral devices. Please note:
• Late jam. The paper has failed to arrive within the prescribed time due to a jam that has occurred
upstream of the referenced sensor.
• Lag jam. The paper has failed to leave the location of the referenced sensor within the prescribed
time due to a jam downstream of the referenced sensor.

Main Machine

No. Jam Description Position Code


1 Initial jam *1
2 Tray 1 no feed A
3 Optional PFU 1 no feed Y1
4 Optional PFU 2 no feed Y2
5 Bypass paper tray no feed A
6 Duplex no feed Z
7 Optional PFU 1 paper feed sensor: Late jam Y1
8 Registration sensor (S16): Late jam A
10 Exit sensor: Late jam C
11 Optional PFU 1 paper feed sensor: Lag jam Y1
12 Optional PFU 2 paper feed sensor: Lag jam Y2
13 Registration sensor (S16): Lag jam B
14 Exit sensor: Lag jam C
15 Exit sensor (duplex reverse): Lag jam Z

*1 Initial Jam

Jam Description Position Code


Main Machine
Registration sensor (S16) B
Exit sensor C
ADF registration sensor (S20) P
Optional PFU
PFU 1 Y1
PFU 2 Y2

537
7.Troubleshooting

Sensor Locations

538
7.Troubleshooting

Vertical Streaks on Copies due to Scanning Problems (D0B4)

Overview

Marks on prints and copies are mostly due to dirt on the DF exposure glass [A], generally caused by
adhesive contaminants (such as ball point pen ink and correction fluid).

Compared to non-adhesive contaminants (such as paper fragments and eraser dust), adhesive
contaminants are more likely to lead to complaints from customers because of the following:
• Vertical streaks caused by adhesive contaminants are more visible in terms of image quality.
• Unless removed by cleaning, adhesive contaminants continue to produce vertical streaks, while
non-adhesive contaminants stop producing streaks after they are dislodged.
• Many adhesive contaminants are difficult to remove by cleaning.
The ADF that is provided with this machine "Machine Features Settings" a system (non-contact
scanning) to reduce vertical streaks caused by adhesive contaminants.
Contact scanning: Non-contact scanning:
Other ADFs ADF for this machine
In contact scanning, the whole of the original By means of the Mylar sheet [B], originals are kept
comes into contact with the DF exposure glass slightly above the DF exposure glass [A],
[A] so that non-adhesive contaminants can be preventing adhesive contaminants from adhering to
removed. the glass.

The ADF for this machine can be converted from non-contact scanning to contact scanning for users
who wish to reduce vertical streaks caused by non-adhesive contaminants.
SP No. Contact scanning Non-contact scanning
SP4-688-001 103% 106%

539
7.Troubleshooting

SP No. Contact scanning Non-contact scanning


SP4-871-003 0.00% 0.11%

Converting the ADF to Contact Scanning

1. Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
2. Remove the ADF front cover [A] ( x1).

3. Remove the Scanning guide plate [B] ( [A]x1).

4. Remove the plastic guides [A] on the sides of the scanning guide plate( x1).

The screw-attached picture below shows the front side.

5. Attach the guides for contact scanning. Each guide has a hole [A].

The orange-colored illustration below shows the front side.

540
7.Troubleshooting

6. Mount the scanning guide plate, taking care not to damage the sheet [A].

7. Peel off the gap sheet [A] from the DF exposure glass with your hands.

8. Clean the DF exposure glass [A] with alcohol.


To avoid paper jams, make sure adhesive is completely removed.

541
7.Troubleshooting

9. Turn the main switch on.


10. Start the SP mode.
11. Select SP4-688-001 (DF Density Adjustment) and change the setting from "104" to "103" for the
contact scanning.
12. Change the DF magnification (SP4-871-003) from [0.11%] to [0.00%].

• When returning the setting back to non-contact scanning, return the SP values also.

542
7.Troubleshooting

Other Troubleshooting

Noise from Transfer Roller Bearings

Symptom

The transfer roller bearings emit noise.

Items to be prepared

Q-tips (cotton buds)


Alcohol
Air duster

Action

Clean the transfer roller bearings following the procedure below.


1. Remove the transfer roller (Transfer Roller).
2. Remove the front side transfer roller bearing [A], and the rear side transfer roller bearing [B].

543
7.Troubleshooting

3. Dampen a Q-tip (cotton bud) with alcohol.

4. Using the Q-tip (cotton bud), clean the front side transfer roller bearing and rear side transfer roller
bearing.
1. Clean the front side transfer roller bearing and rear side transfer roller bearing from the
inside [A].

2. Clean the front side transfer roller bearing and rear side transfer roller bearing from
the outside [A].

Clean the inside of each bearing up to the where there is a height difference.

544
7.Troubleshooting

5. Blow off any remaining debris after cleaning using the air blower.

545
8.Detailed Descriptions

8. Detailed Descriptions

Overview

Component Layout

D0B2,D0B3

The above illustration is the D0B3 model.


D0B2: No ADF
No. Description No. Description
1 Scanner motor (M1) 11 Paper feed roller
2 Paper exit/reverse roller 12 Pickup roller
3 Hot roller 13 PCDU
4 Pressure roller 14 Polygon mirror motor (M2)
5 Duplex transport roller 15 Laser unit
6 PCU (drum) 16 Toner bottle
7 Development roller 17 Scanner HP sensor (S1)
8 Registration roller 18 CIS unit (PCB4)

546
8.Detailed Descriptions

No. Description No. Description


9 Transfer roller 19 Exposure glass
10 Friction roller

D0B4

No. Description No. Description


1 Scanner motor (M26) 11 Paper feed roller
2 Paper exit/reverse roller 12 Pickup roller
3 Hot roller 13 PCDU
4 Pressure roller 14 Polygon mirror motor (M2)
5 Duplex transport roller 15 Laser unit
6 PCU (drum) 16 Toner bottle
7 Development roller 17 Sheet - through exposure glass
8 Registration roller 18 Exposure glass
9 Transfer roller 19 Sensor board unit (SBU) (PCB7)
10 Friction roller 20 Auto paper size (APS) sensors (S44),(S45)

547
8.Detailed Descriptions

ADF (D0B3)

No. Description No. Description


1 ADF registration sensor (S20) 6 ADF inverter solenoid (SOL2)
2 ADF main motor (M6) 7 ADF main board (PCB8)
3 ADF pick-up solenoid (SOL3) 8 ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21)
4 Original set sensor (S18) 9 Original width sensor (S17)
5 ADF cover sensor (S19)

ADF (D0B4)

548
8.Detailed Descriptions

No. Description No. Description


1 Original Width Sensor (LL) (SN5) 13 Original Length Sensor (M) (SN13)
2 Original Width Sensor (L) (SN4) 14 Original Length Sensor (L) (SN12)
3 Original Width Sensor (M) (SN3) 15 DF Position Sensor (SN9)
4 Original Width Sensor (S) (SN2) 16 Transport Motor (MT2)
5 Original Width Sensor (SS) (SN1) 17 Feed Clutch (CLT1)
6 Skew Correction Sensor (SN10) 18 Cooling Fan Motor (MT3)
7 Registration Sensor (SN6) 19 Cover Switch (SWC1)
8 Original Exit Sensor (SN7) 20 Pick-up Solenoid (SL2)
9 Original Set Sensor (SN8) 21 Feed Motor (MT1)
10 Stamp Solenoid (SL3) 22 Inverter Solenoid (SL1)
11 Original Sensor (SN11) 23 DF Main Board (BD1)
12 Original Length Sensor (S) (SN14) - -

549
8.Detailed Descriptions

Scanner (D0B2,D0B3)

No. Description No. Description


1 Scanner HP sensor (S1) 4 Scanner motor (M1)
2 CIS (PCB4) 5 Operation panel
3 Platen cover sensor (S2) 6 Original size sensors (S3)

550
8.Detailed Descriptions

Scanner (D0B4)

No. Description No. Description


1 Smart operation panel 5 Scanner lamp unit
2 Scanner home position sensor (S1) 6 Scanner motor (M1)
3 ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21) 7 Sensor board unit (SBU) (PCB10)
4 Auto paper size (APS) sensor (S22)

551
8.Detailed Descriptions

Paper Feed Unit

No. Description No. Description


1 Registration clutch (CL3) 5 Upper limit sensor (S13)
2 Relay clutch (CL6) 6 Paper end sensor (S12)
3 Paper feed clutch (CL4) 7 Registration sensor (S16)
4 Tray lift motor (M4) 8 Paper size switch (SW4)

552
8.Detailed Descriptions

Laser Unit, PCDU, Fusing Unit

No. Description No. Description


1 Thermistor (End) (H2) 7 Quenching lamp (L1)
2 Thermistor (Center) (H1) 8 Laser unit
3 Thermostat (S4) 9 LD drive board (PCB5)
4 Fusing lamp 10 Contact/Release solenoid (SOL1)
5 ID sensor (S6) 11 Toner supply motor (M5)
6 TD sensor (S7)

553
8.Detailed Descriptions

Bypass Unit

No. Description No. Description


1 Bypass length sensor (S11) 3 Bypass paper feed clutch (CL5)
2 Bypass width sensor (S10) 4 Bypass paper end sensor (S9)

554
8.Detailed Descriptions

Paper Exit Unit, Reverse Unit, Duplex Unit

No. Description No. Description


1 Paper exit clutch (CL1) 3 Duplex clutch (CL2)
2 Reverse clutch (CL7) 4 Paper exit sensor (S5)

555
8.Detailed Descriptions

Drive Unit

No. Description
1 Main motor (M3)

556
8.Detailed Descriptions

Electrical Component

D0B2,D0B3

No. Description No. Description


1 Exhaust fan (FAN1) 7 PSU (PCB1) (Power supply unit)
2 Right door switch (SW1) 8 DHB (PCB2) *option
3 Interlock switch (SW2) 9 HVPS (High-voltage power supply board) (PCB3)
4 Main power switch (SW3) 10 MPU (PCB7)
5 Room temperature sensor (S14) 11 Imaging temperature sensor (S8)
6 Main fan (FAN2) 12 Platen cover sensor (S2)

557
8.Detailed Descriptions

D0B4

No. Description No. Description


1 Exhaust fan (FAN1) 8 PSU (Power supply unit) (PCB1)
2 Right door switch (SW1) 9 DHB (PCB2) *option
3 Interlock switch (SW2) 10 HVPS (High-voltage power supply board) (PCB3)
4 Main power switch (SW3) 11 MPU (PCB7)
5 Room temperature sensor (S14) 12 Imaging temperature sensor (S8)
6 Front Door Switch (SW5) 13 ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21)
7 Main fan (FAN2)

558
8.Detailed Descriptions

Paper Path

D0B2,D0B3

No. Description No. Description


1 ADF unit (D0B3 only) 3 Bypass tray
2 Duplex unit

559
8.Detailed Descriptions

D0B4

No. Description No. Description


1 ADF unit 3 Bypass tray
2 Duplex unit

560
8.Detailed Descriptions

Drive Layout

D0B2,D0B3

No. Description No. Description


1 ADF inverter solenoid (SOL2) (D0B3 only) 9 Duplex clutch (CL2)
2 ADF pickup solenoid (D0B3 only) 10 Registration clutch (CL3)
3 ADF main motor (M6) (D0B3 only) 11 Main motor (M3)
4 Toner supply motor (M5) 12 Scanner motor (M1)
5 Tray lift motor (M4) 13 Reverse clutch (CL7) (near side)
6 Paper feed clutch (CL4) 14 Paper exit clutch (CL1) (back side)
7 Bypass paper feed clutch (CL5) 15 Contact/Release solenoid (SOL1)
8 Relay clutch (CL6)

561
8.Detailed Descriptions

D0B4

No. Description No. Description


1 Inverter solenoid (SOL1) 9 Relay clutch (CL6)
2 Pick-up solenoid (SOL2) 10 Duplex clutch (CL2)
3 Paper feed motor (M1) 11 Registration clutch (CL3)
4 Paper transport motor (M2) 12 Main motor (M3)
5 Toner supply motor (M5) 13 Scanner motor (M26)
6 Tray lift motor (M4) 14 Reverse clutch (CL7) (near side)
7 Paper feed clutch (CL4) 15 Paper exit clutch (CL1) (back side)
8 Bypass paper feed clutch (CL5) 16 Contact/Release solenoid (SOL1)

562
8.Detailed Descriptions

ADF (D0B3)

Overview

No. Description No. Description


1 ADF entrance roller 11 Platen cover
2 Original feed roller 12 ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21)
3 Friction pad 13 Reverse roller
4 Original stopper 14 Junction gate
5 Original set actuator 15 Original exit roller
6 Pickup roller 16 ADF main motor (M6)
7 Original set sensor (S18) 17 White plate guide
8 ADF cover sensor (S19) 18 ADF registration sensor (S20)
9 Original tray 19 Pre-scanning roller
10 ADF exit tray

563
8.Detailed Descriptions

No. Description No. Description


1 ADF registration sensor (S20) 6 ADF inverter solenoid (SOL2)
2 ADF main motor (M6) 7 ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21)
3 ADF pickup solenoid (SOL3) 8 ADF main board (PCB8)
4 Original set sensor (S18) 9 Original width sensor (S17)
5 ADF cover sensor (S19)

Original Transport Drive

The ADF main motor (M6) [C] drives each roller through gears.
The ADF pickup solenoid (SOL3) [A] controls the original pickup.
The ADF inverter solenoid (SOL2) [B] operates the reverse junction gate.

Original Transport Mechanism 1

564
8.Detailed Descriptions

The stopper [A] prevents the user from placing originals [D] too far into the feeder.
After that, the original set sensor (S2) [B] detects the originals, and original transport will be started.

Original Transport Mechanism 2

The ADF pickup solenoid (SOL3) lowers the pickup roller [C].
The original can reach the original feed roller [A] because the original stopper [B] does not stop the
original if the pickup roller [C] is lowered.

Single-sided Scanning

The original is transported from the ADF entrance roller [A] to the pre-scanning roller [B], and then it
passes under the white plate guide [C].
The original is fed out from the ADF by the original exit roller [D].

565
8.Detailed Descriptions

Duplex Scanning

The ADF inverter solenoid (SOL2) lowers the junction gate [B], and the original is transported to the
reverse roller [C].
Then, the reverse roller [C] transports the original out of the ADF by rotating in reverse.
After that, the ADF inverter solenoid (SOL2) is turned off after the trailing edge of the original passes
the original exit roller [A], and the reverse roller starts normal rotation.
The original comes back into the ADF.
After the second side is scanned, the ADF reverses the original again and feeds it out face down.

566
8.Detailed Descriptions

ADF (D0B4)

Original Detection

When an original is placed on the original tray correctly, the edge of the original pushes up the feeler of
the original sensor (SN11).

Original Size Detection / Original Set Detection Mechanism

Five original width sensors detect the width of the original just when the leading edge of the original
passes the interval sensor. Three original length sensors on the original table detect the length. These
two pieces of size information summarize the original size.
Size (Width x Length: mm) Width Detection Length Detection
1 2 3 4 5 S M L
1 A3 SEF (297 x 420) On On On On On On On On
2 B4 SEF (257 x 364) On On On - - On On On
3 A4 SEF (210 x 297) On On - - - On On -
4 A4 LEF (297 x 210) On On On On On - - -
5 B5 SEF (182 x 257) On - - - - On - -
6 B5 LEF (257 x 182) On On On - - - - -
7 A5 SEF (148 x 210) On - - - - - - -
8 A5 LEF (210 x 148) On On - - - - - -
9 B6 SEF (128 x 182) - - - - - - - -
10 B6 LEF (182 x 128) On - - - - - - -
11 11" x 17" SEF (DLT) On On On On - On On On
12 8 1/2" x 13" SEF (Foolscap SEF) On On - - - On On On

13 8 1/2" x 11" SEF (LT) On On - - - On - -


14 11" x 81/2" LEF (LT) On On On On - - - -

Sensor Position

567
8.Detailed Descriptions

Description
A Original Width Sensors (SN1) (SN2) (SN3) (SN4) (SN5)
B Original Set Sensor (SN9)
C Original Length Sensors (SN12) (SN13) (SN14)

Paper Feed / Separation Mechanism

The separation mechanism uses the RF method.


When the originals are placed and [Start] is pressed, the paper feed solenoid is turned ON and the
pickup roller [A] goes down to the original. At this time, the feed motor (MT1) [B] switches on and the
pickup roller and paper feed motor [B] start rotating. Then a sheet of paper is fed.

Description
A Pickup Roller
B Feed Motor
C Paper Feed Belt

568
8.Detailed Descriptions

Skew Correction Mechanism, Registration Mechanism

• Skew Correction
This machine adjusts paper skew by hitting the originals against the pullout roller [A].
The skew correction sensor (SN10) [B] detects the leading edge of the original after it passes
through the separation area.
After hitting the originals against the pullout roller and making a buckle in the original, the transport
motor (MT2) turns ON. This mechanism prevents skewed feeding of the originals.
• Registration Mechanism
The registration sensor (SN6) [C] detects the leading edge of the originals. The machine uses the
data for registration during copying.

A Pullout Roller
B Skew Correction Sensor (SN10)
C Registration Sensor (SN6)
D Original Width Sensor (SN1) (SN2) (SN3) (SN4) (SN5)
E Sheet-through Exposure Glass
• Transport Mechanism (Simplex)
Originals are transported by the pullout roller [A] and the entrance transport roller [B] to the sheet-
through exposure glass [C], which scans the image. After this process, the originals are transported
to paper exit section by the exit transport roller [D] and the exit driven roller [E].

569
8.Detailed Descriptions

Description
A Pullout Roller
B Entrance Transport Roller
C Sheet-through Exposure Glass
D Exit Transport Roller
E Exit Driven roller
• Transport Mechanism (Duplex)
When originals are detected by the skew correction sensor (SN10) [A], the transport motor
(MT2) switches OFF and the original stops for a while. After skew correction, the originals are
re-transported to the sheet-through exposure glass [B], which scans the first side (front). Then
the inverter solenoid (SL1) switches ON and the junction gate [C] opens. By that process, the
originals are transported to the reverse roller. At this time, the transport motor (MT2) stops and
the inverter solenoid (SL1) switches off.

Description
A Skew Correction Sensor (SN10)
B Sheet-through Exposure Glass
C Junction Gate
The originals, which reached the reverse roller, are re-fed over the upper surface of the
junction gate [A]. When the originals reach the sheet-through exposure glass [B], the second
side (back) is scanned.
To make the order of the sheets on the exit tray correct, the two sides (front/back) of the
original need to be inverted. Therefore, the inverter solenoid (SL1) switches ON and the
originals are transported to the reverse roller again. After the inversion, the originals exit onto
the exit tray [C].

570
8.Detailed Descriptions

SP6-901-002 (Setting to give priority to stackability)

To improve the alignment of the delivered originals, select to give priority to stackability in the following
SP. This will reduce the originals’ delivery speed and improve their stackability.
• SP6-901-002 (ADF Operation Setting Stack Mode): Setting to give priority to stackability
0: Higher throughput (default)
1: Higher stackability

Related SPs

SP No. Selection Overview


Def.
6-901- 0 ADF Operation Setting Stack Mode (SP6-901-002 (Setting to give priority to
002 stackability))

571
8.Detailed Descriptions

Scanning (D0B2,D0B3)

Overview

No. Description No. Description


1 CIS unit (PCB4) (with carriage) 5 Original size sensors (width)
2 Exposure glass 6 Scanner HP sensor (S1)
3 Scanner motor (M1) 7 DF exposure glass
4 Original size sensors (length)
• CIS unit (PCB4)
3-ch unity-magnifying contact image sensor capable of A3 color scanning
• Bottom frame
Resin base
• Upper frame
Composed of a resin base, exposure glass, and DF exposure glass
• Sensor
1-ch CIS + integrated carriage + slide guide
• Drive
Belt drive using a PM stepping motor
• Exterior
The bottom frame (resin base) is integrated into the exterior.
• Original size sensors
2 width sensors and 2 length sensors (the sensor location depends on the country of use).
Refer to the "Original Size Sensor (S3) Layout".

572
8.Detailed Descriptions

Scanner Drive

This machine is a flatbed scanner using a CIS unit (PCB4).


To scan an original, the scanner motor (M1) [A] moves the carriage on which the CIS unit (PCB4) [B] is
mounted along the carrier guide rod [C].
The CIS unit (PCB4) can be adjusted relative to the main scanning direction using the center guide rod
[C].
This is a factory adjustment; do not do this in the field.

Original Size Sensor (S3) Layout

The layout of the original size sensors (S3) depends on the destination.
Description Destination Shown in the layout chart as
Original size sensors (length) EU, AP [A]
CHN [B]
573
8.Detailed Descriptions

Description Destination Shown in the layout chart as


Original size sensors (width) All areas [C]

Related SPs

SP No. Selection Overview


Def.
4-008- 0 Magnification ratio adjustment (Magnification)
001
4-010- 0 Leading edge adjustment (Registration: Platen Mode)
001
4-011- 0 Side-to-side adjustment (Registration: Platen Mode)
001
4-688- 100 Use this to adjust the density level if the image density of outputs made in the
001 DF and platen mode is different.(Adjusting the Scanner Parameters)

574
8.Detailed Descriptions

Scanning (D0B4)

Overview

The short focus scanner is realized by implementing a lens block (SBU, CMOS, and Lens) on the
carriage.
After the scanner lamp unit emits the light to the document, the light goes through the route shown
below and reaches the CMOS.
Scanner lamp unit (LED) -> Original -> 1st mirror (13) -> 2nd mirror (3) -> 3rd mirror (6) -> 2nd mirror
(3) -> 4th mirror (5) -> 5th mirror (14) -> lens -> pre-sensor lens -> CMOS

No. Description No. Description


1 Sheet-through exposure glass 9 Sensor board unit (SBU) (PCB10)
2 Exposure glass 10 CMOS
3 2nd mirror 11 Pre-sensor lens
4 Scanner lamp unit (LED) 12 Lens
5 4th mirror 13 1st mirror
6 3rd mirror 14 5th mirror
7 Scanner motor (M1) - -
8 Auto paper size (APS) sensors (S22) - -

Reading System

Two scan modes are available: Book Mode (Platen Mode) and ADF Mode (Sheet-through Method).
In Book Mode (Platen Mode), the scanner scans the document from left to right.
When the ADF is used (ADF Mode), the scanner is fixed in the home position on the left side, and the
document is transported and read (Sheet-through Method).

Scanner

Scanner lamp

The light source is an LED.

575
8.Detailed Descriptions

The LED emits little heat (low power consumption) and has excellent light output rise characteristics.

Sensor

The sensor collects the light that was reflected from the original and converts it to three color digital
signals (R, G, B).
The resolution of this CMOS sensor is 600dpi.

Reflection plate (reflector)

The reflection plate reflects light from the scanner lamp and collects light to the reading point on a
document. The light which illuminates the document is adjusted to be the same on the left and right so
as not to cast any shadow on the document.

White reference seal

A white reference seal for shading correction is affixed to the underside of the scale on the left of the
scanner unit. This is read by the scanner and CMOS when the power is ON. The data read is
temporarily stored in a RAM, and used for correction of document image data.

Mechanism

Scanner Drive

The scanner is driven by the scanner motor (M1) [D] via the timing belt [C]. For each mode, reading is
completed in one pass.
Position control of the scanner carriage [B] is based on the scanner home position sensor (S1) [A].

576
8.Detailed Descriptions

Operation Flowchart

Overall Flowchart

Scanner Carriage Storage Control

To protect the scanner carriage, the carriage must be locked to the scanner frame before shipping. The
scanner can be moved to the shipping lock position with SP4-806-001 (Scanner carriage storage
operation).
If a pre-shipping check is required, make sure to move the scanner carriage to the right position with
SP4-806-001 and mount the locking parts.
SC121-00 will occur when the power is turned on or scanning takes place while the carriage is locked.

Document Size Detection

In this machine, for document size detection, two Auto Paper Size sensors, also called as APS sensors,
577
8.Detailed Descriptions

(S22) are used for the sub-scanning direction, and a CMOS is used for the main scanning direction.

Sub-scanning direction (by APS sensors)

The document size is detected by ON/OFF of the sensor. The ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21) is used
for document size detection timing. When the ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21) has changed from "no
cover" to "cover," the size is detected.

Main scanning direction (by CMOS)

RGB color densities at 3 locations (S1, S2, S3) are detected 3 times by the CMOS sensor. The
presence of the document is determined from the number of locations where an RGB density of 7 digits
or more is detected.
The ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21) is used for document size detection timing. When the ADF/Platen
cover sensor (S23) detects "no cover," the scanner lamp is moved to the right; when it detects "cover,"
the scanner lamp is moved to home position while lit, and during this time, the size is read.
The influence of ambient light is reduced by scanning with the scanner lamp (LED) turned off.

Document size Sensor response


Size Direction Dimensions S1 S2 S3 L1 L2
(main × sub)
A3 SEF 297x420 - -
B4 SEF 257x364 - -
A4 SEF 210x297 - - -
A4 LEF 297x210 - - - -
B5 SEF 182x257 - - - -

578
8.Detailed Descriptions

Document size Sensor response


B5 LEF 257x182 - - -
A5 SEF 148x210 - - - - -
A5 LEF 210x148 - - - -
B6 SEF 128×182 - - - - -
B6 LEF 182×128 - - - - -
DLT SEF 11"×17" - - -
10×15 SEF 10"×15" - - -
USB4 SEF 10"×14" - - -
LG SEF 8 1/2"×14" - - -
Oficio SEF 8 1/2"×13.4" - - -
Foolscap SEF 8 1/2"×13" - - -
Folio SEF 8 1/4"×13" - - -
F SEF 8"×13" - - -
LT SEF 8 1/2"×11" - - -
LT LEF 11"×8 1/2" - - - -
8×10 SEF 8"×10" - - -
10×8 LEF 10"×8" - - - -
Executive SEF 7 1/4"×10 1/2" - - - -
HLT SEF 5 1/2"×8 1/2" - - - - -
HLT LEF 8 1/2"×5 1/2" - - - -
8kai SEF 267×388 - - -
16kai SEF 194×267 - - - -
16kai LEF 267×194 - - - -

• The document width (main scanning direction) is detected by the sensor indicated with ‘ ’.

How to check the sensor state

• SP4-301 (Operation Check APS Sensor)


How to read the screen
(7)00000000(0)
0: no document
1: document present
When the sensor responds, bit 0 is displayed as "1."
• SP4-313 (Scan Size Detect Value)
Viewed from the operation panel, labeling positions from rear to front S1-S3 in that order, the RGB
density at each position is displayed in digit units (the value just before the scan is displayed).

579
8.Detailed Descriptions

Other

• SP4-303 (Min Size for APS)


Sets the display when non-standard (small size) size original is detected.
0: Display message "Original size unknown".
1: Operate assuming the original size is A5 LEF (HLT LEF for inches).
• SP4-305-001(8K/16K Detection)
By changing this SP, you can change between A4 size/letter size or Chinese paper size (8×16).
0: Normal setting. (Default)
1: When detecting A4/LT size -> Assume that it is A4 when SEF, LT when LEF.
2: When detecting A4/LT size -> Assume that it is LT when SEF, A4 when LEF.
3: Change to 8K/16K settings.
A3, B4 -> 8K LEF
A4 LEF, B4 LEF, A5 LEF -> 16K LEF
A4 SEF, B4 SEF, A5 SEF -> 16K SEF
• SP5-126 (Set F-size Document)
Selects the paper size for the F-size original.
0: When detecting Foolscap -> Assume that the size is 8 1/2"x13". (Default)
1: When detecting Folio -> Assume that the size is 8 1/4"x13".
2: When detecting F -> Assume that the size is 8"/13".
• SP4-308 (Scan Size Detection)
Sets CCD original size detection and APS original size detection.
0: Disable: Not detect original size
1: Enable: Detect original size by the CCD unit
2: APS: APS sensor (S44) (S45) is used for detecting original size.
• SP4-312-006 (Scan Size Detect: Setting LED PWM Duty)
If the user specifies that the pre-scan lamp is too bright, the brightness pre-scan can be reduced by
decreasing the value of this SP. However, if the lamp brightness is reduced, size detection for a
document with a large number of solid images will be less accurate.
• SP5-135 (LG_Oficio Change)
1: When detecting LG size -> Assume that the size is 8 1/2"x14".
2: When detecting Oficio size -> Assume that the size is 8 1/2"x13.4". (Default)
• Adding SP4-311-001 (Detection: Start Position)
To prevent the delay in starting scanning, the scanner carriage start position of this model is 10 mm
leftward (closer to scale) than that of the previous model. Since there may be rare occasions where
it is necessary to move the scanner carriage start position to that of the previous model, this SP
allows the start position to be changed.
0: 20 mm (default)
1: 30 mm (same as the previous model)
2: 130 mm
580
8.Detailed Descriptions

Improved Tolerance to Black Lines when Paper Passes through ARDF/SPDF

The original document does not come in contact with the sheet-through exposure glass, which prevents
adhesive dirt (ball pen ink) on the document from adhering to the sheet-through exposure glass.
ADF cross-section diagram, non-contact scanning

[A]: Sheet
[B]: Sheet-through exposure glass
[C]: Read position
[D]: Document
• Contact scanning
As the document comes in contact with the sheet-through exposure glass this is useful for dealing
with adhesion of free dirt particles (paper scraps, etc.). (Self-cleaning mechanism using paper)
On the other hand, sticky dirt adhering to the document sticks to the sheet-through exposure glass
and may give rise to the appearance of black lines.
ADF cross-section diagram, contact scanning

[A]: Sheet-through exposure glass


[B]: Read position
[C]: Document
If black lines due to free dirt particles appear within a short time, such as when users have
documents with large amounts of paper scraps, you can change from the non-contact scanning
system to the contact scanning system with the procedure in Troubleshooting - Vertical Streaks on
581
8.Detailed Descriptions

Copies due to Scanning Problems.


• Reference (reading position correction)
By changing SP4-020-001 (Dust Check Dust Detect:On/Off), when dirt is detected at the reading
position, the reading position may be changed to avoid the dirt.
(If it cannot be avoided, an alert is displayed on the operation panel advising the user to perform
target glass cleaning).
Image diagram

[A]: Read position


[B]: Sheet-through exposure glass
[C]: Dirt

• Dirt is detected when a document passes through, so the alert will not disappear until the
reading of the next document begins, even after the sheet-through exposure glass
cleaning is performed.
• If dirt is detected not on the sheet-through exposure glass but on the background guide
plate, the alert will not disappear even if the glass is wiped.
• The time required for the first copy is slightly (almost imperceptibly) longer.
• The detection threshold value can be changed using SP4-020-002 (Dust Check Dust
Detect:Lvl). (The larger the value is, the smaller the dirt particles that can be detected
become.)
• It is prohibited to change the setting of SP4-020-003 (Dust Check Lvl Dust Reject:Lvl).

Difference between Non-contact Transport and Contact Transport in DF Scanning

Transport Non-contact Transport Contact Transport


Method
Descriptions

Because of the film attached to the While passing, the original contacts the
glass, the original doesn’t contact the glass.
glass.

582
8.Detailed Descriptions

Transport Non-contact Transport Contact Transport


Method
Merit It almost never causes stripes on the It almost never causes stripes on the
image that arise from foreign image that arise from dust on the glass,
substances transferring from the because the glass is cleaned by contact
original to the glass. with the transported original.
Demerit Compared with the contact method, Compared with the non-contact method,
stripes on the image caused by dust stripes on the image caused by foreign
occur more often. substances transferred from the surface of
an original to the glass occur more often.
Aim To improve the prevention of stripes in Considering the target users of this
the image caused by sticky foreign machine, it’s important to improve
substances. prevention of stripes caused by dust in the
path
Note 1. Be sure to replace the sheet- -
through glass with the film
attached on the glass.
2. When you attach the film on the
glass, you need to keep the left
scale attached on the glass in
order to fix the location of the
film.*1
3. You can change the method
(contact method to non-contact, or
vice versa) by replacing some
parts.*1
*1: For details, Vertical Streaks on Copies due to Scanning Problems (D0B4).

Related SPs

SP No. Selection Overview


Def.
4-020- 0 Dust Check Dust Detect:On/Off (Improved Tolerance to Black Lines when
001 Paper Passes through ARDF/SPDF)
4-020- 4 Dust Check Dust Detect:Lvl (Improved Tolerance to Black Lines when Paper
002 Passes through ARDF/SPDF)
4-020- 0 Dust Check Lvl Dust Reject:Lvl (Improved Tolerance to Black Lines when
003 Paper Passes through ARDF/SPDF)

583
8.Detailed Descriptions

SP No. Selection Overview


Def.
4-301- 0 Operation Check APS Sensor (Document Size Detection)
001
4-303- 0 Min Size for APS (Document Size Detection)
001
4-305- 0 8K/16K Detection (Document Size Detection)
001
4-308- 1 Scan Size Detection (Document Size Detection)
001
4-311- 0 Detection: Start Position (Document Size Detection)
001
4-312- 22 Scan Size Detect: Setting LED PWM Duty (Document Size Detection)
006
4-313- 0 Scan Size Detect Value (Document Size Detection)
001
to
4-313-
036
4-806- 0 Scanner carriage storage operation (Scanner Carriage Storage Control)
001
5-126- 0 Set F-size Document (Document Size Detection)
001
5-135- 0 LG_Oficio Change (Document Size Detection)
001

584
8.Detailed Descriptions

Laser Exposure

Overview

Name
A Synchronization detector mirrors
B Synchronization detector lens
C Mirror
D F-theta lens
E Soundproof glass
F Polygon motor
G Cylindrical lens
H LD drive board

The LD drive board controls both the laser output and laser synchronization mechanism. The machine
cuts off the power supply to the LD drive board if the front door or right door is opened.

585
8.Detailed Descriptions

Auto Power Control (APC)

The LD driver IC drives the laser diode.


To prevent the intensity of the laser beam from changing because of the temperature, the machine
monitors the current passing through the laser diode (LD).
The machine adjusts the current to the laser diode by comparing it with the reference level from the
reference circuit.
This auto power control is done just after the machine is turned on and during printing.
The laser diode power is adjusted on the production line.

Do not touch the variable resistors on the LD unit in the field.

586
8.Detailed Descriptions

LD Safety Switch

To ensure the technician's and user's safety and to prevent the laser beam from inadvertently switching
on during servicing, the safety switch for the front door and right door is located on the front-right side of
the machine.
The switch is installed on the +24VS line through the MPU (PCB7) board.
When the front door or the right cover is opened, the power supply to the laser diode is interrupted.

587
8.Detailed Descriptions

PCDU

Overview

The PCDU consists of the components shown in the above illustration.


The PCU (diameter: 30 mm) is used in this machine.
No. Description No. Description
1 Cleaning blade 6 Development roller
2 Toner collection coil 7 Development unit
3 Pickoff pawl 8 Charge roller
4 PCU (drum) 9 Charge roller cleaning brush
5 ID sensor (S6) 10 Quenching lamp (L1)

The ID sensor (S6) and the quenching lamp (L1) are not included in the PCDU.

588
8.Detailed Descriptions

Drive

The main motor (M3) [A] drives the drum gear [B] and the drum drive shaft [C].
The main motor (M3) assembly includes a drive controller, which outputs a motor lock signal when the
rotation speed is out of the specified range.

Related SPs

SP No. Selection Overview


Def.
2-801- 0 Perform initialization of the developer after replacement with a new PCDU,
001 etc. (Developer)
7-622- 0 Reset the PM counter of the OPC. (PM Parts Replacement Procedure)
021
7-622- 0 Reset the PM counter of the developer. (PM Parts Replacement Procedure)
024
7-622- 0 Reset the PM counter of the transfer screw (bearing). (Mixing Auger
028 Bearings)

589
8.Detailed Descriptions

Drum Charge/Quenching

Overview

This product uses a drum charge roller to charge the drum.


The drum charge roller [A] always contacts the surface of the drum [B] to give it a negative charge of –
950 V.
The high-voltage power supply board (PCB3) gives a negative charge of –1700 V to the drum charge
roller through the screw [C] and terminal plate [D].
This voltage can be changed using SP2-001-001 (Charge Roller Bias Adjust Setting (Copying)).

ID Sensor Pattern Production Timing

The ID sensor pattern is not made on every page or in every job.


It is only made in the following conditions:
• During warm-up at power on
• When the machine starts warming up from energy saver mode and the temperature is less than the
target temperature as set with SP Mode.
• When the machine starts warming up from energy saver mode and the machine prints more than
100 prints after generating the p-pattern.

Drum Charge Roller Cleaning

590
8.Detailed Descriptions

Because the drum charge roller [A] always contacts the drum, it gets dirty easily.
So, the cleaning brush [B] also contacts the drum charge roller all the time to clean the surface of the
drum charge roller.

Quenching

The quenching lamp (L1) quenches the charge from the drum surface at the end of every print cycle.
No. Description
1 PCU (drum)
2 Quenching lamp (L1)

591
8.Detailed Descriptions

Related SPs

SP No. Selection Overview


Def.
2-001-001 -1470 Set the charge roller bias adjust. (Overview)
7-622-021 0 Reset the PM counter of the OPC. (PM Parts Replacement Procedure)

592
8.Detailed Descriptions

Development

Overview

The development unit consists of the following parts.


No. Item
1 Development roller
2 Mixing auger 2
3 TD sensor (S7)
4 Mixing auger 1
5 Doctor blade
This machine uses a single-roller development system. Two mixing augers mix the developer.
The toner density (TD) sensor and image density (ID) sensor (see the illustration in the PCDU section)
are used to control the image density on the copy.
This sensor (called a mu sensor) is placed on the bottom of the development unit.
It is a toner density sensor to detect the blend ratio of the developer (carrier) and toner in the unit by
converting magnetic permeability change to frequency.

593
8.Detailed Descriptions

Drive

The main motor (M3) [A] drives the development roller [B] and mixing augers [C] through a train of
gears and the development drive shaft [D].
When the PCDU is pushed in, the development drive shaft engages the development roller gear.
The development drive gears (except for the gears in the development unit) are helical gears.
These gears are quieter than normal gears.

Developer Mixing

594
8.Detailed Descriptions

The two mixing augers [A] and [B] keep the developer evenly mixed.
Mixing auger 2 [A] transports excess developer, scraped off the development roller [C] by the doctor
blade [D], towards the front of the machine.
Mixing auger 1 [B] returns the excess developer, along with new toner, to the rear of the mixing
assembly.
Here the developer is reapplied to the development roller.

Development Bias

This machine uses a negative-positive development system, in which black areas of the latent image
are at a low negative charge (about –154 ± 50 V) and white areas are at a high negative charge (about
–950 V).
To attract negatively charged toner to the black areas of the latent image on the drum, the high-voltage
power supply board (PCB3) applies a bias of –520 volts to the development rollers throughout the
image development process.
The bias is applied to the development roller shaft [A] through the drive shaft [B].
The development bias voltage (–520 V) can be adjusted with SP2-201-001.

595
8.Detailed Descriptions

Toner Supply

Toner bottle replenishment mechanism

When a toner bottle is placed in the bottle holder unit [A] and the unit is pushed in completely, the toner
outlet [B] of the bottle holder fits the toner inlet [C] of the development unit.
When the toner bottle holder lever [D] is put back in the original position, the cap [E] on the toner bottle
is pulled away and kept in place by the chuck [F].
The toner supply mechanism transports toner from the bottle to the development unit.
The toner bottle has a spiral groove [G] that helps move toner to the development unit.
To add a new toner bottle, first lift the toner bottle holder. When this is done, the chuck releases the
toner bottle cap into its proper position to prevent toner from scattering.

596
8.Detailed Descriptions

Toner Supply Mechanism

The toner supply motor (M5) [A] drives the toner bottle [B] and the sheet blades [C].
First, the toner falls down into the toner bottle holder.
The toner supply sheet blades transfer the toner to the outlet [D].
When the PCU is installed in the machine, the outlet of the bottle holder fits the inlet of the development
unit.
Then the toner falls down into the development unit through the outlet and the inlet.

Toner Density Control

Overview

There are four modes for controlling toner supply, which can be changed with by SP2-921-001. The
factory setting is sensor control 1 mode.
Basically, the toner concentration in the developer is controlled using the toner supply reference voltage
(Vtref), the actual TD sensor output voltage (Vt), and ID sensor output data (Vsp/Vsg).

597
8.Detailed Descriptions

The four-toner density control modes are as follows.


Mode Sensor control 1 (SP2-921-001, "0"): Normally use this setting only
Toner supply Compare Vt with a reference voltage (Vtref)
decision
Toner control Toner is supplied to the development unit when Vt is higher than the reference
process voltage (Vtref). This mode keeps the Vtref value for use with the next toner density
control.
Vt is used for the first toner density control after a new PCU has been installed.
Vtref is used after it has been corrected after the ID sensor density control.
Toner supply Varies
amount
Toner end Performed
detection

Mode Sensor control 2 (SP2-921-001, "1"): For designer's use only


Toner supply decision Compare Vt with a reference voltage (Vtref)
Toner control process This toner control process is the same as sensor control 1.
Toner supply amount Varies
Toner end detection Performed

Mode Fixed control 1 (SP2-921-001, "2"): For designer's use only


Toner supply decision Compare Vt with a reference voltage (Vtref)

598
8.Detailed Descriptions

Toner control process This toner control process is the same as sensor control 1.
Toner supply amount Fixed (SP 2925)
Toner end detection Performed

Mode Fixed control 2 (SP2-921-001, “3”): For designer's use only


Toner supply decision None
Toner control process Toner is supplied every printed page regardless of Vt.
Toner supply amount Fixed (SP 2925)
Toner end detection Not performed

Toner supply motor on time determinations

For fixed control mode, the toner supply motor on time is specified by the setting of SP2-925, and does
not vary.
The default setting is 200 ms for each copy.
For sensor control modes 1 and 2, the toner supply motor on time is decided by the following factors.
• Vt
• Vtref
• TD sensor sensitivity (coefficient: S, value is 0.3)
There are seven levels for toner supply motor on time as shown below.
Level Mode Decision Motor On Time (seconds)
Vt=Vt-Vtref
0 No supply Vt ≤ 0 0
1 Normal 0 < Vt ≤ S/16 T
2 Normal S/16 < Vt ≤ S/8 a×t
3 Normal S/8 < Vt ≤ S/4 b×t
4 Normal S/4 < Vt ≤ S/2 c×t
5 Normal S/2 < Vt ≤ 4/5 d×t
6 Intermittent (reference: near-end) 4S/5 < Vt ≤ S T
7 Intermittent (reference: toner end) S < Vt T

T means that toner is supplied intermittently in a cycle (e seconds on, f seconds off).
The value of “S” can be changed using SP2-931-001 (default: 0.3V)
The value of “t” can be changed using SP2-922-001 (default: 0.4 second)
The value of “T” can be changed using SP2-923-001 (default: 30 seconds)
The value of “a” can be changed using SP2-922-002 (default: 1.0 seconds)
The value of “b” can be changed using SP2-922-003 (default: 1.0 seconds)
The value of “c” can be changed using SP2-922-004 (default: 2.0 seconds)
The value of “d” can be changed using SP2-922-005 (default: 4.0 seconds)
The value of “e” can be changed using SP2-923-002 (default: 1.5 seconds)
599
8.Detailed Descriptions

The value of “f” can be changed using SP2-923-003 (default: 1.5 seconds)

Toner Near End/End Detection and Recovery

Toner near end and toner end are detected by the TD sensor (S7).
This is done in all toner supply modes except for fixed mode 2 when toner end is not detected.

Toner Near End Detection

If toner supply motor on time is at level 6 or higher ten times consecutively, the machine enters the
toner near end condition and the toner end indicator starts blinking on the operation panel. Then the
machine supplies toner for a certain time, which depends on the setting of SP 2-923-001.

Toner Near End Recovery

If toner supply motor on time is at level 5 or lower twice consecutively in any of the following situations,
the machine clears the toner near end condition.
• While in the toner recovery cycle after the machine has detected a toner near end condition.
• During copying in the toner near end condition.
• If the front door is opened and closed for more than 5 seconds.

Toner End Detection

There are two situations for entering the toner end condition.
• When toner supply motor on time is level 7 three times consecutively while in toner near-end
condition.
• When 50 copies*2 have been made since entering the toner near end condition.
*2 The number of copies between toner near-end and toner end can be changed using SP2-213.
When toner end is detected, the following is performed.
• During paper feed: The machine enters toner end condition as soon as printing on the paper being fed
finishes.
• During intermittent toner supply: The machine enters toner end condition as soon as intermittent toner
supply finishes.

Toner End Recovery

If the front door is opened for 5 seconds or more while the main power is turned ON, the machine
assumes that the toner bottle has been replaced, and clears the Toner End condition.

Related SPs

SP No. Selection Overview


Def.
2-201- -520 Adjust the development bias voltage. (Development Bias)
001

600
8.Detailed Descriptions

SP No. Selection Overview


Def.
2-213- 0 Set the remaining number of copies to make before the toner end after
001 detection of the toner near end. (Toner End Detection)
2-224- 0 The current number of copies to use as the toner near end with SP2-213-1.
001
2-921- 0 Change the toner supply control. (Overview)
001
2-922- 0.4 (Toner supply motor on time determinations)
001
2-922- 1
002
2-922- 1
003
2-922- 2
004
2-922- 4
005
2-923- 30
001
2-923- 1.5
002
2-923- 1.5
003
2-925- 0.2
001
2-931- 0.3
001
7-622- 0 Reset the PM counter of the developer. (PM Parts Replacement Procedure)
024
7-622- 0 Reset the PM counter of the transfer screw (bearing). (PM Parts Replacement
028 Procedure)

601
8.Detailed Descriptions

Drum Cleaning and Toner Recycling

Drum Cleaning

The cleaning blade [A] removes any toner remaining on the drum after the image is transferred to the
paper.
This model uses a counter blade system.
The cleaning blade scrapes off toner remaining on the drum.
When toner builds up in the cleaning unit, toner at the top of the pile is removed by the toner collection
coil [B].
To remove the toner and other particles that are accumulated at the edge of the cleaning blade, the
drum turns in reverse for 60 msec at the end of every copy job.

602
8.Detailed Descriptions

Toner Recycling

Toner picked up by the toner collection coil [A], is transported to the opening [B] in the side of the PCU.
Then, this toner falls into the development unit with new toner coming from the toner bottle and it is all
mixed together by mixing auger 1 [C] and used again.

603
8.Detailed Descriptions

Image Transfer and Paper Separation

Overview

The transfer roller [A] touches the surface of the drum [B].
The high voltage supply board supplies a positive current to the transfer roller, which attracts the toner
from the drum onto the paper.
The current depends on the paper width, paper type, and paper feed tray.
The curvature of the drum and the discharge plate [C] help the paper to separate from the drum.
The discharge plate is grounded.

604
8.Detailed Descriptions

The drum rotation is transmitted to the transfer roller by friction, and the roller will turn.

Image Transfer Current Timing

This machine has four patterns of image transfer current settings for each "paper type," "paper size,"
and "front/reverse side."
If the temperature in the machine is high, high image transfer current is used.
The temperature range can be adjusted with SP (SP2-307-001 to SP2-307-005).
The image transfer current correction value can be set with SP (SP2-301-001 to SP2-301-133) for each
"paper type," "front/reverse side" and "image area, leading edge, and trailing edge."

Transfer Roller Cleaning

If the paper size is smaller than the image, or if a paper jam occurs during printing, the toner may be
transferred to the roller surface.
To prevent the toner from transferring to the back side of the printouts, the transfer roller requires
cleaning before the next printing run.
During transfer roller cleaning, the high voltage power supply board (PCB3) supplies a negative
cleaning current (about –4 mA) to the transfer roller.
Any negatively charged toner on the transfer roller is then transferred back to the drum.
Then a positive cleaning current (+10 mA) is applied to the transfer roller to push back to the drum any
positively charged toner on the transfer roller.
The machine goes through the cleaning mode in the following conditions:
• Before starting the printing job (only if enabled with SP2-996; note that the default setting is off).
• Just after the power is switched on.

605
8.Detailed Descriptions

• After a copy jam has been cleared.


• After 10 or more sheets of paper have been copied and the copy job has finished.
Also, the transfer roller cleaning current can be adjusted using SP2-303-001 and -002.

Paper Separation Mechanism

The discharge plate [A] and the drum curvature of the drum help the paper to separate away from the
drum.
The discharge plate is grounded.

Related SPs

SP Selection Overview
No. Def.
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Thin:Image image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
001
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Thin:Lead image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
002
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Thin:Trail image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current

606
8.Detailed Descriptions

SP Selection Overview
No. Def.
301- Timing)
003
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Plai1:Image image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
011
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Plai1:Lead image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
012
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Plai1:Trail image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
013
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Plai2:Image image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
021
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Plai2:Lead image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
022
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Plai2:Trail image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
023
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Mid:Image image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
031
2- 0 Correct the 1sideMid:Lead image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
032
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Mid:Trail image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
033
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Thic1:Image image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
041
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Thic1:Lead image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
042
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Thic1:Trail image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current

607
8.Detailed Descriptions

SP Selection Overview
No. Def.
301- Timing)
043
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Thic2:Image image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
051
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Thic2:Lead image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
052
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Thic2:Trail image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
053
2- 0 Correct the 2side:Plai1:Image image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
111
2- 0 Correct the 2side:Plai1:Lead image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
112
2- 0 Correct the 2side:Plai1:Trail image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
113
2- 0 Correct the 2side:Plai2:Image image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
121
2- 0 Correct the 2side:Plai2:Lead image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
122
2- 0 Correct the 2side:Plai2:Trail image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
123
2- 0 Correct the 2side:Mid:Image image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
131
2- 0 Correct the 2sideMid:Lead image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
132
2- 0 Correct the 2side:Mid:Trail image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current

608
8.Detailed Descriptions

SP Selection Overview
No. Def.
301- Timing)
133
2- 10 CL bias: positive: Use to deal with marks on the back side generated due to
303- attachment of weakly-charged toner or reverse-polarity toner to the transfer
001 roller. Use in combination with 2-303-002. (Transfer Roller Cleaning)
2- 4 CL bias: negative :Use to deal with marks on the back side generated due to
303- attachment of toner to the transfer roller caused by paper jams, etc. Use in
002 combination with 2-303-001. (Transfer Roller Cleaning)
2- 13 Set the temperature threshold of the Division 1 image transfer current. (Image
307- Transfer Current Timing)
001
2- 19 Set the temperature threshold of the Division 2 image transfer current. (Image
307- Transfer Current Timing)
002
2- 24 Set the temperature threshold of the Division 3 image transfer current. (Image
307- Transfer Current Timing)
003
2- 99 Set the temperature threshold of the Division 4 image transfer current. (Image
307- Transfer Current Timing)
004
2- -99 Set the temperature threshold of the Division 5 image transfer current. (Image
307- Transfer Current Timing)
005
2- 0 Specify whether or not to clean the transfer roller before printing. (Transfer Roller
996- Cleaning)
001
2- 50 Specif